US20050164235A1 - Modified iRNA agents - Google Patents

Modified iRNA agents Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20050164235A1
US20050164235A1 US10/946,873 US94687304A US2005164235A1 US 20050164235 A1 US20050164235 A1 US 20050164235A1 US 94687304 A US94687304 A US 94687304A US 2005164235 A1 US2005164235 A1 US 2005164235A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
irna agent
compound
radical
subunit
strand
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/946,873
Inventor
Muthiah Manoharan
Kallanthottathil Rajeev
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/US2004/007070 external-priority patent/WO2004080406A2/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2004/010586 external-priority patent/WO2004090108A2/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2004/011255 external-priority patent/WO2004091515A2/en
Priority claimed from PCT/US2004/011822 external-priority patent/WO2004094345A2/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US10/946,873 priority Critical patent/US20050164235A1/en
Assigned to ALNYLAM PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment ALNYLAM PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MANOHARAN, MUTHIAH, RAJEEV, KALLANTHOTTATHIL G.
Publication of US20050164235A1 publication Critical patent/US20050164235A1/en
Priority to US12/619,382 priority patent/US8344125B2/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/111—General methods applicable to biologically active non-coding nucleic acids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/55—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound the modifying agent being also a pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent, i.e. the entire conjugate being a codrug, i.e. a dimer, oligomer or polymer of pharmacologically or therapeutically active compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/554—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound the modifying agent being a steroid plant sterol, glycyrrhetic acid, enoxolone or bile acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H21/00—Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids
    • C07H21/02—Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids with ribosyl as saccharide radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113—Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/10—Type of nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/11—Antisense
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/10—Type of nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/14—Type of nucleic acid interfering N.A.
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/31—Chemical structure of the backbone
    • C12N2310/315—Phosphorothioates
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/32—Chemical structure of the sugar
    • C12N2310/321—2'-O-R Modification
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/32—Chemical structure of the sugar
    • C12N2310/323—Chemical structure of the sugar modified ring structure
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/34—Spatial arrangement of the modifications
    • C12N2310/344—Position-specific modifications, e.g. on every purine, at the 3'-end
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30—Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/35—Nature of the modification
    • C12N2310/351—Conjugate
    • C12N2310/3515—Lipophilic moiety, e.g. cholesterol
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2320/00—Applications; Uses
    • C12N2320/30—Special therapeutic applications
    • C12N2320/32—Special delivery means, e.g. tissue-specific
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2320/00—Applications; Uses
    • C12N2320/50—Methods for regulating/modulating their activity
    • C12N2320/51—Methods for regulating/modulating their activity modulating the chemical stability, e.g. nuclease-resistance
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2330/00—Production
    • C12N2330/30—Production chemically synthesised

Definitions

  • the invention relates to iRNA agents, which preferably include a monomer in which the ribose moiety has been replaced by a moiety other than ribose.
  • a monomer in which the ribose moiety has been replaced by a moiety other than ribose.
  • the inclusion of such a monomer can allow for modulation of a property of the iRNA agent into which it is incorporated, e.g., by using the non-ribose moiety as a point to which a ligand or other entity, e.g., a carbohydrate; or a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate. is directly, or indirectly, tethered.
  • the invention also relates to methods of making and using such modified iRNA agents.
  • diseases arise from the abnormal expression or activity of a particular gene or group of genes.
  • disease can result through expression of a mutant form of protein, as well as from expression of viral genes that have been integrated into the genome of their host.
  • the therapeutic benefits of being able to selectively silence these abnormal or foreign genes are obvious.
  • Double-stranded RNA molecules can block gene expression by virtue of a highly conserved regulatory mechanism known as RNA interference (RNAi).
  • RNAi RNA interference
  • the RNA III Dicer enzyme processes dsRNA into small interfering RNA (siRNA) of approximately 22 nucleotides.
  • siRNA small interfering RNA
  • One strand of the siRNA serves as a guide sequence to induce cleavage of messenger RNAs (mRNAs) including a nucleotide sequence which is at least partially complementary to the sequence of the antisense strand by an RNA-induced silencing complex RISC (Hammond, S. M., et al., Nature (2000) 404:293-296).
  • RISC RNA-induced silencing complex
  • the inventor has discovered, inter alia, that attachment of a saccharide moiety to an iRNA agent can optimize one or more properties of the iRNA agent.
  • the saccharide will be attached to a modified subunit of the iRNA agent.
  • the ribose sugar of one or more ribonucleotide subunits of an iRNA agent can be replaced with another moiety, e.g., a non-carbohydrate (preferably cyclic) carrier to which is attached a saccharide.
  • a ribonucleotide subunit in which the ribose sugar of the subunit has been so replaced is referred to herein as a ribose replacement modification subunit (RRMS).
  • RRMS ribose replacement modification subunit
  • a cyclic carrier may be a carbocyclic ring system, i.e., all ring atoms are carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic ring system, i.e., one or more ring atoms may be a heteroatom, e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur.
  • the cyclic carrier may be a monocyclic ring system, or may contain two or more rings, e.g. fused rings.
  • the cyclic carrier may be a fully saturated ring system, or it may contain one or more double bonds.
  • the carriers further include (i) at least two “backbone attachment points” and (ii) at least one “tethering attachment point.”
  • a “backbone attachment point” as used herein refers to a functional group, e.g. a hydroxyl group, or generally, a bond available for, and that is suitable for incorporation of the carrier into the backbone, e.g., the phosphate, or modified phosphate, e.g., sulfur containing, backbone, of a ribonucleic acid.
  • a “tethering attachment point” in some embodiments refers to a constituent ring atom of the cyclic carrier, e.g., a carbon atom or a heteroatom (distinct from an atom which provides a backbone attachment point), that connects a selected moiety.
  • the moiety can be, e.g., a ligand, e.g., a targeting or delivery moiety, or a moiety which alters a physical property.
  • One of the most preferred moieties is a moiety which promotes entry into a cell, e.g., a lipophilic moiety, e.g., cholesterol.
  • the attachment of a lipohilic agent increases the lipophilicity of an iRNA agent.
  • the selected moiety is connected by an intervening tether to the cyclic carrier.
  • it will often include a functional group, e.g., an amino group, or generally, provide a bond, that is suitable for incorporation or tethering of another chemical entity, e.g., a ligand to the constituent ring.
  • RNA agent e.g., an iRNA agent
  • incorporation of one or more RRMSs described herein into an RNA agent can confer one or more new properties to the RNA agent and/or alter, enhance or modulate one or more existing properties in the RNA molecule. E.g., it can alter one or more of lipophilicity or nuclease resistance.
  • Incorporation of one or more RRMSs described herein into an iRNA agent can, particularly when the RRMS is tethered to an appropriate entity, modulate, e.g., increase, binding affinity of an iRNA agent to a target mRNA, change the geometry of the duplex form of the iRNA agent, alter distribution or target the iRNA agent to a particular part of the body, or modify the interaction with nucleic acid binding proteins (e.g., during RISC formation and strand separation).
  • the invention features, an iRNA agent preferably comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having a formula (I) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
  • R c is H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first subunit in which R d is a carbohydrate radical, and a second subunit in which R d is a steroid radical, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical.
  • the first and second subunits can be incorporated into the same strand or different ones.
  • Rd in the first subunit can be a galactose radical.
  • R d in the first subunit can be an N-acetylgalactoseamine radical.
  • R d in the first subunit can be mannose radical.
  • R d in the second subunit can be a steroid radical.
  • R d in the second subunit can be a cholesterol radical.
  • Rd in the second subunit is a cholanic acid radical.
  • this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first subunit and a second subunit in which R d is a carbohydrate radical in both the first and second subunits.
  • R d can be the same carbohydrate radical in the first and second subunit.
  • the carbohydrate radical in the first subunit can be different from the carbohydrate radical in the second subunit.
  • the ligands can be distributed as desired, e.g., the ligands can be attached to subunits on the same strand or different ones. Some or all of the ligands can all be the same moiety. Alternatively, all of the ligands can be different moieties.
  • this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit is derivatized with a porphyrin, which preferably enhances entrance into a cell.
  • the porphyrin further can have a carbohydrate radical; or a steroid radical optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate radical.
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the following features.
  • the iRNA agent can be 21 nucleotides in length and there can be a duplex region of about 19 pairs.
  • the iRNA agent can include a duplex region between 17 and 23 pairs in length.
  • R 1 can be CH 2 OR a and R 3 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR a and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR a and R 2 can be OR b .
  • R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 3 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 2 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 3 can be OR a ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 9 can be OR a ; or R 1 can be CH 2 OR b and R 2 can be OR a .
  • R 1 can be OR a and R 3 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 1 can be OR a and R 9 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 1 can be OR a and R 2 can be CH 2 OR b .
  • R 1 can be OR b and R 3 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 9 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 2 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 3 can be CH 2 OR a ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 9 can be CH 2 OR a ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 2 can be CH 2 OR a .
  • R 3 can be CH 2 OR a and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be CH 2 OR a and R 4 can be OR b .
  • R 3 can be CH 2 OR b and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be CH 2 OR b and R 4 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be CH 2 OR b and R 9 can be OR a ; or R 3 can be CH 2 OR b and R 4 can be OR a .
  • R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be CH 2 OR a ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 4 can be CH 2 OR a ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 4 can be CH 2 OR b .
  • R 3 can be OR a and R 9 can be CH 2 OR b ; or R 3 can be OR a and R 4 can be CH 2 OR b .
  • R 9 can be CH 2 OR a and R 10 can be OR b .
  • R 9 can be CH 2 OR b and R 10 can be OR b ; or R 9 can be CH 2 OR b and R 10 can be OR a .
  • the ribose is replaced with a pyrroline scaffold or with a 4-hydroxyproline-derived scaffold, and X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is CR 9 R 10 , and Z is absent.
  • R 1 and R 3 can be cis or R 1 and R 3 can be trans.
  • n 1
  • A can be O or S.
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 3 can be OR b .
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) n NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • R 1 can be OR b and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a ; or R 1 can be OR a and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR a .
  • R 1 and R 9 can be cis or R 1 and R 9 can be trans.
  • R 1 can be OR a and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 1 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a .
  • R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR a ; or R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be OR a and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a .
  • R 3 and R 9 can be cis or R 3 and R 9 can be trans.
  • the ribose is replaced with a piperidine scaffold, and X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is CR 9 R 10 , and Z is CR 11 R 12 .
  • R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 10 can be OR a .
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 10 can be OR b ; or R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 10 can be OR b .
  • A can be O or S.
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 4 can be OR a ; or R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 4 can be OR b ; or
  • R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 4 can be OR b .
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 2 can be OR a ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 2 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 2 can be OR b .
  • R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR a .
  • R 3 and R 9 can be cis, or R 3 and R 9 can be trans.
  • R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 9 can be OR b ; or R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR 1 and R 9 can be OR a ; or R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 9 can be OR b .
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR a .
  • R 1 and R 3 can be cis, or R 1 and R 3 can be trans.
  • R 3 can be OR a and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b .
  • R 1 can be OR a and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a .
  • the ribose is replaced with a piperazine scaffold, and X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is NR 8 , and Z is CR 11 R 12 .
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR a .
  • R 1 and R 3 can be cis or R 1 and R 3 can be trans.
  • n 1
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR b ; or R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 3 can be OR b .
  • A can be O or S, preferably S.
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • R d can be chosen from the group of a folic acid radical; a cholesterol radical; a carbohydrate radical; a vitamin A radical; a vitamin E radical; a vitamin K radical.
  • Rd is a cholesterol radical.
  • R 8 can be CH 3 .
  • R 1 can be OR a and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b .
  • the ribose is replaced with a morpholino scaffold, and X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is O, and Z is CR 11 R 12 .
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR a .
  • R 1 and R 3 can be cis, or R 1 and R 3 can be trans.
  • n 1
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR b ; of R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a and R 3 can be OR b .
  • A can be O or S.
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • R 1 can be OR a and R 3 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b .
  • the ribose is replaced with a decalin scaffold, and X is CH 2 ; Y is CR 9 R 10 ; and Z is CR 11 R 12 ; and R 5 and R 11 together are C 6 cycloalkyl.
  • R 6 can be C(O)NHR 7 .
  • R 12 can be hydrogen.
  • R 6 and R 2 can be trans.
  • R 3 can be OR a and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b .
  • R 3 and R 9 can be cis, or R 3 and R 9 can be trans.
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a .
  • A can be Q or S.
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • the ribose is replaced with a decalin/indane scafold, e.g., X is CH 2 ; Y is CR 9 R 10 ; and Z is CR 11 R 12 ; and R 5 and R 11 together are C 5 cycloalkyl.
  • R 6 can be CH 3 .
  • R 12 can be hydrogen.
  • R 11 and R 12 can be trans.
  • R 3 can be OR a and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b .
  • R 3 and R 9 can be cis, or R 3 and R 9 can be trans.
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a ; or R 3 can be OR b and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR a .
  • A can be O or S.
  • R 14 can be N(CH3)R 7 .
  • R 7 can be (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d or (CH 2 ) 5 NHR d .
  • this invention features an iRNA agent comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one one subunit having a formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the features described above.
  • this invention features an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having a formula (I) or formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of said strands.
  • this invention features an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least two subunits having a formula (I) and/or formula (II) are incorporated into at least one of said strands.
  • this invention provides a method of making an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands.
  • the method includes contacting the first strand with the second strand.
  • this invention provides a method of modulating expression of a target gene, the method includes administering an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands. to a subject.
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition having an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • RRMSs described herein may be incorporated into any double-stranded RNA-like molecule described herein, e.g., an iRNA agent.
  • An iRNA agent may include a duplex comprising a hybridized sense and antisense strand, in which the antisense strand and/or the sense strand may include one or more of the RRMSs described herein.
  • An RRMS can be introduced at one or more points in one or both strands of a double-stranded iRNA agent.
  • An RRMS can be placed at or near (within 1, 2, or 3 positions) of the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand or at near (within 2 or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • an RRMS at or near (within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
  • An RRMS can be internal, and will preferably be positioned in regions not critical for antisense binding to the target.
  • an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the sense strand. In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and an RRMS at the 5′ end of the sense strand, in which both ligands are located at the same end of the iRNA agent.
  • two ligands are tethered, preferably, one on each strand and are hydrophobic moieties. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that pairing of the hydrophobic ligands can stabilize the iRNA agent via intermolecular van der Waals interactions.
  • an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and an RRMS at the 5′ end of the sense strand, in which both RRMSs may share the same ligand (e.g., cholic acid) via connection of their individual tethers to separate positions on the ligand.
  • ligand e.g., cholic acid
  • a ligand shared between two proximal RRMSs is referred to herein as a “hairpin ligand.”
  • an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at the 3′ end of the sense strand and an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand.
  • An iRNA agent may have an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand; or may have an RRMS at an internal position of the antisense strand; or may have an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand and an RRMS at an internal position of the antisense strand.
  • the iRNA agent includes a first and second sequences, which are preferably two separate molecules as opposed to two sequences located on the same strand, have sufficient complementarity to each other to hybridize (and thereby form a duplex region), e.g., under physiological conditions, e.g., under physiological conditions but not in contact with a helicase or other unwinding enzyme.
  • first and second sequences be chosen such that the ds iRNA agent includes a single strand or unpaired region at one or both ends of the molecule.
  • a ds iRNA agent contains first and second sequences, preferable paired to contain an overhang, e.g., one or two 5′ or 3′ overhangs but preferably a 3′ overhang of 2-3 nucleotides. Most embodiments will have a 3′ overhang.
  • Preferred sRNA agents will have single-stranded overhangs, preferably 3′ overhangs, of 1 or preferably 2 or 3 nucleotides in length at each end. The overhangs can be the result of one strand being longer than the other, or the result of two strands of the same length being staggered. 5′ ends are preferably phosphorylated.
  • the iRNA agents can take an architecture or structure described herein.
  • the iRNA agents can be palindromic, or double targeting, as described herein.
  • the iRNA agents can have a sequence such that a non-cannonical or other than cannonical Watson-Crick structure is formed beween two monomers of the iRNA agent or between a strand of the iRNA agent and another sequence, e.g., a target or off-target sequence, as is described herein.
  • the iRNA agent can be selected to target any of a broad spectrum of genes, including any of the genes described herein.
  • the iRNA agent has an architecture (architecture refers to one or more of overall length, length of a duplex region, the presence, number, location, or length of overhangs, single strand versus double strand form) described herein.
  • the iRNA agent can be less than 30 nucleotides in length, e.g., 21-23 nucleotides.
  • the iRNA is 21 nucleotides in length and there is a duplex region of about 19 pairs.
  • the iRNA is 21 nucleotides in length, and the duplex region of the iRNA is 19 nucleotides.
  • the iRNA is greater than 30 nucleotides in length.
  • the duplex region of the iRNA agent will have, mismatches. Preferably it will have no more than 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 bases, which do not form canonical Watson-Crick pairs or which do not hybridize. Overhangs are discussed in detail elsewhere herein but are preferably about 2 nucleotides in length. The overhangs can be complementary to the gene sequences being targeted or can be other sequence. TT is a preferred overhang sequence.
  • the first and second iRNA agent sequences can also be joined, e.g., by additional bases to form a hairpin, or by other non-base linkers.
  • the iRNA agents described herein can include nuclease resistant monomers (NRMs).
  • NRMs nuclease resistant monomers
  • the invention features an iRNA agent to which is conjugated to a carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); or a steroid radical, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); e.g., by conjugation to an RRMS of an iRNA agent.
  • a carbohydrate radical e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose
  • a steroid radical e.g., cholesterol
  • the lipophilic moiety enhances entry of the iRNA agent into a cell.
  • the cell is part of an organism, tissue, or cell line, e.g., a primary cell line, immortalized cell line, or any type of cell line disclosed herein.
  • the conjugated iRNA agent an be used to silence a target gene in an organism, e.g., a mammal, e.g., a human, or to silence a target gene in a cell line or in cells which are outside an organism.
  • the iRNA agent can have a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having formula (I) or formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of the strands.
  • the iRNA agent can have one or more of any of the features described herein.
  • Rd can be a carbohydrate, a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, tethered to a carbohydrate;
  • X can be N(CO)R 7 or NR 7
  • Y can be CR 9 R 10
  • Z can be absent, and R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR a ;
  • X can be N(CO)R 7 or NR 7
  • Y can be CR 9 R 10
  • Z can be CR 11 R 12 , and R 9 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 10 can be OR a ;
  • X can be N(CO)R 7 or NR 7
  • Y can be NR 8
  • Z can be CR 11 R 12
  • R 1 can be (CH 2 ) n OR b and R 3 can be OR a ;
  • X can be CH 2 ;
  • Y can be CR 9 R
  • the ligands described herein can enhance entry of the iRNA agent into a hepatocyte cell.
  • the iRNA agent targets an exogenous gene of a genetically modified cell.
  • An exogenous gene can be, for example, a viral or bacterial gene that derives from an organism that has invaded or infected the cell, or the exogenous gene can be any gene introduced into the cell by natural or artificial means, such as by a genetic recombination event.
  • An iRNA agent can target a viral gene, for example, such as a hepatitis viral gene (e.g., a gene of an HAV, HBV, or HCV).
  • the iRNA agent can silence a reporter gene, such as GFP or beta galatosidase and the like. These iRNA agents can be used to silence exogenous genes in an adherent tumor cell line.
  • the invention provides, methods of silencing a target gene by providing an iRNA agent to which a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated.
  • the conjugated iRNA agent an be used to silence a target gene in an organism, e.g., a mammal, e.g., a human, or to silence a target gene in a cell line or in cells which are outside an organism.
  • the method can be used to silence a gene, e.g., a gene described herein, and treat a condition mediated by the gene.
  • the iRNA agent to which a a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated can be used to silence a gene, e.g., one described herein.
  • Cells which are not part of a whole organism can be used in an initial screen to determine if an iRNA agent is effective in silencing a gene.
  • a test in cells which are not part of a whole organism can be followed by testing the iRNA agent in a whole animal.
  • the iRNA agent which is conjugated to a a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated is administered to an organism, or contacted with a cell which is not part of an organism, in the absence of (or in a reduced amount of) other reagents that facilitate or enhance delivery, e.g., a compound which enhances transit through the cell membrane.
  • a reduced amount can be an amount of such reagent which is reduced in comparison to what would be needed to get an equal amount of nonconjugated iRNA agent into the target cell).
  • the iRNA agent which is conjugated to a lipophilic moiety is administered to an organism, or contacted with a cell which is not part of an organism, in the absence (or reduced amount) of: an additional lipophilic moiety; a transfection agent, e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent; a transfecting agent such as LipofectamineTM (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.), Lipofectamine 2000TM, TransIT-TKOTM (Mirus, Madison, Wis.), FuGENE 6 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), polyethylenimine, X-tremeGENE Q2 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), DOTAP, DOSPER, MetafecteneTM (Biontex, Kunststoff, Germany), and the like.
  • a transfection agent e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent
  • a transfecting agent
  • the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism.
  • the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • An iRNA agent to which a lipophilic moiety is attached can target any gene described herein and can be delivered to any cell type described herein, e.g., a cell type in an organism, tissue, or cell line. Delivery of the iRNA agent can be in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism, or in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • the invention provides compositions of iRNA agents described herein, and in particular compositions of an iRNA agent to which a lipophilic moiety is conjugated, e.g., a lipophilic conjugated iRNA agent described herein.
  • the composition is a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
  • the composition e.g., pharmaceutically acceptable composition
  • a reduced amount can be an amount of such reagent which is reduced in comparison to what would be needed to get an equal amount of nonconjugated iRNA agent into the target cell).
  • the composition is free of, has a reduced amount of, or is essentially free of: an additional lipophilic moiety; a transfection agent, e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent; a transfecting agent such as LipofectamineTM (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.), Lipofectamine 2000TM, TransIT-TKOTM (Mirus, Madison, Wis.), FuGENE 6 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), polyethylenimine, X-tremeGENE Q2 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), DOTAP, DOSPER, MetafecteneTM (Biontex, Kunststoff, Germany), and the like.
  • a transfection agent e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent
  • a transfecting agent such as LipofectamineTM (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.), Lipofectamine 2000TM, Trans
  • composition is suitable for delivery to a cell in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism.
  • the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • the RRMS-containing iRNA agents can be used in any of the methods described herein, e.g., to target any of the genes described herein or to treat any of the disorders described herein. They can be incorporated into any of the formulations, modes of delivery, delivery modalities, kits or preparations, e.g., pharmaceutical preparations, described herein. E.g, a kit which inlcudes one or more of the iRNA aents described herein, a sterile container in which the iRNA agent is discolsed, and instructions for use.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention can be used with any of the iRNA agents described herein.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention can be used for the treatment of any disease or disorder described herein, and for the treatment of any subject, e.g., any animal, any mammal, such as any human.
  • compositions of the invention e.g., the the RRMS-containing iRNA agents described herein, can be used with any dosage and/or formulation described herein, as well as with any route of administration described herein.
  • an iRNA agent includes a carbohydrate modification, e.g., galactose and/or analogues thereof. These agents target, in particular, the parenchymal cells of the liver (see Table 1).
  • the iRNA agent includes more than one galactose moiety, preferably two or three.
  • the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) lactose molecules (lactose is a glucose coupled to a galactose).
  • the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) N-Acetyl-Galactosamine, N-Ac-Glucosamine, or mannose (e.g., mannose-6-phosphate).
  • iRNA agents include mannose conjugates, and the iRNA agents target macrophages.
  • an iRNA agent includes a carbohydrate modification, e.g., galactose and/or analogues thereof. These carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agents target, in particular, the parenchymal cells of the liver (see Table 1).
  • the iRNA agent includes more than one galactose moiety, preferably two or three.
  • the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) lactose molecules (lactose is a glucose coupled to a galactose).
  • the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) N-Acetyl-Galactosamine, N-Ac-Glucosamine, or mannose (e.g., mannose-6-phosphate).
  • iRNA agents include mannose conjugates, and the iRNA agents target macrophages, e.g., macrophages in the liver.
  • the invention features an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification, and the presence of the carbohydrate modification can increase delivery of the iRNA agent to the liver.
  • an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification can be useful for targeting a gene for which expression is undesired in the liver.
  • an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification can target a nucleic acid expresses by a hepatitis virus (e.g., hepatitis C, hepatitis B, hepatitis A, hepatitis D, hepatitis E, hepatitis F, hepatitis G, or hepatitis H).
  • a hepatitis virus e.g., hepatitis C, hepatitis B, hepatitis A, hepatitis D, hepatitis E, hepatitis F, hepatitis G, or hepatitis H.
  • the carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a gene of the hepatitis C virus.
  • the iRNA agent that targets a gene of the hepatitis C virus can be administered to a human having or at risk for developing hepatitis, e.g., acute or chronic hepatitis, or inflammation of the liver.
  • a human who is a candidate for treatment with a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent, e.g., an iRNA agent that targets a gene of HCV can present symptoms indicative of HCV infection, such as jaundice, abdominal pain, liver enlargement and fatigue.
  • a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets the 5′ core region of HCV. This region lies just downstream of the ribosomal toe-print straddling the initiator methionine.
  • an iRNA agent targets any one of the nonstructural proteins of HCV, such as NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, or NS5B.
  • an iRNA agent targets the E1, E2, or C gene of HCV.
  • the carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a hepatitis B virus (HBV), and the iRNA agent has a sequence that is substantially similar to a sequence of a gene of HBV, e.g., the protein X (HBx) gene of HBV.
  • HBV hepatitis B virus
  • Carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agents can also be used to treat other liver disorders, including disorders characterized by unwanted cell proliferation, hematological disorders, metabolic disorders, and disorders characterized by inflammation.
  • a proliferation disorder of the liver can be, for example, a benign or malignant disorder, e.g., a cancer, e.g, a hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC), hepatic metastasis, or hepatoblastoma.
  • a hepatic hematology or inflammation disorder can be a disorder involving clotting factors, a complement-mediated inflammation or a fibrosis, for example.
  • Metabolic diseases of the liver include dyslipidemias and irregularities in glucose regulation.
  • a liver disorder is treated by administering one or more iRNA agents that have a sequence that is substantially identical to a sequence in a gene involved in the liver disorder.
  • a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a nucleic acid expressed in the liver, such as an ApoB RNA, c-jun RNA, beta-catenin RNA, or glucose-6-phosphatase mRNA.
  • An iRNA that targets glucose-6-phosphatase can be administered to a subject to inhibit hepatic glucose production, e.g., for the treatment of glucose-metabolism-related disorders, such as diabetes, e.g., type-2-diabetes mellitus.
  • the iRNA agent can be administered to an individual at risk for the disorder to delay onset of the disorder or a symptom of the disorder.
  • a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent has sequence-similarity to the following genes, and the iRNA agent is useful for inhibiting hepatic glucose production.
  • these other genes include “forkhead homologue in rhabdomyosarcoma” (FKHR); glucagon; glucagon receptor; glycogen phosphorylase; PPAR-Gamma Coactivator (PGC-1); Fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase; glucose-6-phosphate locator; glucokinase inhibitory regulatory protein; and phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK).
  • FKHR forkhead homologue in rhabdomyosarcoma
  • PLC-1 PPAR-Gamma Coactivator
  • Fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase glucose-6-phosphate locator
  • glucokinase inhibitory regulatory protein phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase
  • FIG. 1 a general synthetic scheme for incorporation of RRMS monomers into an oligonucleotide.
  • FIG. 2A is a list of substituents that may be present on silicon in OFG 1 .
  • FIG. 2B is a list of substituents that may be present on the C2′-orthoester group.
  • FIG. 3 is list of representative RRMS cyclic carriers.
  • Panel 1 shows pyrroline-based RRMSs;
  • panel 2 shows 3-hydroxyproline-based RRMSs;
  • panel 3 shows piperidine-based RRMSs;
  • panel 4 shows morpholine and piperazine-based RRMSs;
  • panel 5 shows decalin-based RRMSs.
  • R 1 is succinate or phosphoramidate and
  • R 2 is H or a conjugate ligand.
  • FIG. 4 is a general reaction scheme for 3′ conjugation of peptide into iRNA.
  • FIG. 5 is a general reaction scheme for 5′ conjugation of peptide into iRNA.
  • FIG. 6 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of aza-peptides.
  • FIG. 7 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of N-methyl amino acids and peptides.
  • FIG. 8 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of ⁇ -methyl amino acids and Ant and Tat peptides.
  • FIG. 9 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of Ant and Tat oligocarbamates.
  • FIG. 10 is a a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of Ant and Tat oligoureas.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic representation of peptide carriers.
  • Double-stranded directs the sequence-specific silencing of mRNA through a process known as RNA interference (RNAi).
  • RNAi RNA interference
  • the process occurs in a wide variety of organisms, including mammals and other vertebrates.
  • 21-23 nt fragments of dsRNA are sequence-specific mediators of RNA silencing, e.g., by causing RNA degradation. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it may be that a molecular signal, which may be merely the specific length of the fragments, present in these 21-23 nt fragments recruits cellular factors that mediate RNAi. Described herein are methods for preparing and administering these 21-23 nt fragments, and other iRNAs agents, and their use for specifically inactivating gene function.
  • iRNAs agents or recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized oligonucleotides of the same or similar nature
  • oligonucleotides of the same or similar nature
  • longer dsRNA agent fragments can also be used, e.g., as described below.
  • the length of the iRNA agent strands in an sRNA agent can be less than 31, 30, 28, 25, or 23 nt, e.g., sufficiently short to avoid inducing a deleterious interferon response.
  • a composition of sRNA agent e.g., formulated as described herein
  • use of a discrete species of iRNA agent can be used to selectively target one allele of a target gene, e.g., in a subject heterozygous for the allele.
  • the subject is a mammal such as a cow, horse, mouse, rat, dog, pig, goat, or a primate.
  • the subject can be a dairy mammal (e.g., a cow, or goat) or other farmed animal (e.g., a chicken, turkey, sheep, pig, fish, shrimp).
  • the subject is a human, e.g., a normal individual or an individual that has, is diagnosed with, or is predicted to have a disease or disorder.
  • iRNA agent containing a carbohydrate modification can be targeted to a particular cell type in the liver.
  • Exemplary carbohydrate moieties and their associated receptors are presented in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1 Targeting agents (Ligands) and their associated receptors Liver Cells Ligand Receptor 1) Parenchymal Galactose ASGP-R Cell (PC) (Asiologlycoprotein (Hepatocytes) receptor) Gal NAc ASPG-R (n-acetyl- Gal NAc Receptor galactosamine) Lactose Asialofetuin ASPG-r 2) Sinusoidal Hyaluronan Hyaluronan receptor Endothelial Procollagen Procollagen receptor Cell (SEC) Negatively Scavenger receptors charged molecules Mannose Mannose receptors N-acetyl Scavenger receptors Glucosamine Immunoglobulins Fc Receptor LPS CD14 Receptor Insulin Receptor mediated transcytosis Transferrin Receptor mediated transcyto
  • disorders involving the liver include, but are not limited to, hepatic injury; jaundice and cholestasis, such as bilirubin and bile formation; hepatic failure and cirrhosis, such as cirrhosis, portal hypertension, including ascites, portosystemic shunts, and splenomegaly; infectious disorders, such as viral hepatitis, including hepatitis A-E infection and infection by other hepatitis viruses, clinicopathologic syndromes, such as the carrier state, asymptomatic infection, acute viral hepatitis, chronic viral hepatitis, and fulminant hepatitis; autoimmune hepatitis; drug- and toxin-induced liver disease, such as alcoholic liver disease; inborn errors of metabolism and pediatric liver disease, such as hemochromatosis, Wilson disease, a1-antitrypsin deficiency, and neonatal hepatitis; intrahepatic biliary tract disease, such as secondary
  • An iRNA agent can also be administered to inhibit Factor V expression in the liver. Two to five percent of the United States population is heterozygous for an allele of the Factor V gene that encodes a single amino acid change at position 1961. These heterozygous individuals have a 3-8 fold increased risk of venous thrombosis, a risk that is associated with increased factor V activity. The increased activity leads to increased thrombin generation from the prothrombinase complex.
  • An iRNA agent directed against Factor V can treat or prevent venous thrombosis or treat a human who has Factor V Leiden.
  • the iRNA agent that targets Factor V can be also be used as a prophylaxis in patients with Factor V Leiden who undergo high-risk surgical procedures, and this prophylaxis can be an adjunct to the therapeutic use of low molecular weight (LMW) heparin prophylaxis.
  • LMW low molecular weight
  • An iRNA agent that targets Factor V can also be administered to patients with Factor V Leiden to treat deep vein thrombosis (DVT) or pulmonary embolism (PE), and this treatment can be an adjunct to therapeutic uses of heparin or coumadin. Any other disorder caused by elevated or otherwise unwanted levels of Factor V protein can be treated by administering an iRNA agent against Factor V.
  • iRNA agents of the invention can be targeted to any gene whose overexpression is associated with the liver diseases.
  • halo refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • alkyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain that may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C 1 -C 12 alkyl indicates that the group may have from 1 to 12 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by halo, and includes alkyl moieties in which all hydrogens have been replaced by halo (e.g., perfluoroalkyl). Alkyl and haloalkyl groups may be optionally inserted with O, N, or S.
  • aralkyl refers to an alkyl moiety in which an alkyl hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl group.
  • Aralkyl includes groups in which more than one hydrogen atom has been replaced by an aryl group. Examples of “aralkyl” include benzyl, 9-fluorenyl, benzhydryl, and trityl groups.
  • alkenyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-8 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more double bonds. Examples of a 15 typical alkenyl include, but not limited to, allyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-hexenyl and 3-octenyl groups.
  • alkynyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-8 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more triple bonds. Some examples of a typical alkynyl are ethynyl, 2-propynyl, and 3-methylbutynyl, and propargyl.
  • the sp 2 and sp 3 carbons may optionally serve as the point of attachment of the alkenyl and alkynyl groups, respectively.
  • alkylamino and dialkylamino refer to —NH(alkyl) and —N(alkyl) 2 radicals respectively.
  • aralkylamino refers to a —NH(aralkyl) radical.
  • alkoxy refers to an —O-alkyl radical
  • cycloalkoxy and “aralkoxy” refer to an —O-cycloalkyl and O-aralkyl radicals respectively.
  • sioxy refers to a R 3 SiO— radical.
  • mercapto refers to an SH radical.
  • thioalkoxy refers to an —S-alkyl radical.
  • alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—), e.g., —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, and —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —.
  • alkylenedioxo refers to a divalent species of the structure —O—R—O—, in which R represents an alkylene.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system, wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • aryl moieties include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, and pyrenyl.
  • cycloalkyl as employed herein includes saturated cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the cycloalkyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings). Examples of cycloalkyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclohexyl, adamantyl, and norbornyl.
  • heterocyclyl refers to a nonaromatic 3-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the heterocyclyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings.
  • Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings).
  • heterocyclyl include, but are not limited to tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholino, pyrrolinyl and pyrrolidinyl.
  • cycloalkenyl as employed herein includes partially unsaturated, nonaromatic, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 5 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 8 carbons, wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the cycloalkenyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings).
  • Examples of cycloalkenyl moieties include, but are not limited to cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, or norbornenyl.
  • heterocycloalkenyl refers to a partially saturated, nonaromatic 5-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the heterocycloalkenyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings.
  • Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings).
  • heterocycloalkenyl include but are not limited to tetrahydropyridyl and dihydropyran.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the heteroaryl groups herein described may also contain fused rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond.
  • oxo refers to an oxygen atom, which forms a carbonyl when attached to carbon, an N-oxide when attached to nitrogen, and a sulfoxide or sulfone when attached to sulfur.
  • acyl refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
  • substituted refers to a group “substituted” on an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group at any atom of that group.
  • Suitable substituents include, without limitation, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, SO 3 H, sulfate, phosphate, perfluoroalkyl, perfluoroalkoxy, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, carboxyl, oxo, thioxo, imino (alkyl, aryl, aralkyl), S(O) n alkyl (where n is 0-2), S(O) n aryl (where n is 0-2), S(O) n heteroaryl (where n is 0-2), S(O) n heterocyclyl (where n is 0-2), amine (mono-, di-, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, and combinations thereof), ester (alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl), amide (mono
  • adeninyl, cytosinyl, guaninyl, thyminyl, and uracilyl refer to radicals of adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and uracil.
  • a “protected” moiety refers to a reactive functional group, e.g., a hydroxyl group or an amino group, or a class of molecules, e.g., sugars, having one or more functional groups, in which the reactivity of the functional group is temporarily blocked by the presence of an attached protecting group.
  • Protecting groups useful for the monomers and methods described herein can be found, e.g., in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (John Wiley and Sons: New York), 1981, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • RNA agent e.g., an iRNA agent, containing a preferred, but nonlimiting ligand-conjugated monomer subunit is presented as formula (II) below and in the scheme in FIG. 1 .
  • the carrier also referred to in some embodiments as a “linker” can be a cyclic or acyclic moiety and includes two “backbone attachment points” (e.g., hydroxyl groups) and a ligand.
  • the ligand can be directly attached (e.g., conjugated) to the carrier or indirectly attached (e.g., conjugated) to the carrier by an intervening tether (e.g., an acyclic chain of one or more atoms; or a nucleobase, e.g., a naturally occurring nucleobase optionally having one or more chemical modifications, e.g., an unusual base; or a universal base).
  • the carrier therefore also includes a “ligand or tethering attachment point” for the ligand and tether/tethered ligand, respectively.
  • the ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may be the 5′ or 3′ terminal subunit of the RNA molecule, i.e., one of the two “W” groups may be a hydroxyl group, and the other “W” group may be a chain of two or more unmodified or modified ribonucleotides.
  • the ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may occupy an internal position, and both “W” groups may be one or more unmodified or modified ribonucleotides.
  • More than one ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may be present in a RNA molecule, e.g., an iRNA agent.
  • Preferred positions for inclusion of a tethered ligand-conjugated monomer subunits e.g., one in which a lipophilic moiety, e.g., cholesterol, is tethered to the carrier are at the 3′ terminus, the 5′ terminus, or an internal position of the sense strand.
  • the modified RNA molecule of formula (II) can be obtained using oligonucleotide synthetic methods known in the art.
  • the modified RNA molecule of formula (II) can be prepared by incorporating one or more of the corresponding monomer compounds (see, e.g., A, B, and C below and in the scheme in FIG. 1 ) into a growing sense or antisense strand, utilizing, e.g., phosphoramidite or H-phosphonate coupling strategies.
  • the monomers e.g., a ligand-conjugated monomer, generally include two differently functionalized hydroxyl groups (OFG 1 and OFG 2 ), which are linked to the carrier molecule (see A below and in FIG. 1 ), and a ligand/tethering attachment point.
  • the term “functionalized hydroxyl group” means that the hydroxyl proton has been replaced by another substituent.
  • one hydroxyl group (OFG 1 ) on the carrier is functionalized with a protecting group (PG).
  • the other hydroxyl group (OFG 2 ) can be functionalized with either (1) a liquid or solid phase synthesis support reagent (solid circle) directly or indirectly through a linker, L, as in B, or (2) a phosphorus-containing moiety, e.g., a phosphoramidite as in C.
  • the tethering attachment point may be connected to a hydrogen atom, a suitable protecting group, a tether, or a tethered ligand at the time that the monomer is incorporated into the growing sense or antisense strand (see variable “R” in A below).
  • the tethered ligand can be, but need not be attached to the monomer at the time that the monomer is incorporated into the growing strand.
  • the tether, the ligand or the tethered ligand may be linked to a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit after a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit has been incorporated into the strand.
  • the wavy line used below refers to a connection, and can represent a direct bond between the moiety and the attachment point or a tethering molecule which is interposed between the moiety and the attachment point.
  • Directly tethered means the moiety is bound directly to the attachment point. Indirectly tethered means that there is a tether molecule interposed between the attachment point and the moiety.
  • the (OFG 1 ) protecting group may be selected as desired, e.g., from T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991).
  • the protecting group is preferably stable under amidite synthesis conditions, storage conditions, and oligonucleotide synthesis conditions.
  • Hydroxyl groups, —OH are nucleophilic groups (i.e., Lewis bases), which react through the oxygen with electrophiles (i.e., Lewis acids).
  • Hydroxyl groups in which the hydrogen has been replaced with a protecting group are essentially unreactive as nucleophiles in displacement reactions.
  • a protecting group e.g., a triarylmethyl group or a trialkylsilyl group
  • the protected hydroxyl group is useful in preventing e.g., homocoupling of compounds exemplified by structure C during oligonucleotide synthesis.
  • a preferred protecting group is the dimethoxytrityl group.
  • a preferred protecting group is a silicon-based protecting group having the formula below:
  • X5′, X5′′, and X5′′′ can be selected from substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, araklyl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aralkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, or siloxy (i.e., R 3 SiO—, the three “R” groups can be any combination of the above listed groups).
  • X 5′ , X 5′′ , and X 5′′′ may all be the same or different; also contemplated is a combination in which two of X 5′ , X 5′′ , and X 5′′′ are identical and the third is different.
  • X 5′ , X 5′′ , and X 5′′′ include those that result in OFG 1 groups that meet the deprotection and stability criteria delineated below.
  • the group is preferably stable under amidite synthesis conditions, storage conditions, and oligonucleotide synthesis conditions. Rapid removal, i.e., less than one minute, of the silyl group from e.g., a support-bound oligonucleotide is desirable because it can reduce synthesis times and thereby reduce exposure time of the growing oligonucleotide chain to the reagents. Oligonucleotide synthesis can be improved if the silyl protecting group is visible during deprotection, e.g., from the addition of a chromophore silyl substituent.
  • silyl protecting groups can be complicated by the competing demands of the essential characteristics of stability and facile removal, and the need to balance these competitive goals. Most substituents that increase stability can also increase the reaction time required for removal of the silyl group, potentially increasing the level of difficulty in removal of the group.
  • alkoxy and siloxy substituents to OFG 1 silicon-containing protecting groups increases the susceptibility of the protecting groups to fluoride cleavage of the silylether bonds. Increasing the steric bulk of the substituents preserves stability while not decreasing fluoride lability to an equal extent. An appropriate balance of substituents on the silyl group makes a silyl ether a viable nucleoside protecting group.
  • Candidate OFG 1 silicon-containing protecting groups may be tested by exposing a tetrahydrofuran solution of a preferred carrier bearing the candidate OFG 1 group to five molar equivalents of tetrahydrofuran at room temperature. The reaction time may be determined by monitoring the disappearance of the starting material by thin layer chromatography.
  • the OFG 2 in B includes a linker, e.g., a relatively long organic linker, connected to a soluble or insoluble support reagent
  • a linker e.g., a relatively long organic linker
  • solution or solid phase synthesis techniques can be employed to build up a chain of natural and/or modified ribonucleotides once OFG 1 is deprotected and free to react as a nucleophile with another nucleoside or monomer containing an electrophilic group (e.g., an amidite group).
  • a natural or modified ribonucleotide or oligoribonucleotide chain can be coupled to monomer C via an amidite group or H-phosphonate group at OFG 2 .
  • OFG 1 can be deblocked, and the restored nucleophilic hydroxyl group can react with another nucleoside or monomer containing an electrophilic group.
  • R′ can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or alkenyl. In preferred embodiments, R′ is methyl, allyl or 2-cyanoethyl.
  • R′′ may a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group, preferably it is a branched group containing three or more carbons, e.g., isopropyl.
  • OFG 2 in B can be hydroxyl functionalized with a linker, which in turn contains a liquid or solid phase synthesis support reagent at the other linker terminus.
  • the support reagent can be any support medium that can support the monomers described herein.
  • the monomer can be attached to an insoluble support via a linker, L, which allows the monomer (and the growing chain) to be solubilized in the solvent in which the support is placed.
  • the solubilized, yet immobilized, monomer can react with reagents in the surrounding solvent; unreacted reagents and soluble by-products can be readily washed away from the solid support to which the monomer or monomer-derived products is attached.
  • the monomer can be attached to a soluble support moiety, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) and liquid phase synthesis techniques can be used to build up the chain.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Linker and support medium selection is within skill of the art.
  • the linker may be —C(O)(CH 2 ) q C(O)—, or —C(O)(CH 2 ) q S—, in which q can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; preferably, it is oxalyl, succinyl or thioglycolyl.
  • Standard control pore glass solid phase synthesis supports can not be used in conjunction with fluoride labile 5′ silyl protecting groups because the glass is degraded by fluoride with a significant reduction in the amount of full-length product.
  • Fluoride-stable polystyrene based supports or PEG are preferred.
  • the ligand/tethering attachment point can be any divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent atom.
  • ligand/tethering attachment point can be a carbon, oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atom.
  • a ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can have a nucleophilic heteroatom, e.g., —SH, —NH 2 , secondary amino, ONH 2 , or NH 2 NH 2 .
  • the ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can be an olefin, e.g., —CH ⁇ CH 2 , and the precursor functional group can be attached to a ligand, a tether, or tethered ligand using, e.g., transition metal catalyzed carbon-carbon (for example olefin metathesis) processes or cycloadditions (e.g., Diels-Alder).
  • the ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can be an electrophilic moiety, e.g., an aldehyde.
  • the ligand/tethering attachment point can be an endocyclic atom (i.e., a constituent atom in the cyclic moiety, e.g., a nitrogen atom) or an exocyclic atom (i.e., an atom or group of atoms attached to a constituent atom in the cyclic moiety).
  • the carrier can be any organic molecule containing attachment points for OFG 1 , OFG 2 , and the ligand.
  • carrier is a cyclic molecule and may contain heteroatoms (e.g., O, N or S).
  • carrier molecules may include aryl (e.g., benzene, biphenyl, etc.), cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexane, cis or trans decalin, etc.), cycloalkenyl (e.g., cyclohexenyl), or heterocyclyl (tetrahydropyran, piperazine, pyrrolidine, etc.).
  • the carrier can be an acyclic moiety, e.g., based on serinol. Any of the above cyclic systems may include substituents in addition to OFG 1 , OFG 2 , and the ligand.
  • the carrier molecule is an oxygen containing heterocycle.
  • the carrier is a ribose sugar as shown in structure LCM-I.
  • the monomer e.g., a ligand-conjugated monomer is a nucleoside.
  • B represents a nucleobase, e.g., a naturally occurring nucleobase optionally having one or more chemical modifications, e.g., and unusual base; or a universal base.
  • nucleobase can include any one of the following:
  • a universal base can form base pairs with each of the natural DNA/RNA bases, exhibiting relatively little discrimination between them.
  • the universal bases are non-hydrogen bonding, hydrophobic, aromatic moieties which can stabilize e.g., duplex RNA or RNA-like molecules, via stacking interactions.
  • a universal base can also include hydrogen bonding substituents.
  • a “universal base” can include anthracenes, pyrenes or any one of the following:
  • B can form part of a tether that connects a ligand to the carrier.
  • the tether can be B—CH ⁇ CH—C(O)NH—(CH 2 ) 5 —NHC(O)-LIGAND.
  • the double bond is trans
  • the ligand is a substituted or unsubstituted cholesterolyl radical (e.g., attached through the D-ring side chain or the C-3 hydroxyl); an aralkyl moiety having at least one sterogenic center and at least one substituent on the aryl portion of the aralkyl group; or a nucleobase.
  • B in the tether described above, is uracilyl or a universal base, e.g., an aryl moiety, e.g., phenyl, optionally having additional substituents, e.g., one or more fluoro groups. B can be substituted at any atom with the remainder of the tether.
  • X 2 can include “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents in place of the 2′-OH; or be a ligand or a tethered ligand.
  • Preferred orthoesters have the general formula J.
  • the groups R 31 and R 32 may be the same or different and can be any combination of the groups listed in FIG. 2B .
  • a preferred orthoester is the “ACE” group, shown below as structure K.
  • X 3 is as described for OFG 2 above.
  • PG can be a triarylmethyl group (e.g., a dimethoxytrityl group) or Si(X 5′ )(X 5′′ )(X 5′′′ ) in which (X 5′ ), (X 5′′ ), and (X 5′′′ ) are as described elsewhere.
  • a triarylmethyl group e.g., a dimethoxytrityl group
  • Si(X 5′ )(X 5′′ )(X 5′′′ ) in which (X 5′ ), (X 5′′ ), and (X 5′′′ ) are as described elsewhere.
  • Cyclic sugar replacement-based monomers e.g., sugar replacement-based ligand-conjugated monomers, are also referred to herein as ribose replacement monomer subunit (RRMS) monomer compounds.
  • Preferred carriers have the general formula (LCM-2) provided below (In that structure preferred backbone attachment points can be chosen from R 1 or R 2 ; R 3 or R 1 ; or R 9 and R 10 if Y is CR 9 R 10 (two positions are chosen to give two backbone attachment points, e.g., R 1 and R 4 , or R 4 and R 9 )).
  • Preferred tethering attachment points include R 7 ; R 5 or R 6 when X is CH 2 .
  • the carriers are described below as an entity, which can be incorporated into a strand.
  • the structures also encompass the situations wherein one (in the case of a terminal position) or two (in the case of an internal position) of the attachment points, e.g., R 1 or R 2 ; R 3 or R 4 ; or R 9 or R 10 (when Y is CR 9 R 10 ), is connected to the phosphate, or modified phosphate, e.g., sulfur containing, backbone.
  • one of the above-named R groups can be —CH 2 —, wherein one bond is connected to the carrier and one to a backbone atom, e.g., a linking oxygen or a central phosphorus atom.
  • the carrier may be based on the pyrroline ring system or the 4-hydroxyproline ring system, e.g., X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is CR 9 R 10 , and Z is absent (D).
  • OFG 1 is preferably attached to a primary carbon, e.g., an exocyclic alkylene group, e.g., a methylene group, connected to one of the carbons in the five-membered ring (—CH 2 OFG 1 in D).
  • OFG 2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the five-membered ring (—OFG 2 in D).
  • —CH 2 OFG 1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-3; or —CH 2 OFG 1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-4.
  • CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be geminally substituted to one of the above-referenced carbons.
  • —CH 2 OFG 1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-4.
  • the pyrroline- and 4-hydroxyproline-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring.
  • CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included.
  • the monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa).
  • the tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen.
  • Preferred examples of carrier D include the following:
  • the carrier may be based on the piperidine ring system (E), e.g., X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is CR 9 R 10 , and Z is CR 11 R 12 .
  • OFG 2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the six-membered ring (—OFG 2 in E).
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be disposed in a geminal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to the same carbon, e.g., at C-2, C-3, or C-4.
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be disposed in a vicinal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms, e.g.,
  • the carrier may be based on the piperazine ring system (F), e.g., X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is NR 8 , and Z is CR 11 R 12 , or the morpholine ring system (G), e.g., X is N(CO)R 7 or NR 7 , Y is O, and Z is CR 11 R 12 .
  • OFG 1 is preferably attached to a primary carbon, e.g., an exocyclic alkylene group, e.g., a methylene group, connected to one of the carbons in the six-membered ring (—CH 2 OFG 1 in F or G).
  • OFG 2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the six-membered rings (—OFG 2 in F or G).
  • —CH 2 OFG 1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-3; or vice versa.
  • CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be geminally substituted to one of the above-referenced carbons.
  • the piperazine- and morpholine-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring.
  • CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included.
  • the monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa).
  • R′′′ can be, e.g., C 1 -C 6 alkyl, preferably CH 3 .
  • the tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen in both F and G.
  • OFG 2 is preferably attached directly to one of C-2, C-3, C-4, or C-5 (—OFG 2 in H).
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be disposed in a geminal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to the same carbon, e.g., at C-2, C-3, C-4, or C-5.
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be disposed in a vicinal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms, e.g., —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-3; —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-2; —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-4; or —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-4 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-3; —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-4 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-5; or —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 may be attached to C-5 and OFG 2 may be attached to C-4.
  • the decalin or indane-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring.
  • linkages e.g., carbon-carbon bonds
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included.
  • the monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures.
  • the centers bearing CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa).
  • the substituents at C-1 and C-6 are trans with respect to one another.
  • the tethering attachment point is preferably C-6 or C-7.
  • —(CH 2 ) n OFG 1 and OFG 2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included.
  • the monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH 2 OFG 1 and OFG 2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa).
  • the tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen.
  • FIG. 3 Representative cyclic, sugar replacement-based carriers are shown in FIG. 3 .
  • Acyclic sugar replacement-based monomers e.g., sugar replacement-based ligand-conjugated monomers
  • RRMS ribose replacement monomer subunit
  • Preferred acyclic carriers can have formula LCM-3 or LCM-4 below.
  • each of x, y, and z can be, independently of one another, 0, 1, 2, or 3.
  • the tertiary carbon can have either the R or S configuration.
  • x is zero and y and z are each 1 in formula LCM-3 (e.g., based on serinol), and y and z are each 1 in formula LCM-3.
  • Each of formula LCM-3 or LCM-4 below can optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl.
  • a moiety e.g., a ligand may be connected indirectly to the carrier via the intermediacy of an intervening tether.
  • Tethers are connected to the carrier at a tethering attachment point (TAP) and may include any C 1 -C 100 carbon-containing moiety, (e.g. C 1 -C 75 , C 1 -C 50 , C 1 -C 20 , C 1 -C 10 ; C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , C 4 , C 5 , C 6 , C 7 , C 8 , C 9 , or C 10 ), preferably having at least one nitrogen atom.
  • TAP tethering attachment point
  • the nitrogen atom forms part of a terminal amino or amido (NHC(O)—) group on the tether, which may serve as a connection point for the ligand.
  • Preferred tethers include TAP-(CH 2 ) n NH—; TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n NH—; TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n NH—, TAP-C(O)—(CH 2 ) 2 —C(O)—; TAP-C(O)—O—(CH 2 ) n —C(O)O—; TAP-C(O)—O—; TAP-C(O)—(CH 2 ) n —NH—C(O)—; TAP-C(O)—(CH 2 ) n —; TAP-C(O)—NH—; TAP-C(O)—; TAP-(CH 2 ) n —C(O)—; TAP-(CH 2 )—NH—; T
  • n is 5, 6, or 11.
  • the nitrogen may form part of a terminal oxyamino group, e.g., —ONH 2 , or hydrazino group, —NHNH 2 .
  • the tether may optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl, and/or optionally inserted with one or more additional heteroatoms, e.g., N, O, or S.
  • Preferred tethered ligands may include, e.g., TAP-(CH 2 ) n NH(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n NH(LIGAND); TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n NH(LIGAND); TAP-(CH 2 ) n ONH(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH 2 ) n ONH(LIGAND); TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n ONH(LIGAND); TAP-(CH 2 ) n NHNH 2 (LIGAND), TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n NHNH 2 (LIGAND); TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n NHNH 2 (LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH 2 —C(O)O(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH) n —C(O)O(LIGAND); TAP-C(
  • amino terminated tethers e.g., NH 2 , ONH 2 , NH 2 NH 2
  • amino terminated tethers can form an imino bond (i.e., C ⁇ N) with the ligand.
  • amino terminated tethers e.g., NH 2 , ONH 2 , NH 2 NH 2
  • the tether can terminate with a mercapto group (i.e., SH) or an olefin (e.g., CH ⁇ CH 2 ).
  • the tether can be TAP-(CH 2 ) 2 —SH, TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n SH, TAP-(CH 2 ) n —(CH ⁇ CH 2 ), or TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n (CH ⁇ CH 2 ), in which n can be as described elsewhere.
  • the tether may optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl, and/or optionally inserted with one or more additional heteroatoms, e.g., N, O, or S.
  • the double bond can be cis or trans or E or Z.
  • the tether may include an electrophilic moiety, preferably at the terminal position of the tether.
  • electrophilic moieties include, e.g., an aldehyde, alkyl halide, mesylate, tosylate, nosylate, or brosylate, or an activated carboxylic acid ester, e.g. an NHS ester, or a pentafluorophenyl ester.
  • Preferred tethers include TAP-(CH 2 ) n CHO; TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n CHO; or TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n CHO, in which n is 1-6 and R′′′′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl; or TAP-(CH 2 ) n C(O)ONHS; TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) n C(O)ONHS; or TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n C(O)ONHS, in which n is 1-6 and R′′′′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl; TAP-(CH 2 ) n C(O)OC 6 F 5 ; TAP-C(O)(CH 2 ) 2 C(O)OC 6 F 5 ; or TAP-NR′′′′(CH 2 ) n C(O)OC 6 F 5 , in which n is 1-11 and R′′′′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl; or —
  • the monomer can include a phthalimido group (K) at the terminal position of the tether.
  • other protected amino groups can be at the terminal position of the tether, e.g., alloc, monomethoxy trityl (MMT), trifluoroacetyl, Fmoc, or aryl sulfonyl (e.g., the aryl portion can be ortho-nitrophenyl or ortho, para-dinitrophenyl).
  • MMT monomethoxy trityl
  • Fmoc Fmoc
  • aryl sulfonyl e.g., the aryl portion can be ortho-nitrophenyl or ortho, para-dinitrophenyl.
  • any of the tethers described herein may further include one or more additional linking groups, e.g., —O—(CH 2 ) n —, —(CH 2 ) n —SS—, —(CH 2 ) n —, or —(CH ⁇ CH)—.
  • additional linking groups e.g., —O—(CH 2 ) n —, —(CH 2 ) n —SS—, —(CH 2 ) n —, or —(CH ⁇ CH)—.
  • a wide variety of entities can be tethered to an iRNA agent, e.g., to the carrier of a ligand-conjugated monomer subunit. Examples are described below in the context of a ligand-conjugated monomer subunit but that is only preferred, entities can be coupled at other points to an iRNA agent.
  • Preferred moieties are ligands, which are coupled, preferably covalently, either directly or indirectly via an intervening tether, to the carrier.
  • the ligand is attached to the carrier via an intervening tether.
  • the ligand or tethered ligand may be present on the ligand-conjugated monomer ⁇ when the ligand-conjugated monomer is incorporated into the growing strand.
  • the ligand may be incorporated into a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit after a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit has been incorporated into the growing strand.
  • a monomer having, e.g., an amino-terminated tether, e.g., TAP-(CH 2 ) n NH 2 may be incorporated into a growing sense or antisense strand.
  • a ligand having an electrophilic group e.g., a pentafluorophenyl ester or aldehyde group, can subsequently be attached to the precursor ligand-conjugated monomer by coupling the electrophilic group of the ligand with the terminal nucleophilic group of the precursor ligand-conjugated monomer subunit tether.
  • a ligand alters the distribution, targeting or lifetime of an iRNA agent into which it is incorporated.
  • a ligand provides an enhanced affinity for a selected target, e.g, molecule, cell or cell type, compartment, e.g., a cellular or organ compartment, tissue, organ or region of the body, as, e.g., compared to a species absent such a ligand.
  • Preferred ligands can improve transport, hybridization, and specificity properties and may also improve nuclease resistance of the resultant natural or modified oligoribonucleotide, or a polymeric molecule comprising any combination of monomers described herein and/or natural or modified ribonucleotides.
  • Ligands in general can include therapeutic modifiers, e.g., for enhancing uptake; diagnostic compounds or reporter groups e.g., for monitoring distribution; cross-linking agents; nuclease-resistance conferring moieties; and natural or unusual nucleobases.
  • Lipophiles examples include lipophiles, lipids, steroids (e.g., cholesterol, uvaol, hecigenin, diosgenin), terpenes (e.g., triterpenes, e.g., sarsasapogenin, Friedelin, epifriedelanol derivatized lithocholic acid), vitamins (e.g., folic acid, vitamin A, vitamin E, biotin, pyridoxal), carbohydrates, proteins, protein binding agents, integrin targeting molecules, polycationics (e.g., porphyrins), peptides, polyamines, and peptide mimics.
  • steroids e.g., cholesterol, uvaol, hecigenin, diosgenin
  • terpenes e.g., triterpenes, e.g., sarsasapogenin, Friedelin, epifriedelanol derivatized lithocholic acid
  • vitamins
  • the ligand can be one of the following triterpenes:
  • the ligand can be a steroid, e.g., a substituted or unsubstituted cholesterol or cholanic acid, or stereoisomer thereof or one of the following steroids:
  • the ligand can be a carbohydrate, (e.g., a monosaccharide, e.g., an aldose or a ketose, (triose, tetrose, pentose, hexose, etc.); a disaccharide; or polysaccharide).
  • the ligand can be, e.g., galactose, N-acetylgalactosamine, or mannose.
  • the ligand can include a steroid that is tethered to at least one carbohydrate (e.g., a monosaccharide). Such a ligand can be attached to the tether or the tethering attachment point through a atom or group of atoms that is associated with either the steroid or the carbohydrate (e.g., an amino group or a hydroxy group). Tethers can include any of those described herein. In certain embodiments, the tether can further include a multivalent moiety (e.g., a trihydroxybenzoate or trihydroxybenzyl group) for tethering one or more carbohydrates. Examples of such ligands include compounds 7, 8, 38, 39, 55, and 61.
  • the ligand can be a porphyrin.
  • the porphyrin can be further substituted with a tether or a tethered ligand (e.g., a steroid, a carbohydrate, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate).
  • the porphyrin can be or form part of a tether that attaches a ligand to an iRNA agent.
  • RNA Modification Database maintained by Pamela F. Crain, Jef Rozenski and James A. McCloskey; Departments of Medicinal Chemistry and Biochemistry, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah 84112, USA (RNAmods@lib.med.utah.edu).
  • the 5′ silyl protecting group can be used in conjunction with acid labile orthoesters at the 2′ position of ribonucleosides to synthesize oligonucleotides via phosphoramidite chemistry. Final deprotection conditions are known not to significantly degrade RNA products. Functional groups on the unusual and universal bases are blocked during oligonucleotide synthesis with protecting groups that are compatible with the operations being performed that are described herein. All syntheses can be can be conducted in any automated or manual synthesizer on large, medium, or small scale. The syntheses may also be carried out in multiple well plates or glass slides.
  • the 5′-O-silyl group can be removed via exposure to fluoride ions, which can include any source of fluoride ion, e.g., those salts containing fluoride ion paired with inorganic counterions e.g., cesium fluoride and potassium fluoride or those salts containing fluoride ion paired with an organic counterion, e.g., a tetraalkylammonium fluoride.
  • a crown ether catalyst can be utilized in combination with the inorganic fluoride in the deprotection reaction.
  • Preferred fluoride ion source are tetrabutylammonium fluoride or aminehydrofluorides (e.g., combining aqueous HF with triethylamine in a dipolar aprotic solvent, e.g., dimethylformamide).
  • the choice of protecting groups for use on the phosphite triesters and phosphotriesters can alter the stability of the triesters towards fluoride. Methyl protection of the phosphotriester or phosphitetriester can stabilize the linkage against fluoride ions and improve process yields.
  • ribonucleosides have a reactive 2′ hydroxyl substituent, it can be desirable to protect the reactive 2′ position in RNA with a protecting group that is compatible with a 5′-O-silyl protecting group, e.g. one stable to fluoride.
  • Orthoesters meet this criterion and can be readily removed in a final acid deprotection step that can result in minimal RNA degradation.
  • Tetrazole catalysts can be used in the standard phosphoramidite coupling reaction.
  • Preferred catalysts include e.g. tetrazole, S-ethyl-tetrazole, p-nitrophenyltetrazole.
  • Nucleosides are suitably protected and functionalized for use in solid-phase or solution-phase synthesis of RNA oligonucleotides.
  • the 2′-hydroxyl group in a ribonucleotide can be modified using a tris orthoester reagent.
  • the 2′-hydroxyl can be modified to yield a 2′-O-orthoester nucleoside by reacting the ribonucleoside with the tris orthoester reagent in the presence of an acidic catalyst, e.g., pyridinium p-toluene sulfonate. This reaction is known to those skilled in the art.
  • the product can then be subjected to further protecting group reactions (e.g., 5′-O-silylation) and functionalizations (e.g., 3′-O-phosphitylation) to produce a desired reagent (e.g., nucleoside phosphoramidite) for incorporation within an oligonucleotide or polymer by reactions known to those skilled in the art.
  • a desired reagent e.g., nucleoside phosphoramidite
  • Preferred orthoesters include those comprising ethylene glycol ligands which are protected with acyl or ester protecting groups. Specifically, the preferred acyl group is acetyl.
  • the nucleoside reagents may then be used by those skilled in the art to synthesize RNA oligonucleotides on commercially available synthesizer instruments, e.g. Gene Assembler Plus (Pharmacia), 380B (Applied Biosystems). Following synthesis (either solution-phase or solid-phase) of an oligonucleotide or polymer, the product can be subjected to one or more reactions using non-acidic reagents. One of these reactions may be strong basic conditions, for example, 40% methylamine in water for 10 minutes at 55.degree.
  • the resultant orthoester may be left attached when the polymer or oligonucleotide is used in subsequent applications, or it may be removed in a final mildly-acidic reaction, for example, 10 minutes at 55.degree. C. in 50 mM acetic acid, pH 3.0, followed by addition of equal volume of 150 mM TRIS buffer for 10 minutes at 55.degree. C.
  • Universal bases are described in “Survey and Summary: The Applications of Universal DNA base analogues” Loakes, D., Nucleic Acid Research 2001, 29, 2437, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. Specific examples are described in the following: Liu, D.; Moran, S.; Kool, E. T. Chem. Biol., 1997, 4, 919-926; Morales, J. C.; Kool, E. T. Biochemistry, 2000, 39, 2626-2632; Matray, T, J.; Kool, E. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1998, 120, 6191-6192; Moran, S. Ren, R. X. -F.; Rumney I V, S.; Kool, E.
  • modified RNA molecules can be used in the preparation of modified RNA molecules, or polymeric molecules comprising any combination of monomer compounds described herein and/or natural or modified ribonucleotides in which one or more subunits contain an unusual or universal base.
  • Modified RNA molecules include e.g.
  • nucleoside surrogate those molecules containing a chemically or stereochemically modified nucleoside (e.g., having one or more backbone modifications, e.g., phosphorothioate or P-alkyl; having one or more sugar modifications, e.g., 2′-OCH 3 or 2′-F; and/or having one or more base modifications, e.g., 5-alkylamino or 5-allylamino) or a nucleoside surrogate.
  • backbone modifications e.g., phosphorothioate or P-alkyl
  • sugar modifications e.g., 2′-OCH 3 or 2′-F
  • base modifications e.g., 5-alkylamino or 5-allylamino
  • phosphite ester intermediates which in turn are oxidized e.g., with iodine, to the phosphate diester.
  • the phosphites may be treated with e.g., sulfur, selenium, amino, and boron reagents to form modified phosphate backbones.
  • Linkages between the monomers described herein and a nucleoside or oligonucleotide chain can also be treated with iodine, sulfur, selenium, amino, and boron reagents to form unmodified and modified phosphate backbones respectively.
  • the monomers described herein may be coupled with nucleosides or oligonucleotides containing any of the modifications or nucleoside surrogates described herein.
  • oligonucleotide peptide conjugates can be performed by established methods. See, for example, Trufert et al., Tetrahedron, 52:3005, 1996; and Manoharan, “Oligonucleotide Conjugates in Antisense Technology,” in Antisense Drug Technology , ed. S. T. Crooke, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2001. Exemplary methods are shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 .
  • a peptidomimetic can be modified to create a constrained peptide that adopts a distinct and specific preferred conformation, which can increase the potency and selectivity of the peptide.
  • the constrained peptide can be an azapeptide (Gante, Synthesis, 405-413, 1989).
  • An azapeptide is synthesized by replacing the ⁇ -carbon of an amino acid with a nitrogen atom without changing the structure of the amino acid side chain.
  • the azapeptide can be synthesized by using hydrazine in traditional peptide synthesis coupling methods, such as by reacting hydrazine with a “carbonyl donor,” e.g., phenylchloroformate.
  • a general azapeptide synthesis is shown in FIG. 6 .
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to an ligand-conjugated monomer
  • N-methyl peptides are composed of N-methyl amino acids, which provide an additional methyl group in the peptide backbone, thereby potentially providing additional means of resistance to proteolytic cleavage.
  • N-methyl peptides can by synthesized by methods known in the art (see, for example, Lindgren et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci.
  • an Ant or Tat peptide can be an N-methyl peptide.
  • An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 7 .
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic can be a ⁇ -peptide.
  • ⁇ -peptides form stable secondary structures such as helices, pleated sheets, turns and hairpins in solutions. Their cyclic derivatives can fold into nanotubes in the solid state.
  • ⁇ -peptides are resistant to degradation by proteolytic enzymes.
  • ⁇ -peptides can be synthesized by methods known in the art.
  • an Ant or Tat peptide can be a ⁇ -peptide. An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 8 .
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer
  • a oligocarbamate e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer
  • Oligocarbamate peptides are internalized into a cell by a transport pathway facilitated by carbamate transporters.
  • an Ant or Tat peptide can be an oligocarbamate.
  • An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 9 .
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer
  • a peptide or peptidomimetic can be an oligourea conjugate (or an oligothiourea conjugate), in which the amide bond of a peptidomimetic is replaced with a urea moiety. Replacement of the amide bond provides increased resistance to degradation by proteolytic enzymes, e.g., proteolytic enzymes in the gastrointestinal tract.
  • an oligourea conjugate is tethered to an iRNA agent for use in oral delivery.
  • the backbone in each repeating unit of an oligourea peptidomimetic can be extended by one carbon atom in comparison with the natural amino acid.
  • the single carbon atom extension can increase peptide stability and lipophilicity, for example.
  • An oligourea peptide can therefore be advantageous when an iRNA agent is directed for passage through a bacterial cell wall, or when an iRNA agent must traverse the blood-brain barrier, such as for the treatment of a neurological disorder.
  • a hydrogen bonding unit is conjugated to the oligourea peptide, such as to create an increased affinity with a receptor.
  • an Ant or Tat peptide can be an oligourea conjugate (or an oligothiourea conjugate).
  • An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 10 .
  • siRNA peptide conjugates of the invention can be affiliated with, e.g., tethered to, ligand-conjugated monomers occurring at various positions on an iRNA agent.
  • a peptide can be terminally conjugated, on either the sense or the antisense strand, or a peptide can be bisconjugated (one peptide tethered to each end, one conjugated to the sense strand, and one conjugated to the antisense strand).
  • the peptide can be internally conjugated, such as in the loop of a short hairpin iRNA agent.
  • the peptide can be affiliated with a complex, such as a peptide-carrier complex.
  • a peptide-carrier complex consists of at least a carrier molecule, which can encapsulate one or more iRNA agents (such as for delivery to a biological system and/or a cell), and a peptide moiety tethered to the outside of the carrier molecule, such as for targeting the carrier complex to a particular tissue or cell type.
  • a carrier complex can carry additional targeting molecules on the exterior of the complex, or fusogenic agents to aid in cell delivery.
  • the one or more iRNA agents encapsulated within the carrier can be conjugated to lipophilic molecules, which can aid in the delivery of the agents to the interior of the carrier.
  • a carrier molecule or structure can be, for example, a micelle, a liposome (e.g., a cationic liposome), a nanoparticle, a microsphere, or a biodegradable polymer.
  • a peptide moiety can be tethered to the carrier molecule by a variety of linkages, such as a disulfide linkage, an acid labile linkage, a peptide-based linkage, an oxyamino linkage or a hydrazine linkage.
  • a peptide-based linkage can be a GFLG peptide.
  • the monomer compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds.
  • Other synthetic chemistry transformations, protecting groups (e.g., for hydroxyl, amino, etc. present on the bases) and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations , VCH Publishers (1989); T. W.
  • the monomer compounds may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds described herein can also contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds, carbon-nitrogen bonds, e.g., amides) or substituents that can restrict bond rotation, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans, E/Z isomers, and rotational isomers (rotamers) are expressly included herein.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g., alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
  • protecting groups for ligand-conjugated monomer hydroxyl groups include but are not limited to the dimethoxytrityl group (DMT).
  • DMT dimethoxytrityl group
  • Silicon-based protecting groups can therefore be used in conjunction with or in place of the DMT group as necessary or desired.
  • the monomers described herein can be used to make oligonucleotides which are useful as iRNA agents, e.g., RNA molecules, (double-stranded; single-stranded) that mediate RNAi, e.g., with respect to an endogenous gene of a subject or to a gene of a pathogen.
  • the iRNA agent will incorporate momomers described herein together with naturally occuring nucleosides or nucleotides or with other modified nucleosides or nucleotides.
  • the modified monomers can be present at any position in the iRNA agent, e.g., at the terminii or in the middle region of an iRNA agent or in a duplex region or in an unpaired region.
  • iRNA agent can have any architecture, e.g., architecture described herein. E.g., it can be incorporated into an iRNA agent having an overhang structure, a hairpin or other single strand structure or a two-strand structure, as described herein.
  • RNA agent is an unmodified RNA, modified RNA, or nucleoside surrogate, all of which are defined herein (see, e.g., the section below entitled RNA Agents). While numerous modified RNAs and nucleoside surrogates are described, preferred examples include those which have greater resistance to nuclease degradation than do unmodified RNAs. Preferred examples include those which have a 2′ sugar modification, a modification in a single strand overhang, preferably a 3′ single strand overhang, or, particularly if single stranded, a 5′ modification which includes one or more phosphate groups or one or more analogs of a phosphate group.
  • RNA agent is an RNA agent which can, or which can be cleaved into an RNA agent which can, down regulate the expression of a target gene, preferably an endogenous or pathogen target RNA. While not wishing to be bound by theory, an iRNA agent may act by one or more of a number of mechanisms, including post-transcriptional cleavage of a target mRNA sometimes referred to in the art as RNAi, or pre-transcriptional or pre-translational mechanisms.
  • An iRNA agent can include a single strand or can include more than one strands, e.g., it can be a double stranded iRNA agent. If the iRNA agent is a single strand it is particularly preferred that it include a 5′ modification which includes one or more phosphate groups or one or more analogs of a phosphate group.
  • the RRMS-containing iRNA agent should include a region of sufficient homology to the target gene, and be of sufficient length in terms of nucleotides, such that the iRNA agent, or a fragment thereof, can mediate down regulation of the target gene.
  • nucleotide or ribonucleotide is sometimes used herein in reference to one or more monomeric subunits of an RNA agent.
  • ribonucleotide or “nucleotide”, herein can, in the case of a modified RNA or nucleotide surrogate, also refer to a modified nucleotide, or surrogate replacement moiety at one or more positions.
  • the iRNA agent is or includes a region which is at least partially, and in some embodiments fully, complementary to the target RNA.
  • RNAi cleavage of the target RNA e.g., mRNA.
  • an iRNA agent will often be modified or include nucleoside surrogates in addition to the ribose replacement modification subunit (RRMS).
  • Single stranded regions of an iRNA agent will often be modified or include nucleoside surrogates, e.g., the unpaired region or regions of a hairpin structure, e.g., a region which links two complementary regions, can have modifications or nucleoside surrogates.
  • Modification to stabilize one or more 3′- or 5′-terminus of an iRNA agent, e.g., against exonucleases, or to favor the antisense sRNA agent to enter into RISC are also favored.
  • Modifications can include C3 (or C6, C7, C12) amino linkers, thiol linkers, carboxyl linkers, non-nucleotidic spacers (C3, C6, C9, C12, abasic, triethylene glycol, hexaethylene glycol), special biotin or fluorescein reagents that come as phosphoramidites and that have another DMT-protected hydroxyl group, allowing multiple couplings during RNA synthesis.
  • an iRNA agent will preferably have one or more of the following properties:
  • a “single strand iRNA agent” as used herein, is an iRNA agent which is made up of a single molecule. It may include a duplexed region, formed by intra-strand pairing, e.g., it may be, or include, a hairpin or pan-handle structure.
  • Single strand iRNA agents are preferably antisense with regard to the target molecule.
  • single strand iRNA agents are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus. 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing.
  • Suitable modifications include: 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-guanosine cap (7-methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N—O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′
  • the antisense and sense strands of a double strand iRNA agent may be desirable to modify one or both of the antisense and sense strands of a double strand iRNA agent. In some cases they will have the same modification or the same class of modification but in other cases the sense and antisense strand will have different modifications, e.g., in some cases it is desirable to modify only the sense strand. It may be desirable to modify only the sense strand, e.g., to inactivate it, e.g., the sense strand can be modified in order to inactivate the sense strand and prevent formation of an active sRNA/protein or RISC.
  • Other modifications which prevent phosphorylation can also be used, e.g., simply substituting the 5′-OH by H rather than O—Me.
  • Antisense strand modifications include 5′ phosphorylation as well as any of the other 5′ modifications discussed herein, particularly the 5′ modifications discussed above in the section on single stranded iRNA molecules.
  • the sense and the antisense strands will include different modifications. Multiple different modifications can be included on the sense and antisense strands.
  • the modifications on each strand may differ from each other, and may also differ from the various modifications on the other strand.
  • the sense strand may have a modification, e.g., a modification described herein
  • the antisense strand may have a different modification, e.g., a different modification described herein.
  • one strand, such as the sense strand may have two different modifications
  • the antisense strand may include a modification that differs from the at least two modifications on the sense strand.
  • a ds iRNA agent contains sense and antisense strands, preferable paired to contain an overhang, e.g., one or two 5′ or 3′ overhangs but preferably a 3′ overhang of 2-3 nucleotides. Most embodiments will have a 3′ overhang.
  • Preferred sRNA agents will have single-stranded overhangs, preferably 3′ overhangs, of 1 or preferably 2 or 3 nucleotides in length at each end. The overhangs can be the result of one strand being longer than the other, or the result of two strands of the same length being staggered. 5′ ends are preferably phosphorylated.
  • Preferred lengths for the duplexed region is between 15 and 30, most preferably 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, and 23 nucleotides in length, e.g., in the sRNA agent range discussed above.
  • sRNA agents can resemble in length and structure the natural Dicer processed products from long dsRNAs.
  • Embodiments in which the two strands of the sRNA agent are linked, e.g., covalently linked are also included. Hairpin, or other single strand structures which provide the required double stranded region, and preferably a 3′ overhang are also within the invention.
  • nucleic acids are polymers of subunits or monomers
  • many of the modifications described below occur at a position which is repeated within a nucleic acid, e.g., a modification of a base, or a phosphate moiety, or the a non-linking O of a phosphate moiety.
  • the modification will occur at all of the subject positions in the nucleic acid but in many, and infact in most cases it will not.
  • a modification may only occur at a 3′ or 5′ terminal position, may only occur in a terminal regions, e.g. at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand.
  • a modification may occur in a double strand region, a single strand region, or in both.
  • a modification may occur only in the double strand region of an RNA or may only occur in a single strand region of an RNA.
  • a phosphorothioate modification at a non-linking O position may only occur at one or both termini, may only occur in a terminal regions, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand, or may occur in double strand and single strand regions, particularly at termini.
  • the 5′ end or ends can be phosphorylated.
  • all or some of the bases in a 3′ or 5′ overhang will be modified, e.g., with a modification described herein.
  • Modifications can include, e.g., the use of modifications at the 2′ OH group of the ribose sugar, e.g., the use of deoxyribonucleotides, e.g., deoxythymidine, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, e.g., phosphothioate modifications. Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence.
  • the scaffold presented above in Formula 1 represents a portion of a ribonucleic acid.
  • the basic components are the ribose sugar, the base, the terminal phosphates, and phosphate internucleotide linkers.
  • the bases are naturally occurring bases, e.g., adenine, uracil, guanine or cytosine
  • the sugars are the unmodified 2′ hydroxyl ribose sugar (as depicted) and W, X, Y, and Z are all O
  • Formula 1 represents a naturally occurring unmodified oligoribonucleotide.
  • Unmodified oligoribonucleotides may be less than optimal in some applications, e.g., unmodified oligoribonucleotides can be prone to degradation by e.g., cellular nucleases. Nucleases can hydrolyze nucleic acid phosphodiester bonds. However, chemical modifications to one or more of the above RNA components can confer improved properties, and, e.g., can render oligoribonucleotides more stable to nucleases. Umodified oligoribonucleotides may also be less than optimal in terms of offering tethering points for attaching ligands or other moieties to an iRNA agent.
  • Modified nucleic acids and nucleotide surrogates can include one or more of:
  • the actual electronic structure of some chemical entities cannot be adequately represented by only one canonical form (i.e. Lewis structure). While not wishing to be bound by theory, the actual structure can instead be some hybrid or weighted average of two or more canonical forms, known collectively as resonance forms or structures.
  • Resonance structures are not discrete chemical entities and exist only on paper. They differ from one another only in the placement or “localization” of the bonding and nonbonding electrons for a particular chemical entity. It can be possible for one resonance structure to contribute to a greater extent to the hybrid than the others.
  • the written and graphical descriptions of the embodiments of the present invention are made in terms of what the art recognizes as the predominant resonance form for a particular species. For example, any phosphoroamidate (replacement of a nonlinking oxygen with nitrogen) would be represented by X ⁇ O and Y ⁇ N in the above figure.
  • the phosphate group is a negatively charged species.
  • the charge is distributed equally over the two non-linking oxygen atoms (i.e., X and Y in Formula 1 above).
  • the phosphate group can be modified by replacing one of the oxygens with a different substituent.
  • One result of this modification to RNA phosphate backbones can be increased resistance of the oligoribonucleotide to nucleolytic breakdown.
  • modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate, phosphoroselenates, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidates, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters.
  • Phosphorodithioates have both non-linking oxygens replaced by sulfur. Unlike the situation where only one of X or Y is altered, the phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of oligoribonucleotides diastereomers. Diastereomer formation can result in a preparation in which the individual diastereomers exhibit varying resistance to nucleases.
  • RNA containing chiral phosphate groups can be lower relative to the corresponding unmodified RNA species.
  • modifications to both X and Y which eliminate the chiral center, e.g. phosphorodithioate formation may be desirable in that they cannot produce diastereomer mixtures.
  • X can be any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
  • Y can be any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl). Replacement of X and/or Y with sulfur is preferred.
  • the phosphate linker can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen (i.e., W or Z in Formula 1) with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates).
  • the replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen (position W (3′) or position Z (5′). Replacement of W with carbon or Z with nitrogen is preferred.
  • Candidate agents can be evaluated for suitability as described below.
  • a modified RNA can include modification of all or some of the sugar groups of the ribonucleic acid.
  • the 2′ hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents. While not being bound by theory, enhanced stability is expected since the hydroxyl can no longer be deprotonated to form a 2′ alkoxide ion.
  • the 2′ alkoxide can catalyze degradation by intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the linker phosphorus atom.
  • MOE methoxyethyl group
  • the sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose.
  • a modified RNA can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar.
  • Modified RNAs can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′. These abasic sugars can also be further contain modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms.
  • the 2′ modifications can be used in combination with one or more phosphate linker modifications (e.g., phosphorothioate).
  • phosphate linker modifications e.g., phosphorothioate
  • chimeric oligonucleotides are those that contain two or more different modifications.
  • the modificaton can also entail the wholesale replacement of a ribose structure with another entity at one or more sites in the iRNA agent.
  • the phosphate group can be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors (cf. Bracket I in Formula 1 above). While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that since the charged phosphodiester group is the reaction center in nucleolytic degradation, its replacement with neutral structural mimics should impart enhanced nuclease stability. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable, in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the charged phosphate group is replaced by a neutral moiety.
  • moieties which can replace the phosphate group include siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino.
  • Preferred replacements include the methylenecarbonylamino and methylenemethylimino groups.
  • Oligonucleotide-mimicking scaffolds can also be constructed wherein the phosphate linker and ribose sugar are replaced by nuclease resistant nucleoside or nucleotide surrogates (see Bracket II of Formula 1 above). While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the absence of a repetitively charged backbone diminishes binding to proteins that recognize polyanions (e.g. nucleases). Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the bases are tethered by a neutral surrogate backbone.
  • Examples include the mophilino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid (PNA) nucleoside surrogates.
  • a preferred surrogate is a PNA surrogate.
  • the 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3′ end, 5′ end or both ends of the molecule. They can include modification or replacement of an entire terminal phosphate or of one or more of the atoms of the phosphate group.
  • the 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labeling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester).
  • labeling moieties e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester).
  • the functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a spacer.
  • the terminal atom of the spacer can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3′ or C-5′ O, N, S or C group of the sugar.
  • the spacer can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs).
  • this array can substitute for a hairpin RNA loop in a hairpin-type RNA agent.
  • the 3′ end can be an —OH group. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that conjugation of certain moieties can improve transport, hybridization, and specificity properties. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it may be desirable to introduce terminal alterations that improve nuclease resistance. Other examples of terminal modifications include dyes, intercalating agents (e.g. acridines), cross-linkers (e.g.
  • psoralene mitomycin C
  • porphyrins TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin
  • polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine
  • artificial endonucleases e.g.
  • EDTA lipophilic carriers
  • lipophilic carriers e.g., cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine) and peptide conjugates (e.g., antennapedia peptide, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (e.g., PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG] 2 , polyamino
  • biotin e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid
  • transport/absorption facilitators e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid
  • synthetic ribonucleases e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles.
  • Terminal modifications can be added for a number of reasons, including as discussed elsewhere herein to modulate activity or to modulate resistance to degradation.
  • Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5′ end with phosphate or phosphate analogs.
  • iRNA agents, especially antisense strands are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus.
  • 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing.
  • Suitable modifications include: 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-guanosine cap (7-methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N—O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′
  • Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the preferred groups to be added include fluorophores, e.g., fluorscein or an Alexa dye, e.g., Alexa 488. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an RNA agent to another moiety; modifications useful for this include mitomycin C.
  • Adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil are the most common bases found in RNA. These bases can be modified or replaced to provide RNA's having improved properties.
  • nuclease resistant oligoribonucleotides can be prepared with these bases or with synthetic and natural nucleobases (e.g., inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, or tubercidine) and any one of the above modifications.
  • substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases e.g., “unusual bases” and “universal bases” described herein, can be employed.
  • Examples include without limitation 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines,
  • base changes are less preferred for promoting stability, but they can be useful for other reasons, e.g., some, e.g., 2,6-diaminopurine and 2 amino purine, are fluorescent. Modified bases can reduce target specificity. This should be taken into consideration in the design of iRNA agents.
  • modifications may preferably be included on an iRNA agent at a particular location, e.g., on the sense strand or antisense strand, or on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent.
  • a preferred location of a modification on an iRNA agent may confer preferred properties on the agent.
  • preferred locations of particular modifications may confer optimum gene silencing properties, or increased resistance to endonuclease or exonuclease activity.
  • a modification described herein and below may be the sole modification, or the sole type of modification included on multiple ribonucleotides, or a modification can be combined with one or more other modifications described herein and below.
  • a modification on a sense strand of a dsRNA agent can be different than a modification on the antisense strand of an iRNA agent. Similary, two different modifications on the sense strand can differ from a modification on the antisense strand. Other additional unique modifications, without limitation, can be incorporates into the sense and antisense strands.
  • An iRNA agent may include a backbone modification to any nucleotide on an iRNA strand.
  • an iRNA agent may include a phosphorothioate linkage or P-alkyl modification in the linkages between one or more nucleotides of an iRNA agent.
  • the nucleotides can be terminal nucleotides, e.g., nucleotides at the last position of a sense or antisense strand, or internal nucleotides.
  • An iRNA agent can include a a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ or 3′ sugar modification.
  • exemplary sugar modifications include, for example, a 2′-O-methylated nucleotide, a 2′-deoxy nucleotide, (e.g., a 2′-deoxyfluoro nucleotide), a 2′-O-methoxyethyl nucleotide, a 2′-O-NMA, a 2′-DMAEOE, a 2′-aminopropyl, 2′-hydroxy, or a 2′-ara-fluoro or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), extended nucleic acid (ENA), hexose nucleic acid (HNA), or cyclohexene nucleic acid (CeNA).
  • LNA locked nucleic acid
  • ENA extended nucleic acid
  • HNA hexose nucleic acid
  • CeNA cyclohexene
  • a 2′ modification is preferably 2′OMe, and more preferably, 2′-deoxyfluoro.
  • the modification is preferably on the sense strand.
  • the modification is a 2′ fluoro, and the modification may be on the sense or antisense strand, or on both strands.
  • a 2′-ara-fluoro modification will preferably be on the sense strand of the iRNA agent.
  • An LNA modification will preferably be on the sense strand of the iRNA agent or on the
  • An iRNA agent may include a 3′ sugar modification, e.g., a 3′OMe modification.
  • a 3′OMe modification is on the sense strand of the iRNA agent.
  • An iRNA agent may includes a 5′-methyl-pyrimidine (e.g., a 5′-methyl-uridine modification or a 5′-methyl-cytodine) modification.
  • a 5′-methyl-pyrimidine e.g., a 5′-methyl-uridine modification or a 5′-methyl-cytodine
  • an iRNA agent may have a phosphorothioate linkage and a 2′ sugar modification, e.g., a 2′OMe or 2° F. modification.
  • an iRNA agent may include at least one 5′ Me-pyrimidine and a 2′ sugar modification, e.g., a 2° F. or 2′OMe modification.
  • An iRNA agent may include a nucleobase modification, such as a cationic modification, such as a 3′-abasic cationic modification.
  • the cationic modification can be e.g., an alkylamino-dT (e.g., a C6 amino-dT), an allylamino conjugate, a pyrrolidine conjugate, a pthalamido, a porphyrin, or a hydroxyprolinol conjugate, on one or more of the terminal nucleotides of the iRNA agent.
  • the conjugate is preferably attached to the 3′ end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent.
  • the linker is preferably attached to the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand, or the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • the linker is preferably on the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand, and not on the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
  • An iRNA agent may include at least one conjugate, such as a lipophile, a terpene, a protein binding agent, a vitamin, a carbohydrate, or a peptide.
  • the conjugate can be naproxen, nitroindole (or another conjugate that contributes to stacking interactions), folate, ibuprofen, or a Cs pyrimidine linker.
  • the conjugate can also be a glyceride lipid conjugate (e.g., a dialkyl glyceride derivatives), vitamin E conjugate, or a thio-cholesterol.
  • the conjugate when a conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand or on the 5′ end of the antisense strand, and preferably the conjugate is not on the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • the conjugate When the conjugate is naproxen, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense or antisense strands.
  • the conjugate When the conjugate is cholesterol, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the cholesterol conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand and preferably not present on the antisense strand.
  • Cholesterol may be conjugated to the iRNA agent by a pyrrolidine linker, serinol linker, hydroxyprolinol linker, or disulfide linkage.
  • a dU-cholesterol conjugate may also be conjugated to the iRNA agent by a disulfide linkage.
  • the conjugate is cholanic acid, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the cholanic acid is preferably attached to the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand, or the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In one embodiment, the cholanic acid is attached to the 3′ end of the sense strand and the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • One or more nucleotides of an iRNA agent may have a 2′-5′ linkage.
  • the 2′-5′ linkage is on the sense strand.
  • the 2′-5′ linkage occurs on the 5′ end of the sense strand.
  • the iRNA agent may include an L-sugar, preferably on the sense strand, and not on the antisense strand.
  • the iRNA agent may include a methylphosphonate modification.
  • the methylphosphonate is on the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the methylphosphonate is at the 3′ end of the sense or antisense strands of the iRNA agent.
  • An iRNA agent may be modified by replacing one or more ribonucleotides with deoxyribonucleotides.
  • adjacent deoxyribonucleotides are joined by phosphorothioate linkages, and the iRNA agent does not include more than four consecutive deoxyribonucleotides on the sense or the antisense strands.
  • An iRNA agent may include a difluorotoluyl (DFT) modification, e.g., 2,4-difluorotoluyl uracil, or a guanidine to inosine substitution.
  • DFT difluorotoluyl
  • the iRNA agent may include at least one 5′-uridine-adenine-3′ (5′-UA-3′) dinucleotide wherein the uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-uridine-guanine-3′ (5′-UG-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-cytidine-adenine-3′ (5′-CA-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-cytidine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-uridine-uridine-3′ (5′-UU-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-cytidine-cytidine-3′ (5′-CC-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-cytidine is
  • the chemically modified nucleotide in the iRNA agent may be a 2′-O-methylated nucleotide.
  • the modified nucleotide can be a 2′-deoxy nucleotide, a 2′-deoxyfluoro nucleotide, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl nucleotide, a 2′-O-NMA, a 2′-DMAEOE, a 2′-aminopropyl, 2′-hydroxy, or a 2′-ara-fluoro, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), extended nucleic acid (ENA), hexose nucleic acid (HNA), or cyclohexene nucleic acid (CeNA).
  • LNA locked nucleic acid
  • ENA extended nucleic acid
  • HNA hexose nucleic acid
  • CeNA cyclohexene nucleic acid
  • the iRNA agents including these modifications are particularly stabilized against exonuclease activity, when the modified dinucleotide occurs on a terminal end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent, and are otherwise particularly stabilized against endonuclease activity.
  • An iRNA agent may have a single overhang, e.g., one end of the iRNA agent has a 3′ or 5′ overhang and the other end of the iRNA agent is a blunt end, or the iRNA agent may have a double overhang, e.g., both ends of the iRNA agent have a 3′ or 5′ overhang, such as a dinuclotide overhang. In another altervative, both ends of the iRNA agent may have blunt ends.
  • the iRNA agent may further include a sense RNA strand and an antisense RNA strand, wherein the antisense RNA strand is 25 or fewer nucleotides in length, and includes an antisense nucleotide sequence having 18-25 nucleotides in length.
  • the iRNA agent may further include a nucleotide overhang having 1 to 4 unpaired nucleotides, which may be at the 3′-end of the antisense RNA strand, and the nucleotide overhang may have the nucleotide sequence 5′-GC-3′ or 5′-CGC-3′.
  • the unpaired nucleotides may have at least one phosphorothioate dinucleotide linkage, and at least one of the unpaired nucleotides may be chemically modified in the 2′-position.
  • the doublestrand region of the iRNA agent may include phosphorothioate dinucleotide linkages on one or both of the sense and antisense strands.
  • the antisense RNA strand and the sense RNA strand may be connected with a linker, e.g., a chemical linker such as hexaethylene glycol linker, a poly-(oxyphosphinico-oxy-1,3-propandiol) linker, an allyl linker, or a polyethylene glycol linker.
  • RNA agent e.g., a modified RNA
  • a candidate RNA agent for a selected property by exposing the agent or modified molecule and a control molecule to the appropriate conditions and evaluating for the presence of the selected property.
  • resistance to a degradent can be evaluated as follows.
  • a candidate modified RNA (and preferably a control molecule, usually the unmodified form) can be exposed to degradative conditions, e.g., exposed to a milieu, which includes a degradative agent, e.g., a nuclease.
  • a biological sample e.g., one that is similar to a milieu, which might be encountered, in therapeutic use, e.g., blood or a cellular fraction, e.g., a cell-free homogenate or disrupted cells.
  • the candidate and control could then be evaluated for resistance to degradation by any of a number of approaches.
  • the candidate and control could be labeled, preferably prior to exposure, with, e.g., a radioactive or enzymatic label, or a fluorescent label, such as Cy3 or Cy5.
  • Control and modified RNA's can be incubated with the degradative agent, and optionally a control, e.g., an inactivated, e.g., heat inactivated, degradative agent.
  • a physical parameter, e.g., size, of the modified and control molecules are then determined. They can be determined by a physical method, e.g., by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or a sizing column, to assess whether the molecule has maintained its original length, or assessed functionally. Alternatively, Northern blot analysis can be used to assay the length of an unlabeled modified molecule.
  • a functional assay can also be used to evaluate the candidate agent.
  • a functional assay can be applied initially or after an earlier non-functional assay, (e.g., assay for resistance to degradation) to determine if the modification alters the ability of the molecule to silence gene expression.
  • a cell e.g., a mammalian cell, such as a mouse or human cell, can be co-transfected with a plasmid expressing a fluorescent protein, e.g., GFP, and a candidate RNA agent homologous to the transcript encoding the fluorescent protein (see, e.g., WO 00/44914).
  • a modified dsRNA homologous to the GFP mRNA can be assayed for the ability to inhibit GFP expression by monitoring for a decrease in cell fluorescence, as compared to a control cell, in which the transfection did not include the candidate dsRNA, e.g., controls with no agent added and/or controls with a non-modified RNA added.
  • Efficacy of the candidate agent on gene expression can be assessed by comparing cell fluorescence in the presence of the modified and unmodified dsRNA agents.
  • a candidate dsRNA agent homologous to an endogenous mouse gene preferably a maternally expressed gene, such as c-mos
  • a phenotype of the oocyte e.g., the ability to maintain arrest in metaphase II, can be monitored as an indicator that the agent is inhibiting expression. For example, cleavage of c-mos mRNA by a dsRNA agent would cause the oocyte to exit metaphase arrest and initiate parthenogenetic development (Colledge et al.
  • RNA levels can be verified by Northern blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target mRNA, or by Western blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target protein, as compared to a negative control.
  • Controls can include cells in which with no agent is added and/or cells in which a non-modified RNA is added.
  • oligoribonucleotides and oligoribonucleosides used in accordance with this invention may be with solid phase synthesis, see for example “Oligonucleotide synthesis, a practical approach”, Ed. M. J. Gait, IRL Press, 1984; “Oligonucleotides and Analogues, A Practical Approach”, Ed. F.
  • phosphinate oligoribonucleotides The preparation of phosphinate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270. The preparation of alkyl phosphonate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863. The preparation of phosphoramidite oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878. The preparation of phosphotriester oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243. The preparation of borano phosphate oligoribonucleotide is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylenephosphonate oligoribonucleotides is described in An, H, et al. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2789-2801.
  • Preparation of sulfur bridged nucleotides is described in Sproat et al. Nucleosides Nucleotides 1988, 7,651 and Crosstick et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 4693.
  • MMI linked oligoribonucleosides also identified herein as MMI linked oligoribonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligoribonucleosides, also identified herein as MDH linked oligoribonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-3 linked oligoribonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-4 linked oligoribonucleosides as well as mixed backbone compounds having, as for instance, alternating MMI and PO or PS linkages can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • Formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564.
  • Ethylene oxide linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618.
  • Siloxane replacements are described in Cormier, J. F. et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 1988, 16, 4583. Carbonate replacements are described in Tittensor, J.
  • Cyclobutyl sugar surrogate compounds can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,044. Pyrrolidine sugar surrogate can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,134. Morpholino sugar surrogates can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,142,047 and 5,235,033, and other related patent disclosures.
  • Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNAs) are known per se and can be prepared in accordance with any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 5-23. They may also be prepared in accordance with U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083.
  • N-2 substitued purine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,459,255.
  • 3-Deaza purine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,457,191.
  • 5,6-Substituted pyrimidine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,614,617.
  • 5-Propynyl pyrimidine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,484,908. Additional references can be disclosed in the above section on base modifications.
  • RNA agents have the following structure (see Formula 2 below):
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are each, independently, H, (i.e. abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thio
  • H i.
  • R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each, independently, OR 8 , O(CH 2 CH 2 O) m CH 2 CH 2 OR 8 ; O(CH 2 ) n R 9 ; O(CH 2 ) n OR 9 , H; halo; NH 2 ; NHR 8 ; N(R 8 ) 2 ; NH(CH 2 CH 2 NH) m CH 2 CH 2 NHR 9 ; NHC(O)R 8 ; cyano; mercapto, SR 8 ; alkyl-thio-alkyl; alkyl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which may be optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocycly
  • W 1 is OH, (CH 2 ) n R 10 , (CH 2 ) n NHR 10 , (CH 2 ) n OR 10 , (CH 2 ) n SR 10 ; O(CH 2 ) n R 10 ; O(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n NR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n SR 10 ; O(CH 2 ) n SS(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n C(O)OR 10 , NH(CH 2 ) n R 10 ; NH(CH 2 ) n NR 10 ; NH(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , NH(CH 2 ) n SR 10 ; S(CH 2 ) n R 10 , S(CH 2 ) n NR 10 , S(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , S(CH 2 ) n SR 10 O(CH 2 CH 2 O) n CH 2 CH
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are each, independently, O or S.
  • Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 are each, independently, OH, O—, OR 8 , S, Se, BH 3 ⁇ , H, NHR 9 , N(R 9 ) 2 alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , and Z 3 are each independently O, CH 2 , NH, or S.
  • Z 4 is OH, (CH 2 ) n R 10 , (CH 2 ) n NHR 10 , (CH 2 ).
  • OR 10 (CH 2 ) n SR 10 ; O(CH 2 ) n R 10 ; O(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n NR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n SR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n SS(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , O(CH 2 ) n C(O)OR 10 ; NH(CH 2 ) n R 10 ; NH(CH 2 ) n NR 10 ; NH(CH 2 ) n OR 10 , NH(CH 2 ) n SR 10 ; S(CH 2 ) n R 10 , S(CH 2 ) n NR 10 , S(CH 2 ) n OR 10
  • x is 5-100, chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein.
  • R 7 is H; or is together combined with R 4 , R 5 , or R 6 to form an [—O—CH 2 —] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
  • R 8 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, amino acid, or sugar;
  • R 9 is NH 2 , alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid; and
  • R 10 is H; fluorophore (pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes); sulfur, silicon, boron or ester protecting group; intercalating agents (e.g. acridines), cross-linkers (e.g.
  • psoralene mitomycin C
  • porphyrins TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin
  • polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine
  • artificial endonucleases e.g.
  • lipohilic carriers cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, bomeol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine)and peptide conjugates (e.g., antennapedia peptide, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (e.g., PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG] 2 , polyamino; alkyl, cyclol, phosphate
  • biotin e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid
  • synthetic ribonucleases e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles
  • RNA agent e.g., m is 0-1,000,000, and n is 0-20.
  • Q is a spacer selected from the group consisting of abasic sugar, amide, carboxy, oxyamine, oxyimine, thioether, disulfide, thiourea, sulfonamide, or morpholino, biotin or fluorescein reagents.
  • RNA agents in which the entire phosphate group has been replaced have the following structure (see Formula 3 below):
  • a 10 -A 40 is L-G-L; A 10 and/or A 40 may be absent, in which L is a linker, wherein one or both L may be present or absent and is selected from the group consisting of CH 2 (CH 2 ) g ; N(CH 2 ) g ; O(CH 2 ) g ; S(CH 2 ) g .
  • G is a functional group selected from the group consisting of siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino.
  • R 10 , R 20 , and R 30 are each, independently, H, (i.e. abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioal
  • R 40 , R 50 , and R 60 are each, independently, OR 8 , O(CH 2 CH 2 O) n CH 2 CH 2 OR 8 ; O(CH 2 ) n R 9 ; O(CH 2 ) n OR 9 , H; halo; NH 2 ; NHR 8 ; N(R 8 ) 2 ; NH(CH 2 CH 2 NH) m CH 2 CH 2 R 9 ; NHC(O)R 8 ; cyano; mercapto, SR 7 ; alkyl-thio-alkyl; alkyl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which may be optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl
  • x is 5-100 or chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein.
  • R 70 is H; or is together combined with R 40 , R 50 , or R 60 to form an [—O—CH 2 —] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
  • R 8 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, amino acid, or sugar; and R 9 is NH 2 , alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid.
  • m is 0-1,000,000, n is 0-20, and g is 0-2.
  • Preferred nucleoside surrogates have the following structure (see Formula 4 below): SLR 100 -(M-SLR 200 ) x -M-SLR 300 FORMULA 4
  • S is a nucleoside surrogate selected from the group consisting of mophilino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid.
  • L is a linker and is selected from the group consisting of CH 2 (CH 2 ) g ; N(CH 2 ) g ; O(CH 2 ) g ; S(CH 2 ) g ; —C(O)(CH 2 ) n -or may be absent.
  • M is an amide bond; sulfonamide; sulfinate; phosphate group; modified phosphate group as described herein; or may be absent.
  • R 100 , R 200 , and R 300 are each, independently, H (i.e., abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioal
  • x is 5-100, or chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein; and g is 0-2.
  • RNA e.g., an iRNA agent
  • NAM nuclease resistant monomer
  • An iRNA agent can include monomers which have been modifed so as to inhibit degradation, e.g., by nucleases, e.g., endonucleases or exonucleases, found in the body of a subject. These monomers are referred to herein as NRMs, or nuclease resistance promoting monomers or modifications.
  • these modifications will modulate other properties of the iRNA agent as well, e.g., the ability to interact with a protein, e.g., a transport protein, e.g., serum albumin, or a member of the RISC(RNA-induced Silencing Complex), or the ability of the first and second sequences to form a duplex with one another or to form a duplex with another sequence, e.g., a target molecule.
  • a protein e.g., a transport protein, e.g., serum albumin, or a member of the RISC(RNA-induced Silencing Complex
  • modifications of the sugar, base, and/or phosphate backbone in an iRNA agent can enhance endonuclease and exonuclease resistance, and can enhance interactions with transporter proteins and one or more of the functional components of the RISC complex.
  • Preferred modifications are those that increase exonuclease and endonuclease resistance and thus prolong the half-life of the iRNA agent prior to interaction with the RISC complex, but at the same time do not render the iRNA agent resistant to endonuclease activity in the RISC complex.
  • An iRNA agent may include a duplex comprising a hybridized sense and antisense strand, in which the antisense strand and/or the sense strand may include one or more of the modifications described herein.
  • the anti sense strand may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at one or more positions that occur 1-6 (e.g., 1-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2) nucleotides from either end of the strand.
  • the sense strand may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at any one of the intervening positions between the two ends of the strand.
  • the iRNA agent may also include a duplex comprising two hybridized antisense strands.
  • the first and/or the second antisense strand may include one or more of the modifications described herein.
  • one and/or both antisense strands may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at one or more positions that occur 1-6 (e.g., 1-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2) nucleotides from either end of the strand. Particular configurations are discussed below.
  • Modifications that can be useful for producing iRNA agents that meet the preferred nuclease resistance criteria delineated above can include one or more of the following chemical and/or stereochemical modifications of the sugar, base, and/or phosphate backbone:
  • NRM modifications can be introduced into an iRNA agent or into a sequence of an iRNA agent.
  • An NRM modification can be used more than once in a sequence or in an iRNA agent. As some NRM's interfere with hybridization the total number incorporated, should be such that acceptable levels of iRNA agent duplex formation are maintained.
  • NRM modifications are introduced into the terminal the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of a sequence (a sense strand or sequence) which does not target a desired sequence or gene in the subject. This can reduce off-target silencing.
  • a modification can include the alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking (X and Y) phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking (W and Z) phosphate oxygens.
  • Formula X depicts a phosphate moiety linking two sugar/sugar surrogate-base moieties, SB 1 and SB 2 .
  • one of the non-linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphate backbone moiety can be replaced by any one of the following: S, Se, BR 3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, etc.), C (i.e., an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc.), H, NR 2 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, etc.), or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
  • S, Se R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, etc.
  • C i.e., an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc.
  • H NR 2
  • OR R is alkyl or aryl
  • the phosphorus atom in an unmodified phosphate group is achiral.
  • the stereogenic phosphorus atom can possess either the “R” configuration (herein R P ) or the “S” configuration (herein S P ). Thus if 60% of a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms have the R P configuration, then the remaining 40% of the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms have the S P configuration.
  • iRNA agents having phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by another atom or group of atoms, may contain a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which at least about 50% of these atoms (e.g., at least about 60% of these atoms, at least about 70% of these atoms, at least about 80% of these atoms, at least about 90% of these atoms, at least about 95% of these atoms, at least about 98% of these atoms, at least about 99% of these atoms) have the S P configuration.
  • these atoms e.g., at least about 60% of these atoms, at least about 70% of these atoms, at least about 80% of these atoms, at least about 90% of these atoms, at least about 95% of these atoms, at least about 98% of these atoms, at least about 99% of these atoms
  • iRNA agents having phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by another atom or group of atoms may contain a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which at least about 50% of these atoms (e.g., at least about 60% of these atoms, at least about 70% of these atoms, at least about 80% of these atoms, at least about 90% of these atoms, at least about 95% of these atoms, at least about 98% of these atoms, at least about 99% of these atoms) have the R P configuration.
  • the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the S P configuration and may be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the R P configuration.
  • the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the R P configuration and may be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the S P configuration.
  • the phrase “substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the R P configuration” means that moieties containing stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the R P configuration cannot be detected by conventional methods known in the art (chiral HPLC, 1 H NMR analysis using chiral shift reagents, etc.).
  • the phrase “substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the S P configuration” means that moieties containing stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the S P configuration cannot be detected by conventional methods known in the art (chiral HPLC, 1 H NMR analysis using chiral shift reagents, etc.).
  • modified iRNA agents contain a phosphorothioate group, i.e., a phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by a sulfur atom.
  • the population of phosphorothioate stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the S P configuration and be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the R P configuration.
  • Phosphorothioates may be incorporated into iRNA agents using dimers e.g., formulas X-1 and X-2.
  • the former can be used to introduce phosphorothioate at the 3′ end of a strand, while the latter can be used to introduce this modification at the 5′ end or at a position that occurs e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 nucleotides from either end of the strand.
  • Y can be 2-cyanoethoxy
  • W and Z can be O
  • R 2′ can be, e.g., a substituent that can impart the C-3 endo configuration to the sugar (e.g., OH, F, OCH 3 )
  • DMT is dimethoxytrityl
  • BASE can be a natural, unusual, or a universal base.
  • X-1 and X-2 can be prepared using chiral reagents or directing groups that can result in phosphorothioate-containing dimers having a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having essentially only the R P configuration (i.e., being substantially free of the S P configuration) or only the S P configuration (i.e., being substantially free of the R P configuration).
  • dimers can be prepared having a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which about 50% of the atoms have the R P configuration and about 50% of the atoms have the S P configuration.
  • Dimers having stereogenic phosphorus atoms with the R P configuration can be identified and separated from dimers having stereogenic phosphorus atoms with the S P configuration using e.g., enzymatic degradation and/or conventional chromatography techniques.
  • Modifications can also include attachment of one or more cationic groups to the sugar, base, and/or the phosphorus atom of a phosphate or modified phosphate backbone moiety.
  • a cationic group can be attached to any atom capable of substitution on a natural, unusual or universal base.
  • a preferred position is one that does not interfere with hybridization, i.e., does not interfere with the hydrogen bonding interactions needed for base pairing.
  • a cationic group can be attached e.g., through the C2′ position of a sugar or analogous position in a cyclic or acyclic sugar surrogate.
  • NH 2 alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid
  • Modifications can also include the incorporation of nonphosphate linkages at the 5′ and/or 3′ end of a strand.
  • nonphosphate linkages which can replace the phosphate group include methyl phosphonate, hydroxylamino, siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino.
  • Preferred replacements include the methyl phosphonate and hydroxylamino groups.
  • modifications can include replacement of one of the bridging or linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphate backbone moiety (W and Z). Unlike the situation where only one of X or Y is altered, the phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of iRNA agents containing a stereogenic phosphorus atom.
  • Modifications can also include linking two sugars via a phosphate or modified phosphate group through the 2′ position of a first sugar and the 5′ position of a second sugar. Also contemplated are inverted linkages in which both a first and second sugar are eached linked through the respective 3′ positions.
  • Modified RNA's can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′. The sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose.
  • a modified iRNA agent can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar.
  • the natural, unusual, or universal base may have the ⁇ -configuration.
  • Modifcations can also include L-RNA.
  • Modifications can also include 5′-phosphonates, e.g., P(O)(O ⁇ ) 2 —X—C 5′ -sugar (X ⁇ CH2, CF2, CHF and 5′-phosphate prodrugs, e.g., P(O)[OCH2CH2SC(O)R] 2 CH 2 C 5′ -sugar.
  • the prodrug groups may be decomposed via reaction first with carboxy esterases. The remaining ethyl thiolate group via intramolecular S N 2 displacement can depart as episulfide to afford the underivatized phosphate group.
  • Modification can also include the addition of conjugating groups described elseqhere herein, which are prefereably attached to an iRNA agent through any amino group available for conjugation.
  • Nuclease resistant modifications include some which can be placed only at the terminus and others which can go at any position. Generally the modifications that can inhibit hybridization so it is preferably to use them only in terminal regions, and preferrable to not use them at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of an sequence which targets a subject sequence or gene. The can be used anywhere in a sense sequence, provided that sufficient hybridization between the two sequences of the iRNA agent is maintained. In some embodiments it is desirabable to put the NRM at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of a sequence which does not target a subject sequence or gene, as it can minimize off-target silencing.
  • an iRNA agent described herein can have an overhang which does not form a duplex structure with the other sequence of the iRNA agent—it is an overhang, but it does hybridize, either with itself, or with another nucleic acid, other than the other sequence of the iRNA agent.
  • nuclease-resistance promoting modifications will be distributed differently depending on whether the sequence will target a sequence in the subject (often referred to as an anti-sense sequence) or will not target a sequence in the subject (often referred to as a sense sequence). If a sequence is to target a sequence in the subject, modifications which interfer with or inhibit endonuclease cleavage should not be inserted in the region which is subject to RISC mediated cleavage, e.g., the cleavage site or the cleavage region (As described in Elbashir et al., 2001, Genes and Dev.
  • cleavage of the target occurs about in the middle of a 20 or 21 nt guide RNA, or about 10 or 11 nucleotides upstream of the first nucleotide which is complementary to the guide sequence.
  • cleavage site refers to the nucleotide on either side of the cleavage site, on the target or on the iRNA agent strand which hybridizes to it.
  • Cleavage region means an nucleotide with 1, 2, or 3 nucletides of the cleave site, in either direction.
  • Such modifications can be introduced into the terminal regions, e.g., at the terminal position or with 2, 3, 4, or 5 positions of the terminus, of a sequence which targets or a sequence which does not target a sequence in the subject.
  • An iRNA agent can have a first and a second strand chosen from the following:
  • An iRNA agent can also target two sequences and can have a first and second strand chosen from:
  • RNA e.g., an iRNA agent
  • a ribose mimic such as those described herein and those described in copending co-owned U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/454,962, filed on Mar. 13, 2003, and International Application No. PCT/US04/07070, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • an aspect of the invention features an iRNA agent that includes a secondary hydroxyl group, which can increase efficacy and/or confer nuclease resistance to the agent.
  • Nucleases e.g., cellular nucleases, can hydrolyze nucleic acid phosphodiester bonds, resulting in partial or complete degradation of the nucleic acid.
  • the secondary hydroxy group confers nuclease resistance to an iRNA agent by rendering the iRNA agent less prone to nuclease degradation relative to an iRNA which lacks the modification.
  • a secondary hydroxyl group on the iRNA agent can act as a structural mimic of a 3′ ribose hydroxyl group, thereby causing it to be less susceptible to degradation.
  • the secondary hydroxyl group refers to an “OH” radical that is attached to a carbon atom substituted by two other carbons and a hydrogen.
  • the secondary hydroxyl group that confers nuclease resistance as described above can be part of any acyclic carbon-containing group.
  • the hydroxyl may also be part of any cyclic carbon-containing group, and preferably one or more of the following conditions is met (1) there is no ribose moiety between the hydroxyl group and the terminal phosphate group or (2) the hydroxyl group is not on a sugar moiety which is coupled to a base.
  • the hydroxyl group is located at least two bonds (e.g., at least three bonds away, at least four bonds away, at least five bonds away, at least six bonds away, at least seven bonds away, at least eight bonds away, at least nine bonds away, at least ten bonds away, etc.) from the terminal phosphate group phosphorus of the iRNA agent. In preferred embodiments, there are five intervening bonds between the terminal phosphate group phosphorus and the secondary hydroxyl group.
  • Preferred iRNA agent delivery modules with five intervening bonds between the terminal phosphate group phosphorus and the secondary hydroxyl group have the following structure (see formula Y below):
  • A is an iRNA agent, including any iRNA agent described herein.
  • the iRNA agent may be connected directly or indirectly (e.g., through a spacer or linker) to “W” of the phosphate group.
  • the iRNA agents can have a terminal phosphate group that is unmodified (e.g., W, X, Y, and Z are O) or modified.
  • W and Z can be independently NH, O, or S; and
  • X and Y can be independently S, Se, BH 3 ⁇ , C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, H, O, O ⁇ , alkoxy or amino (including alkylamino, arylamino, etc.).
  • W, X and Z are O and Y is S.
  • R 1 and R 3 are each, independently, hydrogen; or C 1 -C 100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl.
  • R 2 is hydrogen; C 1 -C 100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R 2 may be taken together with with R 4 or R 6 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R 4 is hydrogen; C 1 -C 100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R 4 may be taken together with with R 2 or R 5 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R 5 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 100 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R 5 may be taken together with with R 4 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R 6 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl, or, when n is 1, R 6 may be taken together with with R 2 to form a ring of 6-10 atoms;
  • Preferred embodiments may include one of more of the following subsets of iRNA agent delivery modules.
  • A can be connected directly or indirectly through a terminal 3′ or 5′ ribose sugar carbon of the RNA agent.
  • RNAi agent delivery modules In another subset of RNAi agent delivery modules, X, W, and Z are O and Y is S.
  • n is 1, and R 2 and R 6 are taken together to form a ring containing six atoms and R 4 and R 5 are taken together to form a ring containing six atoms.
  • the ring system is a trans-decalin.
  • the RNAi agent delivery module of this subset can include a compound of Formula (Y-1):
  • the functional group can be, for example, a targeting group (e.g., a steroid or a carbohydrate), a reporter group (e.g., a fluorophore), or a label (an isotopically labelled moiety).
  • a targeting group e.g., a steroid or a carbohydrate
  • a reporter group e.g., a fluorophore
  • a label an isotopically labelled moiety
  • the targeting group can further include protein binding agents, endothelial cell targeting groups (e.g., RGD peptides and mimetics), cancer cell targeting groups (e.g., folate Vitamin B12, Biotin), bone cell targeting groups (e.g., bisphosphonates, polyglutamates, polyaspartates), multivalent mannose (for e.g., macrophage testing), lactose, galactose, N-acetyl-galactosamine, monoclonal antibodies, glycoproteins, lectins, melanotropin, or thyrotropin.
  • endothelial cell targeting groups e.g., RGD peptides and mimetics
  • cancer cell targeting groups e.g., folate Vitamin B12, Biotin
  • bone cell targeting groups e.g., bisphosphonates, polyglutamates, polyaspartates
  • multivalent mannose for e.g., macrophage testing
  • lactose galactose
  • the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition containing a modified iRNA agent, as described in the preceding sections, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, as described below.
  • a pharmaceutical composition including the modified iRNA agent is useful for treating a disease caused by expression of a target gene.
  • the iRNA agent of the invention is formulated as described below.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is administered in a dosage sufficient to inhibit expression of the target gene.
  • compositions of the present invention are administered in dosages sufficient to inhibit the expression or activity of the target gene.
  • Compositions containing the iRNA agent of the invention can be administered at surprisingly low dosages.
  • a maximum dosage of 5 mg iRNA agent per kilogram body weight per day may be sufficient to inhibit or completely suppress the expression or activity of the target gene.
  • a suitable dose of modified iRNA agent will be in the range of 0.001 to 500 milligrams per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 100 milligrams per kilogram, about 1 milligrams per kilogram to about 75 milligrams per kilogram, about 10 micrograms per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram).
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be administered once per day, or the iRNA agent may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day.
  • the iRNA agent contained in each sub-dose must be correspondingly smaller in order to achieve the total daily dosage.
  • the dosage unit can also be compounded for delivery over several days, e.g., using a conventional sustained release formulation which provides sustained release of the iRNA agent over a several day period. Sustained release formulations are well known in the art. In this embodiment, the dosage unit contains a corresponding multiple of the daily dose.
  • treatment of a subject with a therapeutically effective amount of a composition can include a single treatment or a series of treatments.
  • Estimates of effective dosages and in vivo half-lives for the individual iRNA agent encompassed by the invention can be made using conventional methodologies or on the basis of in vivo testing using an appropriate animal model, as described elsewhere herein.
  • mouse repositories can be found at The Jackson Laboratory, Charles River Laboratories, Taconic, Harlan, Mutant Mouse Regional Resource Centers (MMRRC) National Network and at the European Mouse Mutant Archive.
  • MMRRC Mutant Mouse Regional Resource Centers
  • Such models may be used for in vivo testing of iRNA agent, as well as for determining a therapeutically effective dose.
  • compositions encompassed by the invention may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
  • oral or parenteral routes including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • the iRNA agent useful in the invention will generally be provided in the form of tablets or capsules, as a powder or granules, or as an aqueous solution or suspension.
  • Tablets for oral use may include the active ingredients mixed with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as inert diluents, disintegrating agents, binding agents, lubricating agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preservatives.
  • suitable inert diluents include sodium and calcium carbonate, sodium and calcium phosphate, and lactose, while corn starch and alginic acid are suitable disintegrating agents.
  • Binding agents may include starch and gelatin, while the lubricating agent, if present, will generally be magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc.
  • the tablets may be coated with a material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate, to delay absorption in the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Capsules for oral use include hard gelatin capsules in which the active ingredient is mixed with a solid diluent, and soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • compositions of the invention will generally be provided in sterile aqueous solutions or suspensions, buffered to an appropriate pH and isotonicity.
  • Suitable aqueous vehicles include Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride.
  • the carrier consists exclusively of an aqueous buffer.
  • “exclusively” means no auxiliary agents or encapsulating substances are present which might affect or mediate uptake of iRNA agent in the cells that harbor the target gene or virus.
  • Such substances include, for example, micellar structures, such as liposomes or capsids, as described below.
  • Aqueous suspensions according to the invention may include suspending agents such as cellulose derivatives, sodium alginate, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone and gum tragacanth, and a wetting agent such as lecithin.
  • Suitable preservatives for aqueous suspensions include ethyl and n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can also include encapsulated formulations to protect the iRNA agent against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • encapsulated formulations to protect the iRNA agent against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
  • the materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
  • Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of iRNA agent can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • iRNA agents that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • the data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosages of compositions of the invention are preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range of the iRNA agent or, when appropriate, of the polypeptide product of a target sequence (e.g., achieving a decreased concentration of the polypeptide) that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test iRNA agent which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • a target sequence e.g., achieving a decreased concentration of the polypeptide
  • the IC50 i.e., the concentration of the test iRNA agent which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms
  • levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • iRNA agents relating to the invention can be administered in combination with other known agents effective in treating viral infections and diseases.
  • the administering physician can adjust the amount and timing of iRNA agent administration on the basis of results observed using standard measures of efficacy known in the art or described herein.
  • the iRNA agent useful in the invention will generally be provided in the form of tablets or capsules, as a powder or granules, or as an aqueous solution or suspension.
  • the invention relates to a method for treating a subject having a disease or at risk of developing a disease caused by the expression of a target gene.
  • iRNA agents can act as novel therapeutic agents for controlling one or more of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders, disorders associated with bone metabolism, immune disorders, hematopoietic disorders, cardiovascular disorders, liver disorders, viral diseases, or metabolic disorders.
  • the method includes administering a pharmaceutical composition of the invention to the patient (e.g., a human), such that expression of the target gene is silenced. Because of their high efficiency and specificity, the iRNA agent of the present invention specifically target mRNA of target genes of diseased cells and tissues, as described below, and at surprisingly low dosages.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are formulated as described in the preceding section, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein.
  • genes which can be targeted for treatment include, without limitation, an oncogene (Hanahan, D. and R. A. Weinberg, Cell (2000) 100:57; and Yokota, J., Carcinogenesis (2000) 21(3):497-503); a cytokine gene (Rubinstein, M., et al., Cytokine Growth Factor Rev . (1998) 9(2):175-81); a idiotype (Id) protein gene (Benezra, R., et al., Oncogene (2001) 20(58):8334-41; Norton, J. D., J. Cell Sci . (2000) 113(22):3897-905); a prion gene (Prusiner, S.
  • the target gene may be one which is required for initiation or maintenance of the disease, or which has been identified as being associated with a higher risk of contracting the disease.
  • the iRNA agent can be brought into contact with the cells or tissue exhibiting the disease.
  • iRNA agent substantially identical to all or part of a mutated gene associated with cancer, or one expressed at high levels in tumor cells may be brought into contact with or introduced into a cancerous cell or tumor gene.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., a carcinoma, sarcoma, metastatic disorder or hematopoietic neoplastic disorder, such as a leukemia.
  • a metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of prostate, colon, lung, breast and liver origin.
  • the terms “cancer,” “hyperproliferative,” and “neoplastic” refer to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth.
  • Proliferative disorders also include hematopoietic neoplastic disorders, including diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of hematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof.
  • compositions of the present invention can also be used to treat a variety of immune disorders, in particular those associated with overexpression or aberrant expression of a gene or expression of a mutant gene.
  • hematopoietic disorders or diseases include, without limitation, autoimmune diseases (including, for example, diabetes mellitus, arthritis (including rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis), multiple sclerosis, encephalomyelitis, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosis, automimmune thyroiditis, dermatitis (including atopic dermatitis and eczematous dermatitis), psoriasis, Sjogren's Syndrome, Crohn's disease, aphthous ulcer, ulceris, conjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis, ulcerative colitis, asthma, allergic asthma, cutaneous lupus erythematosus,
  • the invention relates to methods for treating viral diseases, including but not limited to hepatitis C, hepatitis B, herpes simplex virus (HSV), HIV-AIDS, poliovirus, and smallpox virus.
  • iRNA agent of the invention are prepared as described herein to target expressed sequences of a virus, thus ameliorating viral activity and replication.
  • the iRNA agents can be used in the treatment and/or diagnosis of viral infected tissue, both animal and plant. Also, such iRNA agent can be used in the treatment of virus-associated carcinoma, such as hepatocellular cancer.
  • the iRNA agent of the present invention are useful for treating a subject having an infection or a disease associated with the replication or activity of a (+) strand RNA virus having a 3′-UTR, such as HCV.
  • the iRNA agent can act as novel therapeutic agents for inhibiting replication of the virus.
  • the method includes administering a pharmaceutical composition of the invention to the patient (e.g., a human), such that viral replication is inhibited.
  • (+) strand RNA viruses which can be targeted for inhibition include, without limitation, picomaviruses, caliciviruses, nodaviruses, coronaviruses, arteriviruses, flaviviruses, and togaviruses.
  • picomaviruses examples include enterovirus (poliovirus 1), rhinovirus (human rhinovirus 1A), hepatovirus (hepatitis A virus), cardiovirus (encephalomyocarditis virus), aphthovirus (foot-and-mouth disease virus O), and parechovirus (human echovirus 22).
  • caliciviruses include vesiculovirus (swine vesicular exanthema virus), lagovirus (rabbit hemorrhagic disease virus), “Norwalk-like viruses” (Norwalk virus), “Sapporo-like viruses” (Sapporo virus), and “hepatitis E-like viruses” (hepatitis E virus).
  • Betanodavirus (striped jack nervous necrosis virus) is the representative nodavirus.
  • Coronaviruses include coronavirus (avian infections bronchitis virus) and torovirus (Berne virus).
  • Arterivirus (equine arteritis virus) is the representative arteriviridus.
  • Togavirises include alphavirus (Sindbis virus) and rubivirus (Rubella virus).
  • the flaviviruses include flavivirus (Yellow fever virus), pestivirus (bovine diarrhea virus), and hepacivirus (hepatitis C virus).
  • the virus is hepacivirus, the hepatitis C virus.
  • the present invention encompasses the compositions and methods for treating infections and diseases caused by any (+) strand RNA virus having a 3′-UTR, regardless of the host.
  • the invention encompasses the treatment of plant diseases caused by sequiviruses, comoviruses, potyviruses, sobemovirus, luteoviruses, tombusviruses, tobavirus, tobravirus, bromoviruses, and closteroviruses.
  • compositions encompassed by the invention may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to, oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
  • oral or parenteral routes including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • the invention relates to a method for inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell or organism.
  • the method includes administering the inventive iRNA agent or a pharmaceutical composition containing the iRNA agent to a cell or an organism, such as a mammal, such that expression of the target gene is silenced.
  • the iRNA agent of the present invention effectively inhibit expression or activity of target genes at surprisingly low dosages.
  • Compositions and methods for inhibiting the expression of a target gene using iRNA agent can be performed as described in the preceding sections, particularly Sections 4 and 5.
  • a pharmaceutical composition containing the iRNA agent may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • the methods for inhibiting the expression of a target gene can be applied to any gene one wishes to silence, thereby specifically inhibiting its expression, provided the cell or organism in which the target gene is expressed includes the cellular machinery which effects RNA interference.
  • genes which can be targeted for silencing include, without limitation, developmental genes including but not limited to adhesion molecules, cyclin kinase inhibitors, Wnt family members, Pax family members, Winged helix family members, Hox family members, cytokines/lymphokines and their receptors, growth/differentiation factors and their receptors, and neurotransmitters and their receptors; (2) oncogenes including but not limited to ABL1, BCL1, BCL2, BCL6, CBFA2, CBL, CSFIR, ERBA, ERBB, EBRB2, ETS1, ETS1, ETV6, FGR, FOS, FYN, HCR, HRAS, JUN, KRAS, LCK, LYN, MDM2, MLL, MYB, MYC, MYCL1,
  • the iRNA agent of the present invention are useful in a wide variety of in vitro applications.
  • Such in vitro applications include, for example, scientific and commercial research (e.g., elucidation of physiological pathways, drug discovery and development), and medical and veterinary diagnostics.
  • the method involves the introduction of the iRNA agent into a cell using known techniques (e.g., absorption through cellular processes, or by auxiliary agents or devices, such as electroporation and lipofection), then maintaining the cell for a time sufficient to obtain degradation of an mRNA transcript of the target gene.
  • the invention relates to methods for identifying iRNA agent having increased stability in biological tissues and fluids such as serum.
  • iRNA agent having increased stability have enhanced resistance to degradation, e.g., by chemicals or nucleases (particularly endonucleases) which normally degrade RNA molecules.
  • Methods for detecting increases in nucleic acid stability are well known in the art. Any assay capable of measuring or detecting differences between a test iRNA agent and a control iRNA agent in any measurable physical parameter may be suitable for use in the methods of the present invention.
  • the stability of a particular iRNA agent can be evaluated indirectly by observing or measuring a property associated with the expression of the gene.
  • the relative stability of an iRNA agent can be determined by observing or detecting (1) an absence or observable decrease in the level of the protein encoded by the target gene, (2) an absence or observable decrease in the level of mRNA product from the target gene, and (3) a change or loss in phenotype associated with expression of the target gene.
  • the stability of an iRNA agent may be evaluated based on the degree of the inhibition of expression or function of the target gene, which in turn may be assessed based on a change in the disease condition of the patient, such as reduction in symptoms, remission, or a change in disease state.
  • the method includes preparing an iRNA agent as described above (e.g., through chemical synthesis), incubating the iRNA agent with a biological sample, then analyzing and identifying those iRNA agent that exhibit an increased stability as compared to a control iRNA agent.
  • iRNA agent is produced in vitro by mixing/annealing complementary single-stranded RNA strands, preferably in a molar ratio of at least about 3:7, more preferably in a molar ratio of about 4:6, and most preferably in essentially equal molar amounts (e.g., a molar ratio of about 5:5).
  • the single-stranded RNA strands are denatured prior to mixing/annealing, and the buffer in which the mixing/annealing reaction takes place contains a salt, preferably potassium chloride.
  • Single-stranded RNA strands may be synthesized by solid phase synthesis using, for example, an Expedite 8909 synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, Applera Kunststoff GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany), as described above.
  • iRNA agent are incubated with a biological sample under the conditions sufficient or optimal for enzymatic function. After incubating with a biological sample, the stability of the iRNA agent is analyzed by means conventional in the art, for example using RNA gel electrophoresis as exemplified herein.
  • the iRNA agent may be incubated at a concentration of 1-10 ⁇ M, preferably 2-8 ⁇ M, more preferably 3-6 ⁇ M, and most preferably 4-5 ⁇ M.
  • the incubation temperature is preferably between 25° C. and 45° C., more preferably between 35° C. and 40° C., and most preferably about 37° C.
  • the biological sample used in the incubation step may be derived from tissues, cells, biological fluids or isolates thereof.
  • the biological sample may be isolated from a subject, such as a whole organism or a subset of its tissues or cells.
  • the biological sample may also be a component part of the subject, such as a body fluid, including but not limited to blood, serum, plasma, mucus, lymphatic fluid, synovial fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, saliva, amniotic fluid, amniotic cord blood, urine, vaginal fluid and semen.
  • the biological sample is a serum derived from a blood sample of a subject.
  • the subject is preferably a mammal, more preferably a human or a mouse.
  • the method includes selecting an iRNA agent having increased stability by measuring the mRNA and/or protein expression levels of a target gene in a cell following introduction of the iRNA agent.
  • an iRNA agent of the invention inhibits expression of a target gene in a cell, and thus the method includes selecting an iRNA agent that induces a measurable reduction in expression of a target gene as compared to a control iRNA agent.
  • Assays that measure gene expression by monitoring RNA and/or protein levels can be performed within about 24 hours following uptake of the iRNA agent by the cell.
  • RNA levels can be measured by Northern blot techniques, RNAse Protection Assays, or Quality Control-PCR (QC-PCR) (including quantitative reverse transcription coupled PCR (RT-PCR)) and analogous methods known in the art.
  • Protein levels can be assayed, for example, by Western blot techniques, flow cytometry, or reporter gene expression (e.g., expression of a fluorescent reporter protein, such as green fluorescent protein (GFP)).
  • RNA and/or protein levels resulting from target gene expression can be measured at regular time intervals following introduction of the test iRNA agent, and the levels are compared to those following introduction of a control iRNA agent into cells.
  • a control iRNA agent can be a nonsensical iRNA agent (i.e., an iRNA agent having a scrambled sequence that does not target any nucleotide sequence in the subject), an iRNA agent that can target a gene not present in the subject (e.g., a luciferase gene, when the iRNA agent is tested in human cells), or an iRNA agent otherwise previously shown to be ineffective at silencing the target gene.
  • the mRNA and protein levels of the test sample and the control sample can be compared.
  • the test iRNA agent is selected as having increased stability when there is a measurable reduction in expression levels following absorption of the test iRNA agent as compared to the control iRNA agent.
  • mRNA and protein measurements can be made using any art-recognized technique (see, e.g., Chiang, M. Y., et al., J. Biol Chem . (1991) 266:18162-71; Fisher, T, et al., Nucl. Acids Res . (1993) 21:3857; and Chen et al., J. Biol. Chem . (1996) 271:28259).
  • an iRNA agent composition of the invention to inhibit gene expression can be measured using a variety of techniques known in the art. For example, Northern blot analysis can be used to measure the presence of RNA encoding a target protein. The level of the specific mRNA produced by the target gene can be measured, e.g., using RT-PCR. Because iRNA agent directs the sequence-specific degradation of endogenous mRNA through RNAi, the selection methods of the invention encompass any technique that is capable of detecting a measurable reduction in the target RNA. In yet another example, Western blots can be used to measure the amount of target protein present. In still another embodiment, a phenotype influenced by the amount of the protein can be detected. Techniques for performing Western blots are well known in the art (see, e.g., Chen, et al., J. Biol. Chem . (1996) 271:28259).
  • the target gene When the target gene is to be silenced by an iRNA agent that targets a promoter sequence of the target gene, the target gene can be fused to a reporter gene, and reporter gene expression (e.g., transcription and/or translation) can be monitored.
  • reporter gene expression e.g., transcription and/or translation
  • a portion of the target gene e.g., a portion including the target sequence
  • a reporter gene By monitoring a change in the expression of the reporter gene in the presence of the iRNA agent, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of the iRNA agent in inhibiting the expression of the reporter gene.
  • the expression levels of the reporter gene in the presence of the test iRNA agent versus a control iRNA agent are then compared.
  • the test iRNA agent is selected as having increased stability when there is a measurable reduction in expression levels of the reporter gene as compared to the control iRNA agent.
  • reporter genes useful for use in the present invention include, without limitation, those coding for luciferase, GFP, chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (CAT), ⁇ -galactosidase, and alkaline phosphatase. Suitable reporter genes are described, for example, in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , John Wiley & Sons, New York (Ausubel, F.
  • siRNA-based drugs can be targeted to specific cells.
  • Targeting moieties can be conjugated to siRNAs through covalent or noncovalent approaches.
  • a targeting moiety can be a cationic carrier molecule, such as a PEI polymers or PAMAM dendrimer, both of which have been demonstrated to be effective gene delivery agents.
  • Inclusion of a water-soluble unit on a targeting moiety has also been shown to increase the bioavailability, especially for use in oral delivery.
  • Incorporation of a lipophilic group on a targeting moiety may also increase membrane permeability.
  • siRNA-based drugs, including the targeting moiety are nontoxic and nonimmunogenic.
  • a targeting unit may be necessary to increase the specificity in delivery. Further, if the targeting moiety (or moieties) has multiple recognition (or binding) sites, the moiety should have conformational flexibility, yet be stable enough to maintain its orientation. The number of synthetic steps and the cost of synthesis are also preferably minimized.
  • Cationic porphyrins have good water-solubility while being lipophilic with the central porphyrin moiety, which serves as a chromophore in itself.
  • the cationic porphyrins are known to be low in toxicity, and can be prepared in a few synthetic steps from a wide variety of commercial porphyrin derivatives. Although there are some exceptional cases, earlier reports proposed that there are three types of binding modes in the porphyrin-DNA duplex: (i) intercalation, (ii) outside binding without self-stacking, and (iii) outside binding with self-stacking (Fiel, R. J. J. Biomol. Struct. Dyn. 1989, 6(6), 1259-1274).
  • the binding mode of a specific porphyrin depends on its effective thickness, typically resulting from the peripheral substitution pattern and the type of the central metal ion.
  • Commercial compounds 1 and 2 are the well-studied cationic porphyrins which are proven to deliver an oligodeoxynucleotide the gene into the nucleus (Benimetskaya, et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 1998, 26, 5310-531).
  • the structure 5 is proposed as a potential siRNA delivery vehicle.
  • This model compound combines several major factors (i.e., cationic porphyrin, polyethylene glycol for water-solubility, conformational flexibility, biocompatibility, and carbohydrate dendrons for targeting) for siRNA delivery purposes.
  • Target Design Following the model compound 6 synthesized and studied by Biessen and coworkers, two target molecules, 7 and 8, were designed by modifying the central branching unit and adding a primary and secondary alcohol to the steroid for the covalent attachment of the oligonucleotide and a solid support.
  • the main factors to our carrier design were the multivalent sugar unit (e.g., GalNAc) for targeting and the steroid unit, where these two groups were connected through a flexible linker.
  • Commercially available chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA) has two secondary alcohols in its scaffold.
  • One of the secondary alcohols can be further modified to a primary alcohol protected with a dimethoxytrityl (DMT) group for the automated oligonucleotide synthesis on a solid support.
  • DMT dimethoxytrityl
  • Structures 7 and 8 only differ in the type of branching unit (trihydroxybenzyl and GalNAc, respectively) for the multivalent sugar attachment.
  • GalNAc has been used for liver cell targeting and mannose has been used for cancer cell targeting.
  • these sugars are not limited to these uses.
  • Synthesis of the Trivalent Linker 14 Synthesis of compound 7 started from the preparation of the middle spacer unit (Scheme 1). Protection of diol 9 using stoichiometric amount of t-butyldiphenylsilyl chloride (TBDPSCl) afforded the desired mono-silylated product 10 in a relatively low yield (43%) along with the di-silylated compound and the unreacted starting material. The alcohol 10 was then tosylated and iodinated to produce 12. Next step was the triple etherification of methyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate 13 with a slightly more than three equivalents of 12 under a basic condition using cesium carbonate (Cs 2 CO 3 ) in DMF at 50° C.
  • Cs 2 CO 3 cesium carbonate
  • iodides are used instead of bromides or chlorides to avoid heating at higher temperatures (i.e., >100° C.).
  • Cs 2 CO 3 is more ionizable than potassium carbonate (K 2 CO 3 ), but has the drawback of being more hygroscopic.
  • 1 H NMR analysis indicated that the isolated product was the dialkylated species 33 substituted at 3,4-positions instead of trialkylated 14. This wa evidenced by the two small doublets around 6.5 ppm resulting from two different ortho-protons.
  • the peak corresponding to the mass of the dehydrated compound 62 was found in the form of a sodium adduct which was in the similar region (i.e., MW 409) as the contaminant.
  • the dehydrated species was again found as a major compound by mass spectra, but in lesser amounts when lithocholic acid 44 was used for the esterification reaction under the same condition.
  • the reaction was quenched by pouring into a mixture of water (100 mL) and chloroform (70 mL), separated organic layer, and the aqueous layer was further extracted with chloroform (100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concentrated. The crude product was chromatographed (SiO 2 , gradient, hexane/EtOAc 5:1 to 2:1) to give 1.08 g (1.85 mmol, 75%) of 11 as a clear colorless oil.
  • reaction was quenched by carefully neutralizing to pH 7 using a pH paper, evaporated the solvent to dryness, added DMF (3 mL), sonicated, and filtered through a pipet-size size exclusion chromatography (BIO-RAD, Bio Beads S-X1, DMF). Solvent was removed from the filtrate, and chromatographed (SiO 2 , gradient, CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH 5:1 to 3:2), filtered again through a pipet-size size exclusion chromatography (BIO-RAD, Bio Beads S-X1, DMF) to remove any dissolved silica gel, and concentrated to give 596 mg (2.40 mmol, 36%) of 42 as a yellowish oil.
  • BIO-RAD Bio Beads S-X1, DMF
  • Methyl 3 ⁇ -(t-butyldiphenylsilyloxy)-7 ⁇ -hydroxycholan-24-oate (56).
  • a mixture of 25 (950 mg, 2.34 mmol) and imidazole (396 mg, 5.81 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of DMF.
  • TBDPSCl (0.74 mL, 2.79 mmol) was added to the solution dropwise over a 30 min-period using a syringe. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Botany (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
  • Apparatus For Disinfection Or Sterilisation (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to iRNA agents, which preferably include a monomer in which the ribose moiety has been replaced by a moiety other than ribose. The inclusion of such a monomer can allow for modulation of a property of the iRNA agent into which it is incorporated, e.g., by using the non-ribose moiety as a point to which a ligand or other entity, e.g., a carbohydrate; or a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate. is directly, or indirectly, tethered. The invention also relates to methods of making and using such modified iRNA agents.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of International Application No. PCT/US2004/011829, filed on Apr. 16, 2004, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/493,986, filed on Aug. 8, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/494,597, filed on Aug. 11, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/506,341, filed on Sep. 26, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/518,453, filed on Nov. 7, 2003;U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/463, 772, filed on Apr. 17, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/465,802, filed on Apr. 25, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/469,612, filed on May 9, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/510,246, filed on Oct. 9, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/510,318, filed on Oct. 10, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/503,414, filed on Sep. 15, 2003; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/465,665, filed on Apr. 25, 2003; International Application No.: PCT/US04/07070, filed on Mar. 8, 2004; International Application No.: PCT/US2004/10586, filed on Apr. 5, 2004; International Application No.: PCT/US2004/11255, filed on Apr. 9, 2004; and International Application No.: PCT/US2004/011822, filed on Apr. 16, 2004. The contents of all of these prior applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
    • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The invention relates to iRNA agents, which preferably include a monomer in which the ribose moiety has been replaced by a moiety other than ribose. The inclusion of such a monomer can allow for modulation of a property of the iRNA agent into which it is incorporated, e.g., by using the non-ribose moiety as a point to which a ligand or other entity, e.g., a carbohydrate; or a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate. is directly, or indirectly, tethered. The invention also relates to methods of making and using such modified iRNA agents.
    • BACKGROUND
  • Many diseases (e.g., cancers, hematopoietic disorders, endocrine disorders, and immune disorders) arise from the abnormal expression or activity of a particular gene or group of genes. Similarly, disease can result through expression of a mutant form of protein, as well as from expression of viral genes that have been integrated into the genome of their host. The therapeutic benefits of being able to selectively silence these abnormal or foreign genes are obvious.
  • Double-stranded RNA molecules (dsRNA) can block gene expression by virtue of a highly conserved regulatory mechanism known as RNA interference (RNAi). Briefly, the RNA III Dicer enzyme processes dsRNA into small interfering RNA (siRNA) of approximately 22 nucleotides. One strand of the siRNA (the “antisense strand”) then serves as a guide sequence to induce cleavage of messenger RNAs (mRNAs) including a nucleotide sequence which is at least partially complementary to the sequence of the antisense strand by an RNA-induced silencing complex RISC (Hammond, S. M., et al., Nature (2000) 404:293-296). The antisense strand is not cleaved or otherwise degraded in this process, and the RISC including the antisense strand can subsequently effect the cleavage of further mRNAs.
    • SUMMARY
  • The inventor has discovered, inter alia, that attachment of a saccharide moiety to an iRNA agent can optimize one or more properties of the iRNA agent. In many cases, the saccharide will be attached to a modified subunit of the iRNA agent. E.g., the ribose sugar of one or more ribonucleotide subunits of an iRNA agent can be replaced with another moiety, e.g., a non-carbohydrate (preferably cyclic) carrier to which is attached a saccharide. A ribonucleotide subunit in which the ribose sugar of the subunit has been so replaced is referred to herein as a ribose replacement modification subunit (RRMS). A cyclic carrier may be a carbocyclic ring system, i.e., all ring atoms are carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic ring system, i.e., one or more ring atoms may be a heteroatom, e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur. The cyclic carrier may be a monocyclic ring system, or may contain two or more rings, e.g. fused rings. The cyclic carrier may be a fully saturated ring system, or it may contain one or more double bonds.
  • The carriers further include (i) at least two “backbone attachment points” and (ii) at least one “tethering attachment point.” A “backbone attachment point” as used herein refers to a functional group, e.g. a hydroxyl group, or generally, a bond available for, and that is suitable for incorporation of the carrier into the backbone, e.g., the phosphate, or modified phosphate, e.g., sulfur containing, backbone, of a ribonucleic acid. A “tethering attachment point” in some embodiments refers to a constituent ring atom of the cyclic carrier, e.g., a carbon atom or a heteroatom (distinct from an atom which provides a backbone attachment point), that connects a selected moiety. The moiety can be, e.g., a ligand, e.g., a targeting or delivery moiety, or a moiety which alters a physical property. One of the most preferred moieties is a moiety which promotes entry into a cell, e.g., a lipophilic moiety, e.g., cholesterol. While not wishing to be bound by theory it is believed the attachment of a lipohilic agent increases the lipophilicity of an iRNA agent. Optionally, the selected moiety is connected by an intervening tether to the cyclic carrier. Thus, it will often include a functional group, e.g., an amino group, or generally, provide a bond, that is suitable for incorporation or tethering of another chemical entity, e.g., a ligand to the constituent ring.
  • Incorporation of one or more RRMSs described herein into an RNA agent, e.g., an iRNA agent, particularly when tethered to an appropriate entity, can confer one or more new properties to the RNA agent and/or alter, enhance or modulate one or more existing properties in the RNA molecule. E.g., it can alter one or more of lipophilicity or nuclease resistance. Incorporation of one or more RRMSs described herein into an iRNA agent can, particularly when the RRMS is tethered to an appropriate entity, modulate, e.g., increase, binding affinity of an iRNA agent to a target mRNA, change the geometry of the duplex form of the iRNA agent, alter distribution or target the iRNA agent to a particular part of the body, or modify the interaction with nucleic acid binding proteins (e.g., during RISC formation and strand separation).
  • Accordingly, in one aspect, the invention features, an iRNA agent preferably comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having a formula (I) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00001
      • wherein:
      • X is N(CO)R7, NR7 or CH2;
      • Y is NR8, O, S, CR9R10, or absent;
      • Z is CR11R12 or absent;
      • Each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is, independently, H, ORa, ORb, (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb, provided that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORa or ORb and that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb (when the RRMS is terminal, one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 will include Ra and one will include Rb; when the RRMSS is internal, two of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 will each include an Rb); further provided that preferably ORa may only be present with (CH2)nORb and (CH2)nORa may only be present with ORb;
      • Each of R5, R6, R11, and R12 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 R13, or C(O)NHR7; or R5 and R11 together are C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with R14;
      • R7 can be a ligand, e.g., R7 can be Rd, or R7 can be a ligand tethered indirectly to the carrier, e.g., through a tethering moiety, e.g., C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NRcRd; or C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NHC(O)Rd;
      • R8 is C1-C6 alkyl;
      • R13 is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy, or halo;
      • R14 is NRcR7;
      • Ra is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00002
      • Rb is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00003
      • Each of A and C is, independently, O or S;
      • B is OH, O−, or
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00004
  • Rc is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
      • Rd is a carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); or a steroid radical, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); and
      • n is 1-4.
  • In another aspect, this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first subunit in which Rd is a carbohydrate radical, and a second subunit in which Rd is a steroid radical, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical. The first and second subunits can be incorporated into the same strand or different ones. Rd in the first subunit can be a galactose radical. Rd in the first subunit can be an N-acetylgalactoseamine radical. Rd in the first subunit can be mannose radical. Rd in the second subunit can be a steroid radical. Rd in the second subunit can be a cholesterol radical. Rd in the second subunit is a cholanic acid radical.
  • In a further aspect, this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first subunit and a second subunit in which Rd is a carbohydrate radical in both the first and second subunits. Rd can be the same carbohydrate radical in the first and second subunit. The carbohydrate radical in the first subunit can be different from the carbohydrate radical in the second subunit.
  • In general, when more than one ligand is present on an iRNA agent, the ligands can be distributed as desired, e.g., the ligands can be attached to subunits on the same strand or different ones. Some or all of the ligands can all be the same moiety. Alternatively, all of the ligands can be different moieties.
  • In one aspect, this invention relates to an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit is derivatized with a porphyrin, which preferably enhances entrance into a cell. The porphyrin further can have a carbohydrate radical; or a steroid radical optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate radical.
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the following features.
  • The iRNA agent can be 21 nucleotides in length and there can be a duplex region of about 19 pairs.
  • The iRNA agent can include a duplex region between 17 and 23 pairs in length.
  • R1 can be CH2ORa and R3 can be ORb; or R1 can be CH2ORa and R9 can be ORb; or R1 can be CH2ORa and R2 can be ORb.
  • R1 can be CH2ORb and R3 can be ORb; or R1 can be CH2ORb and R9 can be ORb; or R1 can be CH2ORb and R2 can be ORb; or R1 can be CH2ORb and R3 can be ORa; or R1 can be CH2ORband R9 can be ORa; or R1 can be CH2ORb and R2 can be ORa.
  • R1 can be ORa and R3 can be CH2ORb; or R1 can be ORa and R9 can be CH2ORb; or R1 can be ORa and R2 can be CH2ORb.
  • R1 can be ORb and R3 can be CH2ORb; or R1 can be ORb and R9 can be CH2ORb; or R1 can be ORb and R2 can be CH2ORb; or R1 can be ORb and R3 can be CH2ORa; or R1 can be ORb and R9 can be CH2ORa; or R1 can be ORb and R2 can be CH2ORa.
  • R3 can be CH2ORa and R9 can be ORb; or R3 can be CH2ORaand R4 can be ORb.
  • R3 can be CH2ORb and R9 can be ORb; or R3 can be CH2ORb and R4 can be ORb; or R3 can be CH2ORb and R9 can be ORa; or R3 can be CH2ORb and R4 can be ORa.
  • R3 can be ORb and R9 can be CH2ORa; or R3 can be ORb and R4 can be CH2ORa; or R3 can be ORb and R9 can be CH2ORb; or R3 can be ORb and R4 can be CH2ORb.
  • R3 can be ORa and R9 can be CH2ORb; or R3 can be ORa and R4 can be CH2ORb.
  • R9 can be CH2ORa and R10 can be ORb.
  • R9 can be CH2ORb and R10 can be ORb; or R9 can be CH2ORb and R10 can be ORa.
  • In a preferred embodiment the ribose is replaced with a pyrroline scaffold or with a 4-hydroxyproline-derived scaffold, and X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is absent.
  • R1 and R3 can be cis or R1 and R3 can be trans.
  • n can be 1.
  • A can be O or S.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORa and R3 can be ORb.
  • R7 can be (CH2)nNHRd or (CH2)5NHRd.
  • R1 can be ORb and R3 can be (CH2)nORb; or R1 can be ORb and R3 can be (CH2)nORa; or R1 can be ORa and R3 can be (CH2)nORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORa.
  • R1 and R9 can be cis or R1 and R9 can be trans.
  • R1 can be ORa and R9 can be (CH2)nORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORa and R9 can be ORb; or R1 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORb; or R1 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORa.
  • R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORa; or R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORb; or R3 can be (CH2)nORa and R9 can be ORb; or R3 can be ORa and R9 can be (CH2)nORb; R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORb; or R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORa.
  • R3 and R9 can be cis or R3 and R9 can be trans.
  • In other preferred embodiments the ribose is replaced with a piperidine scaffold, and X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is CR11R12.
  • R9 can be (CH2)nORb and R10 can be ORa.
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R9 can be (CH2)nORb and R10 can be ORb; or R9 can be (CH2)nORa and R10 can be ORb.
  • A can be O or S.
  • R7 can be (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHRd.
  • R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R4 can be ORa; or R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R4 can be ORb; or
  • R3 can be (CH2)nORa and R4 can be ORb.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R2 can be ORa; or R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R2 can be ORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORa and R2 can be ORb.
  • R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORa.
  • R3 and R9 can be cis, or R3 and R9 can be trans.
  • R3 can be (CH2)nORb and R9 can be ORb; or R3 can be (CH2)nOR1 and R9 can be ORa; or R3 can be (CH2)nORa and R9 can be ORb.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORa.
  • R1 and R3 can be cis, or R1 and R3 can be trans.
  • R3 can be ORa and R9 can be (CH2)nORb.
  • R1 can be ORa and R3 can be (CH2)nORa.
  • In other preferred embodiments the ribose is replaced with a piperazine scaffold, and X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is NR8, and Z is CR11R12.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORa.
  • R1 and R3 can be cis or R1 and R3 can be trans.
  • n can be 1.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORb; or R1 can be (CH2)nORa and R3 can be ORb.
  • A can be O or S, preferably S.
  • R7 can be (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHRd. Rd can be chosen from the group of a folic acid radical; a cholesterol radical; a carbohydrate radical; a vitamin A radical; a vitamin E radical; a vitamin K radical. Preferably, Rd is a cholesterol radical.
  • R8 can be CH3.
  • R1 can be ORa and R3 can be (CH2)nORb.
  • In other preferred embodiments the ribose is replaced with a morpholino scaffold, and X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is O, and Z is CR11R12.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORa.
  • R1 and R3 can be cis, or R1 and R3 can be trans.
  • n can be 1.
  • R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORb; of R1 can be (CH2)nORa and R3 can be ORb.
  • A can be O or S.
  • R7 can be (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHRd.
      • R8 can be CH3.
  • R1 can be ORa and R3 can be (CH2)nORb.
  • In other preferred embodiments the ribose is replaced with a decalin scaffold, and X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; and Z is CR11R12; and R5 and R11 together are C6 cycloalkyl.
  • R6 can be C(O)NHR7.
  • R12 can be hydrogen.
  • R6 and R2 can be trans.
  • R3 can be ORa and R9 can be (CH2)nORb.
  • R3 and R9 can be cis, or R3 and R9 can be trans.
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORb; or R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORa.
  • A can be Q or S.
  • R7 can be (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHRd.
  • In other preferred embodiments the ribose is replaced with a decalin/indane scafold, e.g., X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; and Z is CR11R12; and R5 and R11 together are C5 cycloalkyl.
  • R6 can be CH3.
  • R12 can be hydrogen.
  • R11 and R12 can be trans.
  • R3 can be ORa and R9 can be (CH2)nORb.
  • R3 and R9 can be cis, or R3 and R9 can be trans.
  • n can be 1 or 2.
  • R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORa; or R3 can be ORb and R9 can be (CH2)nORa.
  • A can be O or S.
  • R14 can be N(CH3)R7. R7 can be (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHRd.
  • In another aspect, this invention features an iRNA agent comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one one subunit having a formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00005
      • X is N(CO)R7 or NR7;
      • Each of R1 and R2 is, independently, ORa, ORb, (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb, provided that one of R1 and R2 is ORa or ORb and the other is (CH2)nORa or (CH2)nORb (when the RRMS is terminal, one of R1 or R2 will include Ra and one will include Rb; when the RRMSS is internal, both R1 and R2 will each include an Rb); further provided that preferably ORa may only be present with (CH2)nORb and (CH2)nORa may only be present with ORb;
      • R7 is C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NRcRd;
      • R8 is C1-C6 alkyl;
      • R13 is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy, or halo;
      • R14 is NRcR7;
      • Ra is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00006
      • Rb is
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00007
      • Each of A and C is, independently, O or S;
      • B is OH, O−, or
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00008
      • Rc is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
      • Rd is a carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); or a steroid radical, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); and
      • n is 1-4.
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the features described above.
  • In a further aspect, this invention features an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having a formula (I) or formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of said strands.
  • In one aspect, this invention features an iRNA agent having a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least two subunits having a formula (I) and/or formula (II) are incorporated into at least one of said strands.
  • In another aspect, this invention provides a method of making an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands. The method includes contacting the first strand with the second strand.
  • In a further aspect, this invention provides a method of modulating expression of a target gene, the method includes administering an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands. to a subject.
  • In one aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition having an iRNA agent described herein having a first strand and a second strand in which at least one subunit of formula (I) and/or (II) is incorporated in the strands and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • RRMSs described herein may be incorporated into any double-stranded RNA-like molecule described herein, e.g., an iRNA agent. An iRNA agent may include a duplex comprising a hybridized sense and antisense strand, in which the antisense strand and/or the sense strand may include one or more of the RRMSs described herein. An RRMS can be introduced at one or more points in one or both strands of a double-stranded iRNA agent. An RRMS can be placed at or near (within 1, 2, or 3 positions) of the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand or at near (within 2 or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In some embodiments it is preferred to not have an RRMS at or near (within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 5′ end of the antisense strand. An RRMS can be internal, and will preferably be positioned in regions not critical for antisense binding to the target.
  • In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the sense strand. In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and an RRMS at the 5′ end of the sense strand, in which both ligands are located at the same end of the iRNA agent.
  • In certain embodiments, two ligands are tethered, preferably, one on each strand and are hydrophobic moieties. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that pairing of the hydrophobic ligands can stabilize the iRNA agent via intermolecular van der Waals interactions.
  • In an embodiment, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at (or within 1, 2, or 3 positions of) the 3′ end of the antisense strand and an RRMS at the 5′ end of the sense strand, in which both RRMSs may share the same ligand (e.g., cholic acid) via connection of their individual tethers to separate positions on the ligand. A ligand shared between two proximal RRMSs is referred to herein as a “hairpin ligand.”
  • In other embodiments, an iRNA agent may have an RRMS at the 3′ end of the sense strand and an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand. An iRNA agent may have an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand; or may have an RRMS at an internal position of the antisense strand; or may have an RRMS at an internal position of the sense strand and an RRMS at an internal position of the antisense strand.
  • In preferred embodiments the iRNA agent includes a first and second sequences, which are preferably two separate molecules as opposed to two sequences located on the same strand, have sufficient complementarity to each other to hybridize (and thereby form a duplex region), e.g., under physiological conditions, e.g., under physiological conditions but not in contact with a helicase or other unwinding enzyme.
  • It is preferred that the first and second sequences be chosen such that the ds iRNA agent includes a single strand or unpaired region at one or both ends of the molecule. Thus, a ds iRNA agent contains first and second sequences, preferable paired to contain an overhang, e.g., one or two 5′ or 3′ overhangs but preferably a 3′ overhang of 2-3 nucleotides. Most embodiments will have a 3′ overhang. Preferred sRNA agents will have single-stranded overhangs, preferably 3′ overhangs, of 1 or preferably 2 or 3 nucleotides in length at each end. The overhangs can be the result of one strand being longer than the other, or the result of two strands of the same length being staggered. 5′ ends are preferably phosphorylated.
  • Other modifications to sugars, bases, or backbones described herein can be incorpoated into the iRNA agents.
  • The iRNA agents can take an architecture or structure described herein. The iRNA agents can be palindromic, or double targeting, as described herein.
  • The iRNA agents can have a sequence such that a non-cannonical or other than cannonical Watson-Crick structure is formed beween two monomers of the iRNA agent or between a strand of the iRNA agent and another sequence, e.g., a target or off-target sequence, as is described herein.
  • The iRNA agent can be selected to target any of a broad spectrum of genes, including any of the genes described herein.
  • In a preferred embodiment the iRNA agent has an architecture (architecture refers to one or more of overall length, length of a duplex region, the presence, number, location, or length of overhangs, single strand versus double strand form) described herein. E.g., the iRNA agent can be less than 30 nucleotides in length, e.g., 21-23 nucleotides. Preferably, the iRNA is 21 nucleotides in length and there is a duplex region of about 19 pairs. In one embodiment, the iRNA is 21 nucleotides in length, and the duplex region of the iRNA is 19 nucleotides. In another embodiment, the iRNA is greater than 30 nucleotides in length.
  • In some embodiment the duplex region of the iRNA agent will have, mismatches. Preferably it will have no more than 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 bases, which do not form canonical Watson-Crick pairs or which do not hybridize. Overhangs are discussed in detail elsewhere herein but are preferably about 2 nucleotides in length. The overhangs can be complementary to the gene sequences being targeted or can be other sequence. TT is a preferred overhang sequence. The first and second iRNA agent sequences can also be joined, e.g., by additional bases to form a hairpin, or by other non-base linkers.
  • In addition ot the RRMS-containing bases the iRNA agents described herein can include nuclease resistant monomers (NRMs).
  • In another aspect, the invention features an iRNA agent to which is conjugated to a carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); or a steroid radical, e.g., cholesterol, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical (e.g., mannose, galactose, or N-acetylgalactose); e.g., by conjugation to an RRMS of an iRNA agent. In a preferred embodiment, the lipophilic moiety enhances entry of the iRNA agent into a cell. In a preferred embodiment, the cell is part of an organism, tissue, or cell line, e.g., a primary cell line, immortalized cell line, or any type of cell line disclosed herein. Thus, the conjugated iRNA agent an be used to silence a target gene in an organism, e.g., a mammal, e.g., a human, or to silence a target gene in a cell line or in cells which are outside an organism.
  • The iRNA agent can have a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit having formula (I) or formula (II) is incorporated into at least one of the strands. The iRNA agent can have one or more of any of the features described herein. For example, when the subunit is of formula (I), Rd can be a carbohydrate, a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, a steroid, e.g., cholesterol, tethered to a carbohydrate; X can be N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y can be CR9R10, and Z can be absent, and R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORa; X can be N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y can be CR9R10, and Z can be CR11R12, and R9 can be (CH2)nORb and R10 can be ORa; X can be N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y can be NR8, and Z can be CR11R12, and R1 can be (CH2)nORb and R3 can be ORa; X can be CH2; Y can be CR9R10; and Z can be CR11R12, in which R6 can be C(O)NHR7; or X can be CH2; Y can be CR9R10; and Z can be CR11R12, in which R11 or R12 can be C(O)NHR7 or R5 and R11 together can be C5 or C6 cycloalkyl substituted with N(CH3)R7.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the ligands described herein can enhance entry of the iRNA agent into a hepatocyte cell.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the iRNA agent targets an exogenous gene of a genetically modified cell. An exogenous gene can be, for example, a viral or bacterial gene that derives from an organism that has invaded or infected the cell, or the exogenous gene can be any gene introduced into the cell by natural or artificial means, such as by a genetic recombination event. An iRNA agent can target a viral gene, for example, such as a hepatitis viral gene (e.g., a gene of an HAV, HBV, or HCV). Alternatively, or in addition, the iRNA agent can silence a reporter gene, such as GFP or beta galatosidase and the like. These iRNA agents can be used to silence exogenous genes in an adherent tumor cell line.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides, methods of silencing a target gene by providing an iRNA agent to which a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated. In a preferred embodiment the conjugated iRNA agent an be used to silence a target gene in an organism, e.g., a mammal, e.g., a human, or to silence a target gene in a cell line or in cells which are outside an organism. In the case of a whole organism, the method can be used to silence a gene, e.g., a gene described herein, and treat a condition mediated by the gene. In the case of use on a cell which is not part of an organism, e.g., a primary cell line, secondary cell line, tumor cell line, or transformed or immortalized cell line, the iRNA agent to which a a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated can be used to silence a gene, e.g., one described herein. Cells which are not part of a whole organism can be used in an initial screen to determine if an iRNA agent is effective in silencing a gene. A test in cells which are not part of a whole organism can be followed by testing the iRNA agent in a whole animal. In preferred embodiments, the iRNA agent which is conjugated to a a carbohydrate, a steroid, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate is conjugated is administered to an organism, or contacted with a cell which is not part of an organism, in the absence of (or in a reduced amount of) other reagents that facilitate or enhance delivery, e.g., a compound which enhances transit through the cell membrane. (A reduced amount can be an amount of such reagent which is reduced in comparison to what would be needed to get an equal amount of nonconjugated iRNA agent into the target cell). E.g., the iRNA agent which is conjugated to a lipophilic moiety is administered to an organism, or contacted with a cell which is not part of an organism, in the absence (or reduced amount) of: an additional lipophilic moiety; a transfection agent, e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent; a transfecting agent such as Lipofectamine™ (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.), Lipofectamine 2000™, TransIT-TKO™ (Mirus, Madison, Wis.), FuGENE 6 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), polyethylenimine, X-tremeGENE Q2 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), DOTAP, DOSPER, Metafectene™ (Biontex, Munich, Germany), and the like.
  • In a preferred embodiment the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism. In another aspect, the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • An iRNA agent to which a lipophilic moiety is attached can target any gene described herein and can be delivered to any cell type described herein, e.g., a cell type in an organism, tissue, or cell line. Delivery of the iRNA agent can be in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism, or in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides compositions of iRNA agents described herein, and in particular compositions of an iRNA agent to which a lipophilic moiety is conjugated, e.g., a lipophilic conjugated iRNA agent described herein. In a preferred embodiment the composition is a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
  • In preferred embodiments, the composition, e.g., pharmaceutically acceptable composition, is free of, has a reduced amount of, or is essentially free of other reagents that facilitate or enhance delivery, e.g., compounds which enhance transit through the cell membrane. (A reduced amount can be an amount of such reagent which is reduced in comparison to what would be needed to get an equal amount of nonconjugated iRNA agent into the target cell). E.g., the composition is free of, has a reduced amount of, or is essentially free of: an additional lipophilic moiety; a transfection agent, e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent; a transfecting agent such as Lipofectamine™ (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.), Lipofectamine 2000™, TransIT-TKO™ (Mirus, Madison, Wis.), FuGENE 6 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), polyethylenimine, X-tremeGENE Q2 (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.), DOTAP, DOSPER, Metafectene™ (Biontex, Munich, Germany), and the like.
  • In a preferred embodiment the composition is suitable for delivery to a cell in vivo, e.g., to a cell in an organism. In another aspect, the iRNA agent is suitable for delivery to a cell in vitro, e.g., to a cell in a cell line.
  • The RRMS-containing iRNA agents can be used in any of the methods described herein, e.g., to target any of the genes described herein or to treat any of the disorders described herein. They can be incorporated into any of the formulations, modes of delivery, delivery modalities, kits or preparations, e.g., pharmaceutical preparations, described herein. E.g, a kit which inlcudes one or more of the iRNA aents described herein, a sterile container in which the iRNA agent is discolsed, and instructions for use.
  • The methods and compositions of the invention, e.g., the RRSM-containing iRNA agents described herein, can be used with any of the iRNA agents described herein. In addition, the methods and compositions of the invention can be used for the treatment of any disease or disorder described herein, and for the treatment of any subject, e.g., any animal, any mammal, such as any human.
  • The methods and compositions of the invention, e.g., the the RRMS-containing iRNA agents described herein, can be used with any dosage and/or formulation described herein, as well as with any route of administration described herein.
  • The non-ribose scaffolds, as well as monomers and dimers of the RRMSs described herein are within the invention In one aspect, an iRNA agent includes a carbohydrate modification, e.g., galactose and/or analogues thereof. These agents target, in particular, the parenchymal cells of the liver (see Table 1). In one embodiment, the iRNA agent includes more than one galactose moiety, preferably two or three. In another embodiment, the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) lactose molecules (lactose is a glucose coupled to a galactose). In another embodiment, the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) N-Acetyl-Galactosamine, N-Ac-Glucosamine, or mannose (e.g., mannose-6-phosphate). In one embodiment, iRNA agents include mannose conjugates, and the iRNA agents target macrophages.
  • In one aspect, an iRNA agent includes a carbohydrate modification, e.g., galactose and/or analogues thereof. These carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agents target, in particular, the parenchymal cells of the liver (see Table 1). In one embodiment, the iRNA agent includes more than one galactose moiety, preferably two or three. In another embodiment, the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) lactose molecules (lactose is a glucose coupled to a galactose). In another embodiment, the iRNA agent includes at least one (e.g., two or three or more) N-Acetyl-Galactosamine, N-Ac-Glucosamine, or mannose (e.g., mannose-6-phosphate). In one embodiment, iRNA agents include mannose conjugates, and the iRNA agents target macrophages, e.g., macrophages in the liver.
  • In one aspect, the invention features an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification, and the presence of the carbohydrate modification can increase delivery of the iRNA agent to the liver. Thus an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification can be useful for targeting a gene for which expression is undesired in the liver. For example, an iRNA agent including a carbohydrate modification can target a nucleic acid expresses by a hepatitis virus (e.g., hepatitis C, hepatitis B, hepatitis A, hepatitis D, hepatitis E, hepatitis F, hepatitis G, or hepatitis H).
  • In a preferred embodiment, the carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a gene of the hepatitis C virus. In another embodiment, the iRNA agent that targets a gene of the hepatitis C virus can be administered to a human having or at risk for developing hepatitis, e.g., acute or chronic hepatitis, or inflammation of the liver. A human who is a candidate for treatment with a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent, e.g., an iRNA agent that targets a gene of HCV, can present symptoms indicative of HCV infection, such as jaundice, abdominal pain, liver enlargement and fatigue.
  • In one embodiment, a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets the 5′ core region of HCV. This region lies just downstream of the ribosomal toe-print straddling the initiator methionine. In another embodiment, an iRNA agent targets any one of the nonstructural proteins of HCV, such as NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, or NS5B. In another embodiment, an iRNA agent targets the E1, E2, or C gene of HCV.
  • In another embodiment, the carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a hepatitis B virus (HBV), and the iRNA agent has a sequence that is substantially similar to a sequence of a gene of HBV, e.g., the protein X (HBx) gene of HBV.
  • Carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agents can also be used to treat other liver disorders, including disorders characterized by unwanted cell proliferation, hematological disorders, metabolic disorders, and disorders characterized by inflammation. A proliferation disorder of the liver can be, for example, a benign or malignant disorder, e.g., a cancer, e.g, a hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC), hepatic metastasis, or hepatoblastoma. A hepatic hematology or inflammation disorder can be a disorder involving clotting factors, a complement-mediated inflammation or a fibrosis, for example. Metabolic diseases of the liver include dyslipidemias and irregularities in glucose regulation. In one embodiment, a liver disorder is treated by administering one or more iRNA agents that have a sequence that is substantially identical to a sequence in a gene involved in the liver disorder.
  • In one embodiment, a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent targets a nucleic acid expressed in the liver, such as an ApoB RNA, c-jun RNA, beta-catenin RNA, or glucose-6-phosphatase mRNA.
  • An iRNA that targets glucose-6-phosphatase can be administered to a subject to inhibit hepatic glucose production, e.g., for the treatment of glucose-metabolism-related disorders, such as diabetes, e.g., type-2-diabetes mellitus. The iRNA agent can be administered to an individual at risk for the disorder to delay onset of the disorder or a symptom of the disorder.
  • In other embodiments, a carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agent has sequence-similarity to the following genes, and the iRNA agent is useful for inhibiting hepatic glucose production. These other genes include “forkhead homologue in rhabdomyosarcoma” (FKHR); glucagon; glucagon receptor; glycogen phosphorylase; PPAR-Gamma Coactivator (PGC-1); Fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase; glucose-6-phosphate locator; glucokinase inhibitory regulatory protein; and phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK).
  • The details of one or more embodiments of the invention are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the description and drawings, and from the claims.
    • DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 a general synthetic scheme for incorporation of RRMS monomers into an oligonucleotide.
  • FIG. 2A is a list of substituents that may be present on silicon in OFG1.
  • FIG. 2B is a list of substituents that may be present on the C2′-orthoester group.
  • FIG. 3 is list of representative RRMS cyclic carriers. Panel 1 shows pyrroline-based RRMSs; panel 2 shows 3-hydroxyproline-based RRMSs; panel 3 shows piperidine-based RRMSs; panel 4 shows morpholine and piperazine-based RRMSs; and panel 5 shows decalin-based RRMSs. R1 is succinate or phosphoramidate and R2 is H or a conjugate ligand.
  • FIG. 4 is a general reaction scheme for 3′ conjugation of peptide into iRNA.
  • FIG. 5 is a general reaction scheme for 5′ conjugation of peptide into iRNA.
  • FIG. 6 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of aza-peptides.
  • FIG. 7 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of N-methyl amino acids and peptides.
  • FIG. 8 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of β-methyl amino acids and Ant and Tat peptides.
  • FIG. 9 is a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of Ant and Tat oligocarbamates.
  • FIG. 10 is a a general reaction scheme for the synthesis of Ant and Tat oligoureas.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic representation of peptide carriers.
  • Like reference symbols in the various drawings indicate like elements.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Double-stranded (dsRNA) directs the sequence-specific silencing of mRNA through a process known as RNA interference (RNAi). The process occurs in a wide variety of organisms, including mammals and other vertebrates.
  • It has been demonstrated that 21-23 nt fragments of dsRNA are sequence-specific mediators of RNA silencing, e.g., by causing RNA degradation. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it may be that a molecular signal, which may be merely the specific length of the fragments, present in these 21-23 nt fragments recruits cellular factors that mediate RNAi. Described herein are methods for preparing and administering these 21-23 nt fragments, and other iRNAs agents, and their use for specifically inactivating gene function. The use of iRNAs agents (or recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized oligonucleotides of the same or similar nature) enables the targeting of specific mRNAs for silencing in mammalian cells. In addition, longer dsRNA agent fragments can also be used, e.g., as described below.
  • Although, in mammalian cells, long dsRNAs can induce the interferon response, which is frequently deleterious, sRNAs do not trigger the interferon response, at least not to an extent that is deleterious to the cell and host. In particular, the length of the iRNA agent strands in an sRNA agent can be less than 31, 30, 28, 25, or 23 nt, e.g., sufficiently short to avoid inducing a deleterious interferon response. Thus, the administration of a composition of sRNA agent (e.g., formulated as described herein) to a mammalian cell can be used to silence expression of a target gene while circumventing the interferon response. Further, use of a discrete species of iRNA agent can be used to selectively target one allele of a target gene, e.g., in a subject heterozygous for the allele.
  • In a typical embodiment, the subject is a mammal such as a cow, horse, mouse, rat, dog, pig, goat, or a primate. The subject can be a dairy mammal (e.g., a cow, or goat) or other farmed animal (e.g., a chicken, turkey, sheep, pig, fish, shrimp). In a much preferred embodiment, the subject is a human, e.g., a normal individual or an individual that has, is diagnosed with, or is predicted to have a disease or disorder.
  • Targeting to the Liver
  • An iRNA agent containing a carbohydrate modification can be targeted to a particular cell type in the liver. Exemplary carbohydrate moieties and their associated receptors are presented in Table 1.
    TABLE 1
    Targeting agents (Ligands) and their associated receptors
    Liver Cells Ligand Receptor
    1) Parenchymal Galactose ASGP-R
    Cell (PC) (Asiologlycoprotein
    (Hepatocytes) receptor)
    Gal NAc ASPG-R
    (n-acetyl- Gal NAc Receptor
    galactosamine)
    Lactose
    Asialofetuin ASPG-r
    2) Sinusoidal Hyaluronan Hyaluronan receptor
    Endothelial Procollagen Procollagen receptor
    Cell (SEC) Negatively Scavenger receptors
    charged
    molecules
    Mannose Mannose receptors
    N-acetyl Scavenger receptors
    Glucosamine
    Immunoglobulins Fc Receptor
    LPS CD14 Receptor
    Insulin Receptor mediated transcytosis
    Transferrin Receptor mediated transcytosis
    Albumins Non-specific
    Sugar-Albumin
    conjugates
    Mannose-6- Mannose-6-phosphate receptor
    phosphate
    3) Kupffer Mannose Mannose receptors
    Cell (KC) Fucose Fucose receptors
    Albumins Non-specific
    Mannose-albumin
    conjugates

    Liver Diseases
  • Exemplary diseases and disorders that can be treated by the carbohydrate-conjugated iRNA agents described herein.
  • Disorders involving the liver include, but are not limited to, hepatic injury; jaundice and cholestasis, such as bilirubin and bile formation; hepatic failure and cirrhosis, such as cirrhosis, portal hypertension, including ascites, portosystemic shunts, and splenomegaly; infectious disorders, such as viral hepatitis, including hepatitis A-E infection and infection by other hepatitis viruses, clinicopathologic syndromes, such as the carrier state, asymptomatic infection, acute viral hepatitis, chronic viral hepatitis, and fulminant hepatitis; autoimmune hepatitis; drug- and toxin-induced liver disease, such as alcoholic liver disease; inborn errors of metabolism and pediatric liver disease, such as hemochromatosis, Wilson disease, a1-antitrypsin deficiency, and neonatal hepatitis; intrahepatic biliary tract disease, such as secondary biliary cirrhosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and anomalies of the biliary tree; circulatory disorders, such as impaired blood flow into the liver, including hepatic artery compromise and portal vein obstruction and thrombosis, impaired blood flow through the liver, including passive congestion and centrilobular necrosis and peliosis hepatis, hepatic vein outflow obstruction, including hepatic vein thrombosis (Budd-Chiari syndrome) and veno-occlusive disease; hepatic disease associated with pregnancy, such as preeclampsia and eclampsia, acute fatty liver of pregnancy, and intrehepatic cholestasis of pregnancy; hepatic complications of organ or bone marrow transplantation, such as drug toxicity after bone marrow transplantation, graft-versus-host disease and liver rejection, and nonimmunologic damage to liver allografts; tumors and tumorous conditions, such as nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.
  • An iRNA agent can also be administered to inhibit Factor V expression in the liver. Two to five percent of the United States population is heterozygous for an allele of the Factor V gene that encodes a single amino acid change at position 1961. These heterozygous individuals have a 3-8 fold increased risk of venous thrombosis, a risk that is associated with increased factor V activity. The increased activity leads to increased thrombin generation from the prothrombinase complex. An iRNA agent directed against Factor V can treat or prevent venous thrombosis or treat a human who has Factor V Leiden. The iRNA agent that targets Factor V can be also be used as a prophylaxis in patients with Factor V Leiden who undergo high-risk surgical procedures, and this prophylaxis can be an adjunct to the therapeutic use of low molecular weight (LMW) heparin prophylaxis.
  • An iRNA agent that targets Factor V can also be administered to patients with Factor V Leiden to treat deep vein thrombosis (DVT) or pulmonary embolism (PE), and this treatment can be an adjunct to therapeutic uses of heparin or coumadin. Any other disorder caused by elevated or otherwise unwanted levels of Factor V protein can be treated by administering an iRNA agent against Factor V.
  • iRNA agents of the invention can be targeted to any gene whose overexpression is associated with the liver diseases.
  • Ligand-Conjugated Monomer Subunits and Monomers for Oligonucleotide Synthesis
  • Definitions
  • The term “halo” refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • The term “alkyl” refers to a hydrocarbon chain that may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C1-C12 alkyl indicates that the group may have from 1 to 12 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. The term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by halo, and includes alkyl moieties in which all hydrogens have been replaced by halo (e.g., perfluoroalkyl). Alkyl and haloalkyl groups may be optionally inserted with O, N, or S. The terms “aralkyl” refers to an alkyl moiety in which an alkyl hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl group. Aralkyl includes groups in which more than one hydrogen atom has been replaced by an aryl group. Examples of “aralkyl” include benzyl, 9-fluorenyl, benzhydryl, and trityl groups.
  • The term “alkenyl” refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-8 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more double bonds. Examples of a 15 typical alkenyl include, but not limited to, allyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-hexenyl and 3-octenyl groups. The term “alkynyl” refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-8 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more triple bonds. Some examples of a typical alkynyl are ethynyl, 2-propynyl, and 3-methylbutynyl, and propargyl. The sp2 and sp3 carbons may optionally serve as the point of attachment of the alkenyl and alkynyl groups, respectively.
  • The terms “alkylamino” and “dialkylamino” refer to —NH(alkyl) and —N(alkyl)2 radicals respectively. The term “aralkylamino” refers to a —NH(aralkyl) radical. The term “alkoxy” refers to an —O-alkyl radical, and the terms “cycloalkoxy” and “aralkoxy” refer to an —O-cycloalkyl and O-aralkyl radicals respectively. The term “siloxy” refers to a R3SiO— radical. The term “mercapto” refers to an SH radical. The term “thioalkoxy” refers to an —S-alkyl radical.
  • The term “alkylene” refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—), e.g., —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, and —CH2CH2CH2—. The term “alkylenedioxo” refers to a divalent species of the structure —O—R—O—, in which R represents an alkylene.
  • The term “aryl” refers to an aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system, wherein any ring atom can be substituted. Examples of aryl moieties include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, and pyrenyl.
  • The term “cycloalkyl” as employed herein includes saturated cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, wherein any ring atom can be substituted. The cycloalkyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings). Examples of cycloalkyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclohexyl, adamantyl, and norbornyl.
  • The term “heterocyclyl” refers to a nonaromatic 3-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted. The heterocyclyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings). Examples of heterocyclyl include, but are not limited to tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholino, pyrrolinyl and pyrrolidinyl.
  • The term “cycloalkenyl” as employed herein includes partially unsaturated, nonaromatic, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 5 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 8 carbons, wherein any ring atom can be substituted. The cycloalkenyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings). Examples of cycloalkenyl moieties include, but are not limited to cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, or norbornenyl.
  • The term “heterocycloalkenyl” refers to a partially saturated, nonaromatic 5-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted. The heterocycloalkenyl groups herein described may also contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond or a common carbon atom (e.g., spiro-fused rings). Examples of heterocycloalkenyl include but are not limited to tetrahydropyridyl and dihydropyran.
  • The term “heteroaryl” refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein any ring atom can be substituted. The heteroaryl groups herein described may also contain fused rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond.
  • The term “oxo” refers to an oxygen atom, which forms a carbonyl when attached to carbon, an N-oxide when attached to nitrogen, and a sulfoxide or sulfone when attached to sulfur.
  • The term “acyl” refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
  • The term “substituents” refers to a group “substituted” on an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group at any atom of that group. Suitable substituents include, without limitation, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, halo, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, amino, SO3H, sulfate, phosphate, perfluoroalkyl, perfluoroalkoxy, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, carboxyl, oxo, thioxo, imino (alkyl, aryl, aralkyl), S(O)nalkyl (where n is 0-2), S(O)n aryl (where n is 0-2), S(O)n heteroaryl (where n is 0-2), S(O)n heterocyclyl (where n is 0-2), amine (mono-, di-, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, and combinations thereof), ester (alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl), amide (mono-, di-, alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, and combinations thereof), sulfonamide (mono-, di-, alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, and combinations thereof), unsubstituted aryl, unsubstituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted heterocyclyl, and unsubstituted cycloalkyl. In one aspect, the substituents on a group are independently any one single, or any subset of the aforementioned substituents.
  • The terms “adeninyl, cytosinyl, guaninyl, thyminyl, and uracilyl” and the like refer to radicals of adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine, and uracil.
  • A “protected” moiety refers to a reactive functional group, e.g., a hydroxyl group or an amino group, or a class of molecules, e.g., sugars, having one or more functional groups, in which the reactivity of the functional group is temporarily blocked by the presence of an attached protecting group. Protecting groups useful for the monomers and methods described herein can be found, e.g., in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (John Wiley and Sons: New York), 1981, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • General
  • An RNA agent, e.g., an iRNA agent, containing a preferred, but nonlimiting ligand-conjugated monomer subunit is presented as formula (II) below and in the scheme in FIG. 1. The carrier (also referred to in some embodiments as a “linker”) can be a cyclic or acyclic moiety and includes two “backbone attachment points” (e.g., hydroxyl groups) and a ligand. The ligand can be directly attached (e.g., conjugated) to the carrier or indirectly attached (e.g., conjugated) to the carrier by an intervening tether (e.g., an acyclic chain of one or more atoms; or a nucleobase, e.g., a naturally occurring nucleobase optionally having one or more chemical modifications, e.g., an unusual base; or a universal base). The carrier therefore also includes a “ligand or tethering attachment point” for the ligand and tether/tethered ligand, respectively.
  • The ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may be the 5′ or 3′ terminal subunit of the RNA molecule, i.e., one of the two “W” groups may be a hydroxyl group, and the other “W” group may be a chain of two or more unmodified or modified ribonucleotides. Alternatively, the ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may occupy an internal position, and both “W” groups may be one or more unmodified or modified ribonucleotides. More than one ligand-conjugated monomer subunit may be present in a RNA molecule, e.g., an iRNA agent. Preferred positions for inclusion of a tethered ligand-conjugated monomer subunits, e.g., one in which a lipophilic moiety, e.g., cholesterol, is tethered to the carrier are at the 3′ terminus, the 5′ terminus, or an internal position of the sense strand.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00009
  • The modified RNA molecule of formula (II) can be obtained using oligonucleotide synthetic methods known in the art. In a preferred embodiment, the modified RNA molecule of formula (II) can be prepared by incorporating one or more of the corresponding monomer compounds (see, e.g., A, B, and C below and in the scheme in FIG. 1) into a growing sense or antisense strand, utilizing, e.g., phosphoramidite or H-phosphonate coupling strategies.
  • The monomers, e.g., a ligand-conjugated monomer, generally include two differently functionalized hydroxyl groups (OFG1 and OFG2), which are linked to the carrier molecule (see A below and in FIG. 1), and a ligand/tethering attachment point. As used herein, the term “functionalized hydroxyl group” means that the hydroxyl proton has been replaced by another substituent. As shown in representative structures B and C below and in FIG. 1, one hydroxyl group (OFG1) on the carrier is functionalized with a protecting group (PG). The other hydroxyl group (OFG2) can be functionalized with either (1) a liquid or solid phase synthesis support reagent (solid circle) directly or indirectly through a linker, L, as in B, or (2) a phosphorus-containing moiety, e.g., a phosphoramidite as in C. The tethering attachment point may be connected to a hydrogen atom, a suitable protecting group, a tether, or a tethered ligand at the time that the monomer is incorporated into the growing sense or antisense strand (see variable “R” in A below). Thus, the tethered ligand can be, but need not be attached to the monomer at the time that the monomer is incorporated into the growing strand. In certain embodiments, the tether, the ligand or the tethered ligand may be linked to a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit after a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit has been incorporated into the strand. The wavy line used below (and elsewhere herein) refers to a connection, and can represent a direct bond between the moiety and the attachment point or a tethering molecule which is interposed between the moiety and the attachment point. Directly tethered means the moiety is bound directly to the attachment point. Indirectly tethered means that there is a tether molecule interposed between the attachment point and the moiety.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00010
  • The (OFG1) protecting group may be selected as desired, e.g., from T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991). The protecting group is preferably stable under amidite synthesis conditions, storage conditions, and oligonucleotide synthesis conditions. Hydroxyl groups, —OH, are nucleophilic groups (i.e., Lewis bases), which react through the oxygen with electrophiles (i.e., Lewis acids). Hydroxyl groups in which the hydrogen has been replaced with a protecting group, e.g., a triarylmethyl group or a trialkylsilyl group, are essentially unreactive as nucleophiles in displacement reactions. Thus, the protected hydroxyl group is useful in preventing e.g., homocoupling of compounds exemplified by structure C during oligonucleotide synthesis. In some embodiments, a preferred protecting group is the dimethoxytrityl group. In other embodiments, a preferred protecting group is a silicon-based protecting group having the formula below:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00011
  • X5′, X5″, and X5′″ can be selected from substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, araklyl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, aralkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, or siloxy (i.e., R3SiO—, the three “R” groups can be any combination of the above listed groups). X5′, X5″, and X5′″ may all be the same or different; also contemplated is a combination in which two of X5′, X5″, and X5′″ are identical and the third is different. In certain embodiments X5′, X5″, and X5′″ include at least one alkoxy or siloxy groups and may be any one of the groups listed in FIG. 2A, a preferred combination includes X5′, X5″=trimethylsiloxy and X5′″=1,3-(triphenylmethoxy)-2-propoxy or cyclododecyloxy.
  • Other preferred combinations of X5′, X5″, and X5′″ include those that result in OFG1 groups that meet the deprotection and stability criteria delineated below. The group is preferably stable under amidite synthesis conditions, storage conditions, and oligonucleotide synthesis conditions. Rapid removal, i.e., less than one minute, of the silyl group from e.g., a support-bound oligonucleotide is desirable because it can reduce synthesis times and thereby reduce exposure time of the growing oligonucleotide chain to the reagents. Oligonucleotide synthesis can be improved if the silyl protecting group is visible during deprotection, e.g., from the addition of a chromophore silyl substituent.
  • Selection of silyl protecting groups can be complicated by the competing demands of the essential characteristics of stability and facile removal, and the need to balance these competitive goals. Most substituents that increase stability can also increase the reaction time required for removal of the silyl group, potentially increasing the level of difficulty in removal of the group.
  • The addition of alkoxy and siloxy substituents to OFG1 silicon-containing protecting groups increases the susceptibility of the protecting groups to fluoride cleavage of the silylether bonds. Increasing the steric bulk of the substituents preserves stability while not decreasing fluoride lability to an equal extent. An appropriate balance of substituents on the silyl group makes a silyl ether a viable nucleoside protecting group.
  • Candidate OFG1 silicon-containing protecting groups may be tested by exposing a tetrahydrofuran solution of a preferred carrier bearing the candidate OFG1 group to five molar equivalents of tetrahydrofuran at room temperature. The reaction time may be determined by monitoring the disappearance of the starting material by thin layer chromatography.
  • When the OFG2 in B includes a linker, e.g., a relatively long organic linker, connected to a soluble or insoluble support reagent, solution or solid phase synthesis techniques can be employed to build up a chain of natural and/or modified ribonucleotides once OFG1 is deprotected and free to react as a nucleophile with another nucleoside or monomer containing an electrophilic group (e.g., an amidite group). Alternatively, a natural or modified ribonucleotide or oligoribonucleotide chain can be coupled to monomer C via an amidite group or H-phosphonate group at OFG2. Subsequent to this operation, OFG1 can be deblocked, and the restored nucleophilic hydroxyl group can react with another nucleoside or monomer containing an electrophilic group. R′ can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or alkenyl. In preferred embodiments, R′ is methyl, allyl or 2-cyanoethyl. R″ may a C1-C10 alkyl group, preferably it is a branched group containing three or more carbons, e.g., isopropyl.
  • OFG2 in B can be hydroxyl functionalized with a linker, which in turn contains a liquid or solid phase synthesis support reagent at the other linker terminus. The support reagent can be any support medium that can support the monomers described herein. The monomer can be attached to an insoluble support via a linker, L, which allows the monomer (and the growing chain) to be solubilized in the solvent in which the support is placed. The solubilized, yet immobilized, monomer can react with reagents in the surrounding solvent; unreacted reagents and soluble by-products can be readily washed away from the solid support to which the monomer or monomer-derived products is attached. Alternatively, the monomer can be attached to a soluble support moiety, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) and liquid phase synthesis techniques can be used to build up the chain. Linker and support medium selection is within skill of the art. Generally the linker may be —C(O)(CH2)qC(O)—, or —C(O)(CH2)qS—, in which q can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; preferably, it is oxalyl, succinyl or thioglycolyl. Standard control pore glass solid phase synthesis supports can not be used in conjunction with fluoride labile 5′ silyl protecting groups because the glass is degraded by fluoride with a significant reduction in the amount of full-length product. Fluoride-stable polystyrene based supports or PEG are preferred.
  • The ligand/tethering attachment point can be any divalent, trivalent, tetravalent, pentavalent or hexavalent atom. In some embodiments, ligand/tethering attachment point can be a carbon, oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur atom. For example, a ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can have a nucleophilic heteroatom, e.g., —SH, —NH2, secondary amino, ONH2, or NH2NH2. As another example, the ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can be an olefin, e.g., —CH═CH2, and the precursor functional group can be attached to a ligand, a tether, or tethered ligand using, e.g., transition metal catalyzed carbon-carbon (for example olefin metathesis) processes or cycloadditions (e.g., Diels-Alder). As a further example, the ligand/tethering attachment point precursor functional group can be an electrophilic moiety, e.g., an aldehyde. When the carrier is a cyclic carrier, the ligand/tethering attachment point can be an endocyclic atom (i.e., a constituent atom in the cyclic moiety, e.g., a nitrogen atom) or an exocyclic atom (i.e., an atom or group of atoms attached to a constituent atom in the cyclic moiety).
  • The carrier can be any organic molecule containing attachment points for OFG1, OFG2, and the ligand. In certain embodiments, carrier is a cyclic molecule and may contain heteroatoms (e.g., O, N or S). E.g., carrier molecules may include aryl (e.g., benzene, biphenyl, etc.), cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexane, cis or trans decalin, etc.), cycloalkenyl (e.g., cyclohexenyl), or heterocyclyl (tetrahydropyran, piperazine, pyrrolidine, etc.). In other embodiments, the carrier can be an acyclic moiety, e.g., based on serinol. Any of the above cyclic systems may include substituents in addition to OFG1, OFG2, and the ligand.
  • Sugar-Based Monomers
  • In some embodiments, the carrier molecule is an oxygen containing heterocycle. Preferably the carrier is a ribose sugar as shown in structure LCM-I. In this embodiment, the monomer, e.g., a ligand-conjugated monomer is a nucleoside.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00012
  • “B” represents a nucleobase, e.g., a naturally occurring nucleobase optionally having one or more chemical modifications, e.g., and unusual base; or a universal base.
  • As used herein, an “unusual” nucleobase can include any one of the following:
      • 2-methyladeninyl,
      • N6-methyladeninyl,
      • 2-methylthio-N-6-methyladeninyl,
      • N6-isopentenyladeninyl,
      • 2-methylthio-N-6-isopentenyladeninyl,
      • N6-(cis-hydroxyisopentenyl)adeninyl,
      • 2-methylthio-N-6-(cis-hydroxyisopentenyl) adeninyl,
      • N6-glycinylcarbamoyladeninyl,
      • N6-threonylcarbamoyladeninyl,
      • 2-methylthio-N-6-threonylcarbamoyladeninyl,
      • N6-methyl-N-6-threonylcarbamoyladeninyl,
      • N6-hydroxynorvalylcarbamoyladeninyl,
      • 2-methylthio-N-6-hydroxynorvalyl carbamoyladeninyl,
      • N6,N6-dimethyladeninyl,
      • 3-methylcytosinyl,
      • 5-methylcytosinyl,
      • 2-thiocytosinyl,
      • 5-formylcytosinyl,
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00013
      • N4-methylcytosinyl,
      • 5-hydroxymethylcytosinyl,
      • 1-methylguaninyl,
      • N2-methylguaninyl,
      • 7-methylguaninyl,
      • N2,N2-dimethylguaninyl,
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00014
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00015
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00016
      • N2,7-dimethylguaninyl,
      • N2,N2,7-trimethylguaninyl,
      • 1-methylguaninyl,
      • 7-cyano-7-deazaguaninyl,
      • 7-aminomethyl-7-deazaguaninyl,
      • pseudouracilyl,
      • dihydrouracilyl,
      • 5-methyluracilyl,
      • 1-methylpseudouracilyl,
      • 2-thiouracilyl,
      • 4-thiouracilyl,
      • 2-thiothyminyl
      • 5-methyl-2-thiouracilyl,
      • 3-(3-amino-3-carboxypropyl)uracilyl,
      • 5-hydroxyuracilyl,
      • 5-methoxyuracilyl,
      • uracilyl 5-oxyacetic acid,
      • uracilyl 5-oxyacetic acid methyl ester,
      • 5-(carboxyhydroxymethyl)uracilyl,
      • 5-(carboxyhydroxymethyl)uracilyl methyl ester,
      • 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracilyl,
      • 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracilyl,
      • 5-aminomethyl-2-thiouracilyl,
      • 5-methylaminomethyluracilyl,
      • 5-methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracilyl,
      • 5-methylaminomethyl-2-selenouracilyl,
      • 5-carbamoylmethyluracilyl,
      • 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracilyl,
      • 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouracilyl,
      • 3-methyluracilyl,
      • 1-methyl-3-(3-amino-3-carboxypropyl) pseudouracilyl,
      • 5-carboxymethyluracilyl,
      • 5-methyldihydrouracilyl, or
      • 3-methylpseudouracilyl.
  • A universal base can form base pairs with each of the natural DNA/RNA bases, exhibiting relatively little discrimination between them. In general, the universal bases are non-hydrogen bonding, hydrophobic, aromatic moieties which can stabilize e.g., duplex RNA or RNA-like molecules, via stacking interactions. A universal base can also include hydrogen bonding substituents. As used herein, a “universal base” can include anthracenes, pyrenes or any one of the following:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00017
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00018
  • In some embodiments, B can form part of a tether that connects a ligand to the carrier. For example, the tether can be B—CH═CH—C(O)NH—(CH2)5—NHC(O)-LIGAND. In a preferred embodiment, the double bond is trans, and the ligand is a substituted or unsubstituted cholesterolyl radical (e.g., attached through the D-ring side chain or the C-3 hydroxyl); an aralkyl moiety having at least one sterogenic center and at least one substituent on the aryl portion of the aralkyl group; or a nucleobase. In certain embodiments, B, in the tether described above, is uracilyl or a universal base, e.g., an aryl moiety, e.g., phenyl, optionally having additional substituents, e.g., one or more fluoro groups. B can be substituted at any atom with the remainder of the tether.
  • X2 can include “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents in place of the 2′-OH; or be a ligand or a tethered ligand.
  • Examples of “oxy”-substituents include alkoxy or aryloxy (OR, e.g., R═H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, sugar, or protecting group); polyethyleneglycols (PEG), O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OR; “locked” nucleic acids (LNA) in which the 2′ hydroxyl is connected, e.g., by a methylene bridge, to the 4′ carbon of the same ribose sugar; O-PROTECTED AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino) and aminoalkoxy, O(CH2)nPROTECTED AMINE, (e.g., AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino), and orthoester. Amine protecting groups can include formyl, amido, benzyl, allyl, etc.
  • Preferred orthoesters have the general formula J. The groups R31 and R32 may be the same or different and can be any combination of the groups listed in FIG. 2B. A preferred orthoester is the “ACE” group, shown below as structure K.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00019
  • “Deoxy” substituents include hydrogen (i.e. deoxyribose sugars); halo (e.g., fluoro); protected amino (e.g. NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid in which all amino are protected); fully protected polyamino (e.g., NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE, wherein AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino and all amino groups are protected), —NHC(O)R (R=alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar), cyano; alkyl-thio-alkyl; thioalkoxy; and alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl, which may be optionally substituted with e.g., a protected amino functionality. Preferred substitutents are 2′-methoxyethyl, 2′-OCH3, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-C— allyl, and 2′-fluoro.
  • X3 is as described for OFG2 above.
  • PG can be a triarylmethyl group (e.g., a dimethoxytrityl group) or Si(X5′)(X5″)(X5′″) in which (X5′), (X5″), and (X5′″) are as described elsewhere.
  • Sugar Replacement-Based Monomers, e.g., Ligand-Conjugated Monomers (Cyclic)
  • Cyclic sugar replacement-based monomers, e.g., sugar replacement-based ligand-conjugated monomers, are also referred to herein as ribose replacement monomer subunit (RRMS) monomer compounds. Preferred carriers have the general formula (LCM-2) provided below (In that structure preferred backbone attachment points can be chosen from R1 or R2; R3 or R1; or R9 and R10 if Y is CR9R10 (two positions are chosen to give two backbone attachment points, e.g., R1 and R4, or R4 and R9)). Preferred tethering attachment points include R7; R5 or R6 when X is CH2. The carriers are described below as an entity, which can be incorporated into a strand. Thus, it is understood that the structures also encompass the situations wherein one (in the case of a terminal position) or two (in the case of an internal position) of the attachment points, e.g., R1 or R2; R3 or R4; or R9 or R10 (when Y is CR9R10), is connected to the phosphate, or modified phosphate, e.g., sulfur containing, backbone. E.g., one of the above-named R groups can be —CH2—, wherein one bond is connected to the carrier and one to a backbone atom, e.g., a linking oxygen or a central phosphorus atom.)
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00020
      • in which,
      • X is N(CO)R7, NR7 or CH2;
      • Y is NR8, O, S, CR9R10;
      • Z is CR11R12 or absent;
      • Each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is, independently, H, ORa, or (CH2)nORb, provided that at least two of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 are ORa and/or (CH2)nORb;
      • Each of R5, R6, R11, and R12 is, independently, a ligand, H, C1-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 R13, or C(O)NHR7; or R5 and R11 together are C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with R14;
      • R7 can be a ligand, e.g., R7 can be Rd, or R7 can be a ligand tethered indirectly to the carrier, e.g., through a tethering moiety, e.g., C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NRcRd; or C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NHC(O)Rd;
      • R8 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
      • R13 is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy, or halo;
      • R14 is NRcR7;
      • R15 is C1-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with cyano, or C2-C6 alkenyl;
      • R16 is C1-C10 alkyl;
      • R17 is a liquid or solid phase support reagent;
      • L is —C(O)(CH2)qC(O)—, or —C(O)(CH2)qS—;
      • Ra is a protecting group, e.g., CAr3; (e.g., a dimethoxytrityl group) or Si(X5′)(X5″)(X5′″) in which (X5′), (X5″), and (X5′″) are as described elsewhere.
      • Rb is P(O)(O−)H, P(OR15)N(R16)2 or L-R17;
      • Rc is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
      • Rd is carbohydrate radical or a steroid optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical;
      • Each Ar is, independently, C6-C10 aryl optionally substituted with C1-C4 alkoxy;
      • n is 1-4; and q is 0-4.
  • Exemplary carriers include those in which, e.g., X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is absent; or X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is CR11R12; or X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is NR8, and Z is CR11R12; or X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is O, and Z is CR11R12; or X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; Z is CR11R12, and R5 and R11 together form C6 cycloalkyl (H, z=2), or the indane ring system, e.g., X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; Z is CR11R12, and R5 and R11 together form C5 cycloalkyl (H, z=1).
  • In certain embodiments, the carrier may be based on the pyrroline ring system or the 4-hydroxyproline ring system, e.g., X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is absent (D). OFG1 is preferably attached to a primary carbon, e.g., an exocyclic alkylene
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00021
    group, e.g., a methylene group, connected to one of the carbons in the five-membered ring (—CH2OFG1 in D). OFG2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the five-membered ring (—OFG2 in D). For the pyrroline-based carriers, —CH2OFG1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3; or —CH2OFG1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG2 may be attached to C-4. In certain embodiments, CH2OFG1 and OFG2 may be geminally substituted to one of the above-referenced carbons. For the 3-hydroxyproline-based carriers, —CH2OFG1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG2 may be attached to C-4. The pyrroline- and 4-hydroxyproline-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring. Thus, CH2OFG1 and OFG2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included. The monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH2OFG1 and OFG2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa). The tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen. Preferred examples of carrier D include the following:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00022
  • In certain embodiments, the carrier may be based on the piperidine ring system (E), e.g., X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is CR11R12. OFG1 is preferably
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00023
    attached to a primary carbon, e.g., an exocyclic alkylene group, e.g., a methylene group (n=1) or ethylene group (n=2), connected to one of the carbons in the six-membered ring [—(CH2)nOFG1 in E]. OFG2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the six-membered ring (—OFG2 in E). —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be disposed in a geminal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to the same carbon, e.g., at C-2, C-3, or C-4. Alternatively, —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be disposed in a vicinal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms, e.g.,
      • —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3; —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG2 may be attached to C-2; —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG2 may be attached to C-4; or —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-4 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3. The piperidine-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring. Thus, —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included. The monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH2OFG1 and OFG2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa). The tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen.
  • In certain embodiments, the carrier may be based on the piperazine ring system (F), e.g., X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is NR8, and Z is CR11R12, or the morpholine ring system (G), e.g., X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is O, and Z is CR11R12. OFG1 is preferably
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00024
    attached to a primary carbon, e.g., an exocyclic alkylene group, e.g., a methylene group, connected to one of the carbons in the six-membered ring (—CH2OFG1 in F or G). OFG2 is preferably attached directly to one of the carbons in the six-membered rings (—OFG2 in F or G). For both F and G, —CH2OFG1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3; or vice versa. In certain embodiments, CH2OFG1 and OFG2 may be geminally substituted to one of the above-referenced carbons. The piperazine- and morpholine-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring. Thus, CH2OFG1 and OFG2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included. The monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH2OFG1 and OFG2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa). R′″ can be, e.g., C1-C6 alkyl, preferably CH3. The tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen in both F and G.
  • In certain embodiments, the carrier may be based on the decalin ring system, e.g., X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; Z is CR11R12, and R5 and R11 together form C6 cycloalkyl (H, z=2), or the indane ring system, e.g., X is CH2; Y is CR9R10; Z is CR11R12, and R5 and R11 together form C5 cycloalkyl (H, z=1). OFG1 is preferably attached to a primary carbon,
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00025
    e.g., an exocyclic methylene group (n=1) or ethylene group (n=2) connected to one of C-2, C-3, C-4, or C-5 [—(CH2)nOFG1 in H]. OFG2 is preferably attached directly to one of C-2, C-3, C-4, or C-5 (—OFG2 in H). —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be disposed in a geminal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to the same carbon, e.g., at C-2, C-3, C-4, or C-5. Alternatively, —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be disposed in a vicinal manner on the ring, i.e., both groups may be attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms, e.g., —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-2 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3; —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG2 may be attached to C-2; —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-3 and OFG2 may be attached to C-4; or —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-4 and OFG2 may be attached to C-3; —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-4 and OFG2 may be attached to C-5; or —(CH2)nOFG1 may be attached to C-5 and OFG2 may be attached to C-4. The decalin or indane-based monomers may therefore contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring. Thus, —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another in any of the pairings delineated above. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included. The monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH2OFG1 and OFG2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa). In a preferred embodiment, the substituents at C-1 and C-6 are trans with respect to one another. The tethering attachment point is preferably C-6 or C-7.
  • Other carriers may include those based on 3-hydroxyproline (J). Thus, —(CH2)nOFG1 and OFG2 may be cis or trans with respect to one another. Accordingly, all cis/trans isomers are expressly included. The monomers may also contain one or more asymmetric centers
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00026
    and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of the monomers are expressly included (e.g., the centers bearing CH2OFG1 and OFG2 can both have the R configuration; or both have the S configuration; or one center can have the R configuration and the other center can have the S configuration and vice versa). The tethering attachment point is preferably nitrogen.
  • Representative cyclic, sugar replacement-based carriers are shown in FIG. 3.
  • Sugar Replacement-Based Monomers (Acyclic)
  • Acyclic sugar replacement-based monomers, e.g., sugar replacement-based ligand-conjugated monomers, are also referred to herein as ribose replacement monomer subunit (RRMS) monomer compounds. Preferred acyclic carriers can have formula LCM-3 or LCM-4 below.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00027
  • In some embodiments, each of x, y, and z can be, independently of one another, 0, 1, 2, or 3. In formula LCM-3, when y and z are different, then the tertiary carbon can have either the R or S configuration. In preferred embodiments, x is zero and y and z are each 1 in formula LCM-3 (e.g., based on serinol), and y and z are each 1 in formula LCM-3. Each of formula LCM-3 or LCM-4 below can optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl.
  • Tethers
  • In certain embodiments, a moiety, e.g., a ligand may be connected indirectly to the carrier via the intermediacy of an intervening tether. Tethers are connected to the carrier at a tethering attachment point (TAP) and may include any C1-C100 carbon-containing moiety, (e.g. C1-C75, C1-C50, C1-C20, C1-C10; C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, or C10), preferably having at least one nitrogen atom. In preferred embodiments, the nitrogen atom forms part of a terminal amino or amido (NHC(O)—) group on the tether, which may serve as a connection point for the ligand. Preferred tethers (underlined) include TAP-(CH2)nNH—; TAP-C(O)(CH2)nNH—; TAP-NR″″(CH2)nNH—, TAP-C(O)—(CH2)2—C(O)—; TAP-C(O)—O—(CH2)n—C(O)O—; TAP-C(O)—O—; TAP-C(O)—(CH2)n—NH—C(O)—; TAP-C(O)—(CH2)n—; TAP-C(O)—NH—; TAP-C(O)—; TAP-(CH2)n—C(O)—; TAP-(CH2)n—C(O)O—; TAP-(CH2)n—; or TAP-(CH2)n—NH—C(O)—; in which n is 1-20 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20) and R″″ is C1-C6 alkyl. Preferably, n is 5, 6, or 11. In other embodiments, the nitrogen may form part of a terminal oxyamino group, e.g., —ONH2, or hydrazino group, —NHNH2. The tether may optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl, and/or optionally inserted with one or more additional heteroatoms, e.g., N, O, or S. Preferred tethered ligands may include, e.g., TAP-(CH2)nNH(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)(CH2)nNH(LIGAND); TAP-NR″″(CH2)nNH(LIGAND); TAP-(CH2)nONH(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH2)nONH(LIGAND); TAP-NR″″(CH2)nONH(LIGAND); TAP-(CH2)nNHNH2(LIGAND), TAP-C(O)(CH2)nNHNH2(LIGAND); TAP-NR″″(CH2)nNHNH2(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH2 —C(O(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH)n—C(O)O(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—O(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH2)n—NH—C(O)(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—(CH2)n(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)—NH(LIGAND); TAP-C(O)(LIGAND); TAP-(CH2)n—C(O)(LIGAND); TAP-(CH2)n—C(O)O(LIGAND); TAP-(CH2)n(LIGAND); or TAP-(CH2)n—NH—C(O)(LIGAND). In some embodiments, amino terminated tethers (e.g., NH2, ONH2, NH2NH2) can form an imino bond (i.e., C═N) with the ligand. In some embodiments, amino terminated tethers (e.g., NH2, ONH2, NH2NH2) can acylated, e.g., with C(O)CF3.
  • In some embodiments, the tether can terminate with a mercapto group (i.e., SH) or an olefin (e.g., CH═CH2). For example, the tether can be TAP-(CH2)2—SH, TAP-C(O)(CH2)nSH, TAP-(CH2)n—(CH═CH2), or TAP-C(O)(CH2)n(CH═CH2), in which n can be as described elsewhere. The tether may optionally be substituted, e.g., with hydroxy, alkoxy, perhaloalkyl, and/or optionally inserted with one or more additional heteroatoms, e.g., N, O, or S. The double bond can be cis or trans or E or Z.
  • In other embodiments the tether may include an electrophilic moiety, preferably at the terminal position of the tether. Preferred electrophilic moieties include, e.g., an aldehyde, alkyl halide, mesylate, tosylate, nosylate, or brosylate, or an activated carboxylic acid ester, e.g. an NHS ester, or a pentafluorophenyl ester. Preferred tethers (underlined) include TAP-(CH2)nCHO; TAP-C(O)(CH2)nCHO; or TAP-NR″″(CH2)nCHO, in which n is 1-6 and R″″ is C1-C6 alkyl; or TAP-(CH2)nC(O)ONHS; TAP-C(O)(CH2)nC(O)ONHS; or TAP-NR″″(CH2)nC(O)ONHS, in which n is 1-6 and R″″ is C1-C6 alkyl; TAP-(CH2)nC(O)OC6F5; TAP-C(O)(CH2)2C(O)OC6F5; or TAP-NR″″(CH2)nC(O)OC6F5, in which n is 1-11 and R″″ is C1-C6 alkyl; or —(CH2)nCH2LG; TAP-C(O)(CH2)nCH2LG; or TAP-NR″″(CH2)nCH2LG, in which n can be as described elsewhere and R″″ is C1-C6 alkyl (LG can be a leaving group, e.g., halide, mesylate, tosylate, nosylate, brosylate). Tethering can be carried out by coupling a nucleophilic group of a ligand, e.g., a thiol or amino group with an electrophilic group on the tether.
  • In other embodiments, it can be desirable for the monomer to include a phthalimido group (K) at the terminal position of the tether.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00028
  • In other embodiments, other protected amino groups can be at the terminal position of the tether, e.g., alloc, monomethoxy trityl (MMT), trifluoroacetyl, Fmoc, or aryl sulfonyl (e.g., the aryl portion can be ortho-nitrophenyl or ortho, para-dinitrophenyl).
  • Any of the tethers described herein may further include one or more additional linking groups, e.g., —O—(CH2)n—, —(CH2)n—SS—, —(CH2)n—, or —(CH═CH)—.
  • Tethered Ligands
  • A wide variety of entities, e.g., ligands, can be tethered to an iRNA agent, e.g., to the carrier of a ligand-conjugated monomer subunit. Examples are described below in the context of a ligand-conjugated monomer subunit but that is only preferred, entities can be coupled at other points to an iRNA agent.
  • Preferred moieties are ligands, which are coupled, preferably covalently, either directly or indirectly via an intervening tether, to the carrier. In preferred embodiments, the ligand is attached to the carrier via an intervening tether. As discussed above, the ligand or tethered ligand may be present on the ligand-conjugated monomer\ when the ligand-conjugated monomer is incorporated into the growing strand. In some embodiments, the ligand may be incorporated into a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit after a “precursor” ligand-conjugated monomer subunit has been incorporated into the growing strand. For example, a monomer having, e.g., an amino-terminated tether, e.g., TAP-(CH2)nNH2 may be incorporated into a growing sense or antisense strand. In a subsequent operation, i.e., after incorporation of the precursor monomer subunit into the strand, a ligand having an electrophilic group, e.g., a pentafluorophenyl ester or aldehyde group, can subsequently be attached to the precursor ligand-conjugated monomer by coupling the electrophilic group of the ligand with the terminal nucleophilic group of the precursor ligand-conjugated monomer subunit tether.
  • In preferred embodiments, a ligand alters the distribution, targeting or lifetime of an iRNA agent into which it is incorporated. In preferred embodiments a ligand provides an enhanced affinity for a selected target, e.g, molecule, cell or cell type, compartment, e.g., a cellular or organ compartment, tissue, organ or region of the body, as, e.g., compared to a species absent such a ligand.
  • Preferred ligands can improve transport, hybridization, and specificity properties and may also improve nuclease resistance of the resultant natural or modified oligoribonucleotide, or a polymeric molecule comprising any combination of monomers described herein and/or natural or modified ribonucleotides.
  • Ligands in general can include therapeutic modifiers, e.g., for enhancing uptake; diagnostic compounds or reporter groups e.g., for monitoring distribution; cross-linking agents; nuclease-resistance conferring moieties; and natural or unusual nucleobases. General examples include lipophiles, lipids, steroids (e.g., cholesterol, uvaol, hecigenin, diosgenin), terpenes (e.g., triterpenes, e.g., sarsasapogenin, Friedelin, epifriedelanol derivatized lithocholic acid), vitamins (e.g., folic acid, vitamin A, vitamin E, biotin, pyridoxal), carbohydrates, proteins, protein binding agents, integrin targeting molecules, polycationics (e.g., porphyrins), peptides, polyamines, and peptide mimics.
  • In some embodiments, the ligand can be one of the following triterpenes:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00029
  • In some embodiments, the ligand can be a steroid, e.g., a substituted or unsubstituted cholesterol or cholanic acid, or stereoisomer thereof or one of the following steroids:
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00030
  • In some embodiments, the ligand can be a carbohydrate, (e.g., a monosaccharide, e.g., an aldose or a ketose, (triose, tetrose, pentose, hexose, etc.); a disaccharide; or polysaccharide). In preferred embodiments the ligand can be, e.g., galactose, N-acetylgalactosamine, or mannose.
  • In some embodiments, the ligand can include a steroid that is tethered to at least one carbohydrate (e.g., a monosaccharide). Such a ligand can be attached to the tether or the tethering attachment point through a atom or group of atoms that is associated with either the steroid or the carbohydrate (e.g., an amino group or a hydroxy group). Tethers can include any of those described herein. In certain embodiments, the tether can further include a multivalent moiety (e.g., a trihydroxybenzoate or trihydroxybenzyl group) for tethering one or more carbohydrates. Examples of such ligands include compounds 7, 8, 38, 39, 55, and 61.
  • In some embodiments, the ligand can be a porphyrin. In certain embodiments, the porphyrin can be further substituted with a tether or a tethered ligand (e.g., a steroid, a carbohydrate, or a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate). In these embodiments, the porphyrin can be or form part of a tether that attaches a ligand to an iRNA agent.
  • Methods for Making iRNA Agents
  • A listing of ribonucleosides containing the unusual bases described herein are described in “The RNA Modification Database” maintained by Pamela F. Crain, Jef Rozenski and James A. McCloskey; Departments of Medicinal Chemistry and Biochemistry, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah 84112, USA (RNAmods@lib.med.utah.edu).
  • The 5′ silyl protecting group can be used in conjunction with acid labile orthoesters at the 2′ position of ribonucleosides to synthesize oligonucleotides via phosphoramidite chemistry. Final deprotection conditions are known not to significantly degrade RNA products. Functional groups on the unusual and universal bases are blocked during oligonucleotide synthesis with protecting groups that are compatible with the operations being performed that are described herein. All syntheses can be can be conducted in any automated or manual synthesizer on large, medium, or small scale. The syntheses may also be carried out in multiple well plates or glass slides.
  • The 5′-O-silyl group can be removed via exposure to fluoride ions, which can include any source of fluoride ion, e.g., those salts containing fluoride ion paired with inorganic counterions e.g., cesium fluoride and potassium fluoride or those salts containing fluoride ion paired with an organic counterion, e.g., a tetraalkylammonium fluoride. A crown ether catalyst can be utilized in combination with the inorganic fluoride in the deprotection reaction. Preferred fluoride ion source are tetrabutylammonium fluoride or aminehydrofluorides (e.g., combining aqueous HF with triethylamine in a dipolar aprotic solvent, e.g., dimethylformamide).
  • The choice of protecting groups for use on the phosphite triesters and phosphotriesters can alter the stability of the triesters towards fluoride. Methyl protection of the phosphotriester or phosphitetriester can stabilize the linkage against fluoride ions and improve process yields.
  • Since ribonucleosides have a reactive 2′ hydroxyl substituent, it can be desirable to protect the reactive 2′ position in RNA with a protecting group that is compatible with a 5′-O-silyl protecting group, e.g. one stable to fluoride. Orthoesters meet this criterion and can be readily removed in a final acid deprotection step that can result in minimal RNA degradation.
  • Tetrazole catalysts can be used in the standard phosphoramidite coupling reaction. Preferred catalysts include e.g. tetrazole, S-ethyl-tetrazole, p-nitrophenyltetrazole.
  • The general process is as follows. Nucleosides are suitably protected and functionalized for use in solid-phase or solution-phase synthesis of RNA oligonucleotides. The 2′-hydroxyl group in a ribonucleotide can be modified using a tris orthoester reagent. The 2′-hydroxyl can be modified to yield a 2′-O-orthoester nucleoside by reacting the ribonucleoside with the tris orthoester reagent in the presence of an acidic catalyst, e.g., pyridinium p-toluene sulfonate. This reaction is known to those skilled in the art. The product can then be subjected to further protecting group reactions (e.g., 5′-O-silylation) and functionalizations (e.g., 3′-O-phosphitylation) to produce a desired reagent (e.g., nucleoside phosphoramidite) for incorporation within an oligonucleotide or polymer by reactions known to those skilled in the art.
  • Preferred orthoesters include those comprising ethylene glycol ligands which are protected with acyl or ester protecting groups. Specifically, the preferred acyl group is acetyl. The nucleoside reagents may then be used by those skilled in the art to synthesize RNA oligonucleotides on commercially available synthesizer instruments, e.g. Gene Assembler Plus (Pharmacia), 380B (Applied Biosystems). Following synthesis (either solution-phase or solid-phase) of an oligonucleotide or polymer, the product can be subjected to one or more reactions using non-acidic reagents. One of these reactions may be strong basic conditions, for example, 40% methylamine in water for 10 minutes at 55.degree. C., which will remove the acyl protecting groups from the ethylene glycol ligands but leave the orthoester moiety attached. The resultant orthoester may be left attached when the polymer or oligonucleotide is used in subsequent applications, or it may be removed in a final mildly-acidic reaction, for example, 10 minutes at 55.degree. C. in 50 mM acetic acid, pH 3.0, followed by addition of equal volume of 150 mM TRIS buffer for 10 minutes at 55.degree. C.
  • Universal bases are described in “Survey and Summary: The Applications of Universal DNA base analogues” Loakes, D., Nucleic Acid Research 2001, 29, 2437, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. Specific examples are described in the following: Liu, D.; Moran, S.; Kool, E. T. Chem. Biol., 1997, 4, 919-926; Morales, J. C.; Kool, E. T. Biochemistry, 2000, 39, 2626-2632; Matray, T, J.; Kool, E. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1998, 120, 6191-6192; Moran, S. Ren, R. X. -F.; Rumney I V, S.; Kool, E. T. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1997, 119, 2056-2057; Guckian, K. M.; Morales, J. C.; Kool, E. T. J. Org. Chem., 1998, 63, 9652-9656; Berger, M.; Wu. Y.; Ogawa, A. K.; McMinn, D. L.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. Nucleic Acids Res., 2000, 28, 2911-2914; Ogawa, A. K.; Wu, Y.; McMinn, D. L.; Liu, J.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2000, 122, 3274-3287; Ogawa, A. K.; Wu. Y.; Berger, M.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2000, 122, 8803-8804; Tae, E. L.; Wu, Y.; Xia, G.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2001, 123, 7439-7440; Wu, Y.; Ogawa, A. K.; Berger, M.; McMinn, D. L.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2000, 122, 7621-7632; McMinn, D. L.; Ogawa. A. K.; Wu, Y.; Liu, J.; Schultz, P. G.; Romesberg, F. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1999, 121, 11585-11586; Brotschi, C.; Haberli, A.; Leumann, C, J. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed., 2001, 40, 3012-3014; Weizman, H.; Tor, Y. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2001, 123, 3375-3376; Lan, T.; McLaughlin, L. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2000, 122, 6512-13.
  • As discussed above, the monomers and methods described herein can be used in the preparation of modified RNA molecules, or polymeric molecules comprising any combination of monomer compounds described herein and/or natural or modified ribonucleotides in which one or more subunits contain an unusual or universal base. Modified RNA molecules include e.g. those molecules containing a chemically or stereochemically modified nucleoside (e.g., having one or more backbone modifications, e.g., phosphorothioate or P-alkyl; having one or more sugar modifications, e.g., 2′-OCH3 or 2′-F; and/or having one or more base modifications, e.g., 5-alkylamino or 5-allylamino) or a nucleoside surrogate.
  • Coupling of 5′-hydroxyl groups with phosphoramidites forms phosphite ester intermediates, which in turn are oxidized e.g., with iodine, to the phosphate diester. Alternatively, the phosphites may be treated with e.g., sulfur, selenium, amino, and boron reagents to form modified phosphate backbones. Linkages between the monomers described herein and a nucleoside or oligonucleotide chain can also be treated with iodine, sulfur, selenium, amino, and boron reagents to form unmodified and modified phosphate backbones respectively. Similarly, the monomers described herein may be coupled with nucleosides or oligonucleotides containing any of the modifications or nucleoside surrogates described herein.
  • The synthesis and purification of oligonucleotide peptide conjugates can be performed by established methods. See, for example, Trufert et al., Tetrahedron, 52:3005, 1996; and Manoharan, “Oligonucleotide Conjugates in Antisense Technology,” in Antisense Drug Technology, ed. S. T. Crooke, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2001. Exemplary methods are shown in FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, a peptidomimetic can be modified to create a constrained peptide that adopts a distinct and specific preferred conformation, which can increase the potency and selectivity of the peptide. For example, the constrained peptide can be an azapeptide (Gante, Synthesis, 405-413, 1989). An azapeptide is synthesized by replacing the α-carbon of an amino acid with a nitrogen atom without changing the structure of the amino acid side chain. For example, the azapeptide can be synthesized by using hydrazine in traditional peptide synthesis coupling methods, such as by reacting hydrazine with a “carbonyl donor,” e.g., phenylchloroformate. A general azapeptide synthesis is shown in FIG. 6.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, a peptide or peptidomimetic (e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to an ligand-conjugated monomer) can be an N-methyl peptide. N-methyl peptides are composed of N-methyl amino acids, which provide an additional methyl group in the peptide backbone, thereby potentially providing additional means of resistance to proteolytic cleavage. N-methyl peptides can by synthesized by methods known in the art (see, for example, Lindgren et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 21:99, 2000; Cell Penetrating Peptides: Processes and Applications, Langel, ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla., 2002; Fische et al., Bioconjugate. Chem. 12: 825, 2001; Wander et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 124:13382, 2002). For example, an Ant or Tat peptide can be an N-methyl peptide. An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 7.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, a peptide or peptidomimetic (e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer) can be a β-peptide. β-peptides form stable secondary structures such as helices, pleated sheets, turns and hairpins in solutions. Their cyclic derivatives can fold into nanotubes in the solid state. β-peptides are resistant to degradation by proteolytic enzymes. β-peptides can be synthesized by methods known in the art. For example, an Ant or Tat peptide can be a β-peptide. An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 8.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, a peptide or peptidomimetic (e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer) can be a oligocarbamate. Oligocarbamate peptides are internalized into a cell by a transport pathway facilitated by carbamate transporters. For example, an Ant or Tat peptide can be an oligocarbamate. An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 9.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, a peptide or peptidomimetic (e.g., a peptide or peptidomimetic tethered to a ligand-conjugated monomer) can be an oligourea conjugate (or an oligothiourea conjugate), in which the amide bond of a peptidomimetic is replaced with a urea moiety. Replacement of the amide bond provides increased resistance to degradation by proteolytic enzymes, e.g., proteolytic enzymes in the gastrointestinal tract. In one embodiment, an oligourea conjugate is tethered to an iRNA agent for use in oral delivery. The backbone in each repeating unit of an oligourea peptidomimetic can be extended by one carbon atom in comparison with the natural amino acid. The single carbon atom extension can increase peptide stability and lipophilicity, for example. An oligourea peptide can therefore be advantageous when an iRNA agent is directed for passage through a bacterial cell wall, or when an iRNA agent must traverse the blood-brain barrier, such as for the treatment of a neurological disorder. In one embodiment, a hydrogen bonding unit is conjugated to the oligourea peptide, such as to create an increased affinity with a receptor. For example, an Ant or Tat peptide can be an oligourea conjugate (or an oligothiourea conjugate). An exemplary synthesis is shown in FIG. 10.
  • The siRNA peptide conjugates of the invention can be affiliated with, e.g., tethered to, ligand-conjugated monomers occurring at various positions on an iRNA agent. For example, a peptide can be terminally conjugated, on either the sense or the antisense strand, or a peptide can be bisconjugated (one peptide tethered to each end, one conjugated to the sense strand, and one conjugated to the antisense strand). In another option, the peptide can be internally conjugated, such as in the loop of a short hairpin iRNA agent. In yet another option, the peptide can be affiliated with a complex, such as a peptide-carrier complex.
  • A peptide-carrier complex consists of at least a carrier molecule, which can encapsulate one or more iRNA agents (such as for delivery to a biological system and/or a cell), and a peptide moiety tethered to the outside of the carrier molecule, such as for targeting the carrier complex to a particular tissue or cell type. A carrier complex can carry additional targeting molecules on the exterior of the complex, or fusogenic agents to aid in cell delivery. The one or more iRNA agents encapsulated within the carrier can be conjugated to lipophilic molecules, which can aid in the delivery of the agents to the interior of the carrier.
  • A carrier molecule or structure can be, for example, a micelle, a liposome (e.g., a cationic liposome), a nanoparticle, a microsphere, or a biodegradable polymer. A peptide moiety can be tethered to the carrier molecule by a variety of linkages, such as a disulfide linkage, an acid labile linkage, a peptide-based linkage, an oxyamino linkage or a hydrazine linkage. For example, a peptide-based linkage can be a GFLG peptide. Certain linkages will have particular advantages, and the advantages (or disadvantages) can be considered depending on the tissue target or intended use. For example, peptide based linkages are stable in the blood stream but are susceptible to enzymatic cleavage in the lysosomes. A schematic of preferred carriers is shown in FIG. 11.
  • The monomer compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Other synthetic chemistry transformations, protecting groups (e.g., for hydroxyl, amino, etc. present on the bases) and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
  • The monomer compounds may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds described herein can also contain linkages (e.g., carbon-carbon bonds, carbon-nitrogen bonds, e.g., amides) or substituents that can restrict bond rotation, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans, E/Z isomers, and rotational isomers (rotamers) are expressly included herein. The compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g., alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
  • Representative ligand-conjugated monomers and typical syntheses for preparing ligand-conjugated monomers and related compounds described herein are provided below. As discussed elsewhere, protecting groups for ligand-conjugated monomer hydroxyl groups, e.g., OFG1, include but are not limited to the dimethoxytrityl group (DMT). For example, it can be desirable in some embodiments to use silicon-based protecting groups as a protecting group for OFG1. Silicon-based protecting groups can therefore be used in conjunction with or in place of the DMT group as necessary or desired. Thus, the ligand-conjugated monomers and syntheses delineated below, which feature the DMT protecting group as a protecting group for OFG1, is not to be construed as limiting in any way to the invention.
  • Carbohydrate Conjugated Oligonucleotides
  • Galactose, N-Acetylgalactosamine and Mannose conjugate building blocks for oligonucleotide conjugation.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00031
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00032
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00033
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00034
    2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic 2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00035
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00036
    3R,4R; 3R,4S; 3S,4S; 3S,4R and Racemic 3R,4R; 3R,4S; 3S,4S; 3S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00037
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00038
    3R,5R; 3R,5S; 3S,5S; 3S,5R and Racemic 3R,5R; 3R,5S; 3S,5S; 3S,5R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00039
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00040
    2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic 2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00041
  • Bis(Galactose), bis(N-Acetylgalactosamine) and bis(mannose) conjugate building blocks for oligonucleotide conjugation.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00042
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00043
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00044
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00045
    2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic 2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00046
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00047
    3R,4R; 3R,4S; 3S,4S; 3S,4R and Racemic 3R,4R; 3R,4S; 3S,4S; 3S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00048
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00049
    3R,5R; 3R,5S; 3S,5S; 3S,5R and Racemic 3R,5R; 3R,5S; 3S,5S; 3S,5R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00050
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00051
    2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic 2R,4R; 2R,4S; 2S,4S; 2S,4R and Racemic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00052
  • TABLE 3
    Galactose, N-Acetylgalactosamine and Mannose
    conjugate building blocks for postsynthetic oligonucleotide conjugation.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00053
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00054
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00055
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00056
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00057
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00058
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00059
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00060
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00061
  • Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00062
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00063
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00064
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00065
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00066
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00067
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00068
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00069
    iRNA Agent Structure
  • The monomers described herein can be used to make oligonucleotides which are useful as iRNA agents, e.g., RNA molecules, (double-stranded; single-stranded) that mediate RNAi, e.g., with respect to an endogenous gene of a subject or to a gene of a pathogen. In most cases the iRNA agent will incorporate momomers described herein together with naturally occuring nucleosides or nucleotides or with other modified nucleosides or nucleotides. The modified monomers can be present at any position in the iRNA agent, e.g., at the terminii or in the middle region of an iRNA agent or in a duplex region or in an unpaired region. In a preferred embodiment iRNA agent can have any architecture, e.g., architecture described herein. E.g., it can be incorporated into an iRNA agent having an overhang structure, a hairpin or other single strand structure or a two-strand structure, as described herein.
  • An “RNA agent” as used herein, is an unmodified RNA, modified RNA, or nucleoside surrogate, all of which are defined herein (see, e.g., the section below entitled RNA Agents). While numerous modified RNAs and nucleoside surrogates are described, preferred examples include those which have greater resistance to nuclease degradation than do unmodified RNAs. Preferred examples include those which have a 2′ sugar modification, a modification in a single strand overhang, preferably a 3′ single strand overhang, or, particularly if single stranded, a 5′ modification which includes one or more phosphate groups or one or more analogs of a phosphate group.
  • An “iRNA agent” as used herein, is an RNA agent which can, or which can be cleaved into an RNA agent which can, down regulate the expression of a target gene, preferably an endogenous or pathogen target RNA. While not wishing to be bound by theory, an iRNA agent may act by one or more of a number of mechanisms, including post-transcriptional cleavage of a target mRNA sometimes referred to in the art as RNAi, or pre-transcriptional or pre-translational mechanisms. An iRNA agent can include a single strand or can include more than one strands, e.g., it can be a double stranded iRNA agent. If the iRNA agent is a single strand it is particularly preferred that it include a 5′ modification which includes one or more phosphate groups or one or more analogs of a phosphate group.
  • The RRMS-containing iRNA agent should include a region of sufficient homology to the target gene, and be of sufficient length in terms of nucleotides, such that the iRNA agent, or a fragment thereof, can mediate down regulation of the target gene. (For ease of exposition the term nucleotide or ribonucleotide is sometimes used herein in reference to one or more monomeric subunits of an RNA agent. It will be understood herein that the usage of the term “ribonucleotide” or “nucleotide”, herein can, in the case of a modified RNA or nucleotide surrogate, also refer to a modified nucleotide, or surrogate replacement moiety at one or more positions.) Thus, the iRNA agent is or includes a region which is at least partially, and in some embodiments fully, complementary to the target RNA. It is not necessary that there be perfect complementarity between the iRNA agent and the target, but the correspondence must be sufficient to enable the iRNA agent, or a cleavage product thereof, to direct sequence specific silencing, e.g., by RNAi cleavage of the target RNA, e.g., mRNA.
  • As discussed elsewhere herein, an iRNA agent will often be modified or include nucleoside surrogates in addition to the ribose replacement modification subunit (RRMS). Single stranded regions of an iRNA agent will often be modified or include nucleoside surrogates, e.g., the unpaired region or regions of a hairpin structure, e.g., a region which links two complementary regions, can have modifications or nucleoside surrogates. Modification to stabilize one or more 3′- or 5′-terminus of an iRNA agent, e.g., against exonucleases, or to favor the antisense sRNA agent to enter into RISC are also favored. Modifications can include C3 (or C6, C7, C12) amino linkers, thiol linkers, carboxyl linkers, non-nucleotidic spacers (C3, C6, C9, C12, abasic, triethylene glycol, hexaethylene glycol), special biotin or fluorescein reagents that come as phosphoramidites and that have another DMT-protected hydroxyl group, allowing multiple couplings during RNA synthesis.
  • In addition to homology to target RNA and the ability to down regulate a target gene, an iRNA agent will preferably have one or more of the following properties:
      • (1) it will be of the Formula 1, 2, 3, or 4 set out in the RNA Agent section below;
      • (2) if single stranded it will have a 5′ modification which includes one or more phosphate groups or one or more analogs of a phosphate group;
      • (3) it will, despite modifications, even to a very large number, or all of the nucleosides, have an antisense strand that can present bases (or modified bases) in the proper three dimensional framework so as to be able to form correct base pairing and form a duplex structure with a homologous target RNA which is sufficient to allow down regulation of the target, e.g., by cleavage of the target RNA;
      • (4) it will, despite modifications, even to a very large number, or all of the nucleosides, still have “RNA-like” properties, i.e., it will possess the overall structural, chemical and physical properties of an RNA molecule, even though not exclusively, or even partly, of ribonucleotide-based content. For example, an iRNA agent can contain, e.g., a sense and/or an antisense strand in which all of the nucleotide sugars contain e.g., 2′ fluoro in place of 2′ hydroxyl. This deoxyribonucleotide-containing agent can still be expected to exhibit RNA-like properties. While not wishing to be bound by theory, the electronegative fluorine prefers an axial orientation when attached to the C2′ position of ribose. This spatial preference of fluorine can, in turn, force the sugars to adopt a C3′-endo pucker. This is the same puckering mode as observed in RNA molecules and gives rise to the RNA-characteristic A-family-type helix. Further, since fluorine is a good hydrogen bond acceptor, it can participate in the same hydrogen bonding interactions with water molecules that are known to stabilize RNA structures. (Generally, it is preferred that a modified moiety at the 2′ sugar position will be able to enter into H-bonding which is more characteristic of the OH moiety of a ribonucleotide than the H moiety of a deoxyribonucleotide. A preferred iRNA agent will: exhibit a C3′-endo pucker in all, or at least 50, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% of its sugars; exhibit a C3′-endo pucker in a sufficient amount of its sugars that it can give rise to a the RNA-characteristic A-family-type helix; will have no more than 20, 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 sugar which is not a C3′-endo pucker structure. These limitations are particularly preferably in the antisense strand;
      • (4) regardless of the nature of the modification, and even though the RNA agent can contain deoxynucleotides or modified deoxynucleotides, particularly in overhang or other single strand regions, it is preferred that DNA molecules, or any molecule in which more than 50, 60, or 70% of the nucleotides in the molecule, or more than 50, 60, or 70% of the nucleotides in a duplexed region are deoxyribonucleotides, or modified deoxyribonucleotides which are deoxy at the 2′ position, are excluded from the definition of RNA agent.
  • A “single strand iRNA agent” as used herein, is an iRNA agent which is made up of a single molecule. It may include a duplexed region, formed by intra-strand pairing, e.g., it may be, or include, a hairpin or pan-handle structure. Single strand iRNA agents are preferably antisense with regard to the target molecule. In preferred embodiments single strand iRNA agents are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus. 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing. Suitable modifications include: 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-guanosine cap (7-methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N—O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P—O-5′), 5′-phosphorothiolate ((HO)2(O)P—S-5′); any additional combination of oxygen/sulfur replaced monophosphate, diphosphate and triphosphates (e.g. 5′-alpha-thiotriphosphate, 5′-gamma-thiotriphosphate, etc.), 5′-phosphoramidates ((HO)2(O)P—NH-5′, (HO)(NH2)(O)P—O-5′), 5′-alkylphosphonates (R=alkyl=methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′—, (OH)2(O)P-5′-CH2—), 5′-alkyletherphosphonates (R=alkylether=methoxymethyl (MeOCH2—), ethoxymethyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′—). (These modifications can also be used with the antisense strand of a double stranded iRNA.)
  • It may be desirable to modify one or both of the antisense and sense strands of a double strand iRNA agent. In some cases they will have the same modification or the same class of modification but in other cases the sense and antisense strand will have different modifications, e.g., in some cases it is desirable to modify only the sense strand. It may be desirable to modify only the sense strand, e.g., to inactivate it, e.g., the sense strand can be modified in order to inactivate the sense strand and prevent formation of an active sRNA/protein or RISC. This can be accomplished by a modification which prevents 5′-phosphorylation of the sense strand, e.g., by modification with a 5′-O-methyl ribonucleotide (see Nykänen et al., (2001) ATP requirements and small interfering RNA structure in the RNA interference pathway. Cell 107, 309-321.) Other modifications which prevent phosphorylation can also be used, e.g., simply substituting the 5′-OH by H rather than O—Me. Alternatively, a large bulky group may be added to the 5′-phosphate turning it into a phosphodiester linkage, though this may be less desirable as phosphodiesterases can cleave such a linkage and release a functional sRNA 5′-end. Antisense strand modifications include 5′ phosphorylation as well as any of the other 5′ modifications discussed herein, particularly the 5′ modifications discussed above in the section on single stranded iRNA molecules.
  • In some cases the sense and the antisense strands will include different modifications. Multiple different modifications can be included on the sense and antisense strands. The modifications on each strand may differ from each other, and may also differ from the various modifications on the other strand. For example, the sense strand may have a modification, e.g., a modification described herein, and the antisense strand may have a different modification, e.g., a different modification described herein. In other cases, one strand, such as the sense strand may have two different modifications, and the antisense strand may include a modification that differs from the at least two modifications on the sense strand.
  • It is preferred that the sense and antisense strands be chosen such that the ds iRNA agent includes a single strand or unpaired region at one or both ends of the molecule. Thus, a ds iRNA agent contains sense and antisense strands, preferable paired to contain an overhang, e.g., one or two 5′ or 3′ overhangs but preferably a 3′ overhang of 2-3 nucleotides. Most embodiments will have a 3′ overhang. Preferred sRNA agents will have single-stranded overhangs, preferably 3′ overhangs, of 1 or preferably 2 or 3 nucleotides in length at each end. The overhangs can be the result of one strand being longer than the other, or the result of two strands of the same length being staggered. 5′ ends are preferably phosphorylated.
  • Preferred lengths for the duplexed region is between 15 and 30, most preferably 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, and 23 nucleotides in length, e.g., in the sRNA agent range discussed above. sRNA agents can resemble in length and structure the natural Dicer processed products from long dsRNAs. Embodiments in which the two strands of the sRNA agent are linked, e.g., covalently linked are also included. Hairpin, or other single strand structures which provide the required double stranded region, and preferably a 3′ overhang are also within the invention.
  • As nucleic acids are polymers of subunits or monomers, many of the modifications described below occur at a position which is repeated within a nucleic acid, e.g., a modification of a base, or a phosphate moiety, or the a non-linking O of a phosphate moiety. In some cases the modification will occur at all of the subject positions in the nucleic acid but in many, and infact in most cases it will not. By way of example, a modification may only occur at a 3′ or 5′ terminal position, may only occur in a terminal regions, e.g. at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand. A modification may occur in a double strand region, a single strand region, or in both. A modification may occur only in the double strand region of an RNA or may only occur in a single strand region of an RNA. E.g., a phosphorothioate modification at a non-linking O position may only occur at one or both termini, may only occur in a terminal regions, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand, or may occur in double strand and single strand regions, particularly at termini. The 5′ end or ends can be phosphorylated.
  • In some embodiments it is particularly preferred, e.g., to enhance stability, to include particular bases in overhangs, or to include modified nucleotides or nucleotide surrogates, in single strand overhangs, e.g., in a 5′ or 3′ overhang, or in both. E.g., it can be desirable to include purine nucleotides in overhangs. In some embodiments all or some of the bases in a 3′ or 5′ overhang will be modified, e.g., with a modification described herein. Modifications can include, e.g., the use of modifications at the 2′ OH group of the ribose sugar, e.g., the use of deoxyribonucleotides, e.g., deoxythymidine, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, e.g., phosphothioate modifications. Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence.
  • Modifications and nucleotide surrogates are discussed below.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00070
  • The scaffold presented above in Formula 1 represents a portion of a ribonucleic acid. The basic components are the ribose sugar, the base, the terminal phosphates, and phosphate internucleotide linkers. Where the bases are naturally occurring bases, e.g., adenine, uracil, guanine or cytosine, the sugars are the unmodified 2′ hydroxyl ribose sugar (as depicted) and W, X, Y, and Z are all O, Formula 1 represents a naturally occurring unmodified oligoribonucleotide.
  • Unmodified oligoribonucleotides may be less than optimal in some applications, e.g., unmodified oligoribonucleotides can be prone to degradation by e.g., cellular nucleases. Nucleases can hydrolyze nucleic acid phosphodiester bonds. However, chemical modifications to one or more of the above RNA components can confer improved properties, and, e.g., can render oligoribonucleotides more stable to nucleases. Umodified oligoribonucleotides may also be less than optimal in terms of offering tethering points for attaching ligands or other moieties to an iRNA agent.
  • Modified nucleic acids and nucleotide surrogates can include one or more of:
      • (i) alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking (X and Y) phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking (W and Z) phosphate oxygens (When the phosphate is in the terminal position, one of the positions W or Z will not link the phosphate to an additional element in a naturally occurring ribonucleic acid. However, for simplicity of terminology, except where otherwise noted, the W position at the 5′end of a nucleic acid and the terminal Z position at the 3′end of a nucleic acid, are within the term “linking phosphate oxygens” as used herein.);
      • (ii) alteration, e.g., replacement, of a constituent of the ribose sugar, e.g., of the 2′ hydroxyl on the ribose sugar, or wholesale replacement of the ribose sugar with a structure other than ribose, e.g., as described herein;
      • (iii) wholesale replacement of the phosphate moiety (bracket I) with “dephospho” linkers;
      • (iv) modification or replacement of a naturally occurring base;
      • (v) replacement or modification of the ribose-phosphate backbone (bracket II);
      • (vi) modification of the 3′ end or 5′ end of the RNA, e.g., removal, modification or replacement of a terminal phosphate group or conjugation of a moiety, e.g. a fluorescently labeled moiety, to either the 3′ or 5′ end of RNA.
  • The terms replacement, modification, alteration, and the like, as used in this context, do not imply any process limitation, e.g., modification does not mean that one must start with a reference or naturally occurring ribonucleic acid and modify it to produce a modified ribonucleic acid bur rather modified simply indicates a difference from a naturally occurring molecule.
  • It is understood that the actual electronic structure of some chemical entities cannot be adequately represented by only one canonical form (i.e. Lewis structure). While not wishing to be bound by theory, the actual structure can instead be some hybrid or weighted average of two or more canonical forms, known collectively as resonance forms or structures. Resonance structures are not discrete chemical entities and exist only on paper. They differ from one another only in the placement or “localization” of the bonding and nonbonding electrons for a particular chemical entity. It can be possible for one resonance structure to contribute to a greater extent to the hybrid than the others. Thus, the written and graphical descriptions of the embodiments of the present invention are made in terms of what the art recognizes as the predominant resonance form for a particular species. For example, any phosphoroamidate (replacement of a nonlinking oxygen with nitrogen) would be represented by X═O and Y═N in the above figure.
  • Specific modifications are discussed in more detail below.
  • The Phosphate Group
  • The phosphate group is a negatively charged species. The charge is distributed equally over the two non-linking oxygen atoms (i.e., X and Y in Formula 1 above). However, the phosphate group can be modified by replacing one of the oxygens with a different substituent. One result of this modification to RNA phosphate backbones can be increased resistance of the oligoribonucleotide to nucleolytic breakdown. Thus while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable in some embodiments to introduce alterations which result in either an uncharged linker or a charged linker with unsymmetrical charge distribution.
  • Examples of modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate, phosphoroselenates, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidates, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters. Phosphorodithioates have both non-linking oxygens replaced by sulfur. Unlike the situation where only one of X or Y is altered, the phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of oligoribonucleotides diastereomers. Diastereomer formation can result in a preparation in which the individual diastereomers exhibit varying resistance to nucleases. Further, the hybridization affinity of RNA containing chiral phosphate groups can be lower relative to the corresponding unmodified RNA species. Thus, while not wishing to be bound by theory, modifications to both X and Y which eliminate the chiral center, e.g. phosphorodithioate formation, may be desirable in that they cannot produce diastereomer mixtures. Thus, X can be any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl). Thus Y can be any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl). Replacement of X and/or Y with sulfur is preferred.
  • The phosphate linker can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen (i.e., W or Z in Formula 1) with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates). The replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen (position W (3′) or position Z (5′). Replacement of W with carbon or Z with nitrogen is preferred.
  • Candidate agents can be evaluated for suitability as described below.
  • The Sugar Group
  • A modified RNA can include modification of all or some of the sugar groups of the ribonucleic acid. E.g., the 2′ hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents. While not being bound by theory, enhanced stability is expected since the hydroxyl can no longer be deprotonated to form a 2′ alkoxide ion. The 2′ alkoxide can catalyze degradation by intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the linker phosphorus atom. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable to some embodiments to introduce alterations in which alkoxide formation at the 2′ position is not possible.
  • Examples of “oxy”-2′ hydroxyl group modifications include alkoxy or aryloxy (OR, e.g., R═H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar); polyethyleneglycols (PEG), O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OR; “locked” nucleic acids (LNA) in which the 2′ hydroxyl is connected, e.g., by a methylene bridge, to the 4′ carbon of the same ribose sugar; O-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino) and aminoalkoxy, O(CH2)nAMINE, (e.g., AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino). It is noteworthy that oligonucleotides containing only the methoxyethyl group (MOE), (OCH2CH2OCH3, a PEG derivative), exhibit nuclease stabilities comparable to those modified with the robust phosphorothioate modification.
  • “Deoxy” modifications include hydrogen (i.e. deoxyribose sugars, which are of particular relevance to the overhang portions of partially ds RNA); halo (e.g., fluoro); amino (e.g. NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino), —NHC(O)R (R=alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar), cyano; mercapto; alkyl-thio-alkyl; thioalkoxy; and alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl, which may be optionally substituted with e.g., an amino functionality. Preferred substitutents are 2′-methoxyethyl, 2′-OCH3, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-C-allyl, and 2′-fluoro.
  • The sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose. Thus, a modified RNA can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar.
  • Modified RNAs can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′. These abasic sugars can also be further contain modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms.
  • To maximize nuclease resistance, the 2′ modifications can be used in combination with one or more phosphate linker modifications (e.g., phosphorothioate). The so-called “chimeric” oligonucleotides are those that contain two or more different modifications.
  • The modificaton can also entail the wholesale replacement of a ribose structure with another entity at one or more sites in the iRNA agent.
  • Candidate modifications can be evaluated as described below.
  • Replacement of the Phosphate Group
  • The phosphate group can be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors (cf. Bracket I in Formula 1 above). While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that since the charged phosphodiester group is the reaction center in nucleolytic degradation, its replacement with neutral structural mimics should impart enhanced nuclease stability. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable, in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the charged phosphate group is replaced by a neutral moiety.
  • Examples of moieties which can replace the phosphate group include siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino. Preferred replacements include the methylenecarbonylamino and methylenemethylimino groups.
  • Candidate modifications can be evaluated as described below.
  • Replacement of Ribophosphate Backbone
  • Oligonucleotide-mimicking scaffolds can also be constructed wherein the phosphate linker and ribose sugar are replaced by nuclease resistant nucleoside or nucleotide surrogates (see Bracket II of Formula 1 above). While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the absence of a repetitively charged backbone diminishes binding to proteins that recognize polyanions (e.g. nucleases). Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it can be desirable in some embodiment, to introduce alterations in which the bases are tethered by a neutral surrogate backbone.
  • Examples include the mophilino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid (PNA) nucleoside surrogates. A preferred surrogate is a PNA surrogate.
  • Candidate modifications can be evaluated as described below.
  • Terminal Modifications
  • The 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3′ end, 5′ end or both ends of the molecule. They can include modification or replacement of an entire terminal phosphate or of one or more of the atoms of the phosphate group. E.g., the 3′ and 5′ ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labeling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester). The functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a spacer. The terminal atom of the spacer can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3′ or C-5′ O, N, S or C group of the sugar. Alternatively, the spacer can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs). These spacers or linkers can include e.g., —(CH2)n—, —(CH2)nN—, —(CH2)nO—, —(CH2)nS—, O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OH (e.g., n=3 or 6), abasic sugars, amide, carboxy, amine, oxyamine, oxyimine, thioether, disulfide, thiourea, sulfonamide, or morpholino, or biotin and fluorescein reagents. When a spacer/phosphate-functional molecular entity-spacer/phosphate array is interposed between two strands of iRNA agents, this array can substitute for a hairpin RNA loop in a hairpin-type RNA agent. The 3′ end can be an —OH group. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that conjugation of certain moieties can improve transport, hybridization, and specificity properties. Again, while not wishing to be bound by theory, it may be desirable to introduce terminal alterations that improve nuclease resistance. Other examples of terminal modifications include dyes, intercalating agents (e.g. acridines), cross-linkers (e.g. psoralene, mitomycin C), porphyrins (TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine), artificial endonucleases (e.g. EDTA), lipophilic carriers (e.g., cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine) and peptide conjugates (e.g., antennapedia peptide, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (e.g., PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG]2, polyamino, alkyl, substituted alkyl, radiolabeled markers, enzymes, haptens (e.g. biotin), transport/absorption facilitators (e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid), synthetic ribonucleases (e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles).
  • Terminal modifications can be added for a number of reasons, including as discussed elsewhere herein to modulate activity or to modulate resistance to degradation. Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5′ end with phosphate or phosphate analogs. E.g., in preferred embodiments iRNA agents, especially antisense strands, are 5′ phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analog at the 5′ prime terminus. 5′-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing. Suitable modifications include: 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′); 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-guanosine cap (7-methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N—O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′); 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′); 5′-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P—O-5′), 5′-phosphorothiolate ((HO)2(O)P—S-5′); any additional combination of oxgen/sulfur replaced monophosphate, diphosphate and triphosphates (e.g. 5′-alpha-thiotriphosphate, 5′-gamma-thiotriphosphate, etc.), 5′-phosphoramidates ((HO)2(O)P—NH-5′, (HO)(NH2)(O)P—O-5′), 5′-alkylphosphonates (R-alkyl=methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′-, (OH)2(O)P-5′-CH2-), 5′-alkyletherphosphonates (R=alkylether=methoxymethyl (MeOCH2-), ethoxymethyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′-).
  • Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the preferred groups to be added include fluorophores, e.g., fluorscein or an Alexa dye, e.g., Alexa 488. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an RNA agent to another moiety; modifications useful for this include mitomycin C.
  • Candidate modifications can be evaluated as described below.
  • The Bases
  • Adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil are the most common bases found in RNA. These bases can be modified or replaced to provide RNA's having improved properties. E.g., nuclease resistant oligoribonucleotides can be prepared with these bases or with synthetic and natural nucleobases (e.g., inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, isoguanisine, or tubercidine) and any one of the above modifications. Alternatively, substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases, e.g., “unusual bases” and “universal bases” described herein, can be employed. Examples include without limitation 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine, dihydrouracil, 3-deaza-5-azacytosine, 2-aminopurine, 5-alkyluracil, 7-alkylguanine, 5-alkyl cytosine, 7-deazaadenine, N6,N6-dimethyladenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-amino-allyl-uracil, N3-methyluracil, substituted 1,2,4-triazoles, 2-pyridinone, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-methoxyuracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3carboxypropyl)uracil, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N4-acetyl cytosine, 2-thiocytosine, N6-methyladenine, N6-isopentyladenine, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, N-methylguanines, or O-alkylated bases. Further purines and pyrimidines include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, those disclosed in the Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. I., ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990, and those disclosed by Englisch et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613.
  • Generally, base changes are less preferred for promoting stability, but they can be useful for other reasons, e.g., some, e.g., 2,6-diaminopurine and 2 amino purine, are fluorescent. Modified bases can reduce target specificity. This should be taken into consideration in the design of iRNA agents.
  • Candidate modifications can be evaluated as described below.
  • Exemplary Modifications and Placement Within an iRNA Agent
  • Some modifications may preferably be included on an iRNA agent at a particular location, e.g., on the sense strand or antisense strand, or on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent. A preferred location of a modification on an iRNA agent, may confer preferred properties on the agent. For example, preferred locations of particular modifications may confer optimum gene silencing properties, or increased resistance to endonuclease or exonuclease activity. A modification described herein and below may be the sole modification, or the sole type of modification included on multiple ribonucleotides, or a modification can be combined with one or more other modifications described herein and below. For example, a modification on a sense strand of a dsRNA agent can be different than a modification on the antisense strand of an iRNA agent. Similary, two different modifications on the sense strand can differ from a modification on the antisense strand. Other additional unique modifications, without limitation, can be incorporates into the sense and antisense strands.
  • An iRNA agent may include a backbone modification to any nucleotide on an iRNA strand. For example, an iRNA agent may include a phosphorothioate linkage or P-alkyl modification in the linkages between one or more nucleotides of an iRNA agent. The nucleotides can be terminal nucleotides, e.g., nucleotides at the last position of a sense or antisense strand, or internal nucleotides.
  • An iRNA agent can include a a sugar modification, e.g., a 2′ or 3′ sugar modification. Exemplary sugar modifications include, for example, a 2′-O-methylated nucleotide, a 2′-deoxy nucleotide, (e.g., a 2′-deoxyfluoro nucleotide), a 2′-O-methoxyethyl nucleotide, a 2′-O-NMA, a 2′-DMAEOE, a 2′-aminopropyl, 2′-hydroxy, or a 2′-ara-fluoro or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), extended nucleic acid (ENA), hexose nucleic acid (HNA), or cyclohexene nucleic acid (CeNA). A 2′ modification is preferably 2′OMe, and more preferably, 2′-deoxyfluoro. When the modification is 2′OMe, the modification is preferably on the sense strand. When the modification is a 2′ fluoro, and the modification may be on the sense or antisense strand, or on both strands. A 2′-ara-fluoro modification will preferably be on the sense strand of the iRNA agent. An LNA modification will preferably be on the sense strand of the iRNA agent or on the
  • An iRNA agent may include a 3′ sugar modification, e.g., a 3′OMe modification. Preferably a 3′OMe modification is on the sense strand of the iRNA agent.
  • An iRNA agent may includes a 5′-methyl-pyrimidine (e.g., a 5′-methyl-uridine modification or a 5′-methyl-cytodine) modification.
  • The modifications described herein can be combined onto a single iRNA agent. For example, an iRNA agent may have a phosphorothioate linkage and a 2′ sugar modification, e.g., a 2′OMe or 2° F. modification. In another example, an iRNA agent may include at least one 5′ Me-pyrimidine and a 2′ sugar modification, e.g., a 2° F. or 2′OMe modification.
  • An iRNA agent may include a nucleobase modification, such as a cationic modification, such as a 3′-abasic cationic modification. The cationic modification can be e.g., an alkylamino-dT (e.g., a C6 amino-dT), an allylamino conjugate, a pyrrolidine conjugate, a pthalamido, a porphyrin, or a hydroxyprolinol conjugate, on one or more of the terminal nucleotides of the iRNA agent. When an alkylamino-dT conjugate is attached to the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the conjugate is preferably attached to the 3′ end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent. When a pyrrolidine linker is attached to the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the linker is preferably attached to the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand, or the 3′ end of the antisense strand. When a pyrrolidine linker is attached to the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the linker is preferably on the 3′ or 5′ end of the sense strand, and not on the 5′ end of the antisense strand.
  • An iRNA agent may include at least one conjugate, such as a lipophile, a terpene, a protein binding agent, a vitamin, a carbohydrate, or a peptide. For example, the conjugate can be naproxen, nitroindole (or another conjugate that contributes to stacking interactions), folate, ibuprofen, or a Cs pyrimidine linker. The conjugate can also be a glyceride lipid conjugate (e.g., a dialkyl glyceride derivatives), vitamin E conjugate, or a thio-cholesterol. In generally, and except where noted to the contrary below, when a conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand or on the 5′ end of the antisense strand, and preferably the conjugate is not on the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • When the conjugate is naproxen, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense or antisense strands. When the conjugate is cholesterol, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the cholesterol conjugate is preferably on the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand and preferably not present on the antisense strand. Cholesterol may be conjugated to the iRNA agent by a pyrrolidine linker, serinol linker, hydroxyprolinol linker, or disulfide linkage. A dU-cholesterol conjugate may also be conjugated to the iRNA agent by a disulfide linkage. When the conjugate is cholanic acid, and the conjugate is on the terminal nucleotide of a sense or antisense strand, the cholanic acid is preferably attached to the 5′ or 3′ end of the sense strand, or the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In one embodiment, the cholanic acid is attached to the 3′ end of the sense strand and the 3′ end of the antisense strand.
  • One or more nucleotides of an iRNA agent may have a 2′-5′ linkage. Preferably, the 2′-5′ linkage is on the sense strand. When the 2′-5′ linkage is on the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the 2′-5′ linkage occurs on the 5′ end of the sense strand.
  • The iRNA agent may include an L-sugar, preferably on the sense strand, and not on the antisense strand.
  • The iRNA agent may include a methylphosphonate modification. When the methylphosphonate is on the terminal nucleotide of an iRNA agent, the methylphosphonate is at the 3′ end of the sense or antisense strands of the iRNA agent.
  • An iRNA agent may be modified by replacing one or more ribonucleotides with deoxyribonucleotides. Preferably, adjacent deoxyribonucleotides are joined by phosphorothioate linkages, and the iRNA agent does not include more than four consecutive deoxyribonucleotides on the sense or the antisense strands.
  • An iRNA agent may include a difluorotoluyl (DFT) modification, e.g., 2,4-difluorotoluyl uracil, or a guanidine to inosine substitution.
  • The iRNA agent may include at least one 5′-uridine-adenine-3′ (5′-UA-3′) dinucleotide wherein the uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-uridine-guanine-3′ (5′-UG-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-cytidine-adenine-3′ (5′-CA-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-cytidine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-uridine-uridine-3′ (5′-UU-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-cytidine-cytidine-3′ (5′-CC-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-cytidine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-cytidine-uridine-3′ (5′-CU-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-cytidine is a 2′-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5′-uridine-cytidine-3′ (5′-UC-3′) dinucleotide, wherein the 5′-uridine is a 2′-modified nucleotide. The chemically modified nucleotide in the iRNA agent may be a 2′-O-methylated nucleotide. In some embodiments, the modified nucleotide can be a 2′-deoxy nucleotide, a 2′-deoxyfluoro nucleotide, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl nucleotide, a 2′-O-NMA, a 2′-DMAEOE, a 2′-aminopropyl, 2′-hydroxy, or a 2′-ara-fluoro, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), extended nucleic acid (ENA), hexose nucleic acid (HNA), or cyclohexene nucleic acid (CeNA). The iRNA agents including these modifications are particularly stabilized against exonuclease activity, when the modified dinucleotide occurs on a terminal end of the sense or antisense strand of an iRNA agent, and are otherwise particularly stabilized against endonuclease activity.
  • An iRNA agent may have a single overhang, e.g., one end of the iRNA agent has a 3′ or 5′ overhang and the other end of the iRNA agent is a blunt end, or the iRNA agent may have a double overhang, e.g., both ends of the iRNA agent have a 3′ or 5′ overhang, such as a dinuclotide overhang. In another altervative, both ends of the iRNA agent may have blunt ends.
  • The iRNA agent may further include a sense RNA strand and an antisense RNA strand, wherein the antisense RNA strand is 25 or fewer nucleotides in length, and includes an antisense nucleotide sequence having 18-25 nucleotides in length. The iRNA agent may further include a nucleotide overhang having 1 to 4 unpaired nucleotides, which may be at the 3′-end of the antisense RNA strand, and the nucleotide overhang may have the nucleotide sequence 5′-GC-3′ or 5′-CGC-3′. The unpaired nucleotides may have at least one phosphorothioate dinucleotide linkage, and at least one of the unpaired nucleotides may be chemically modified in the 2′-position. The doublestrand region of the iRNA agent may include phosphorothioate dinucleotide linkages on one or both of the sense and antisense strands. The antisense RNA strand and the sense RNA strand may be connected with a linker, e.g., a chemical linker such as hexaethylene glycol linker, a poly-(oxyphosphinico-oxy-1,3-propandiol) linker, an allyl linker, or a polyethylene glycol linker.
  • Evaluation of Candidate RNA's
  • One can evaluate a candidate RNA agent, e.g., a modified RNA, for a selected property by exposing the agent or modified molecule and a control molecule to the appropriate conditions and evaluating for the presence of the selected property. For example, resistance to a degradent can be evaluated as follows. A candidate modified RNA (and preferably a control molecule, usually the unmodified form) can be exposed to degradative conditions, e.g., exposed to a milieu, which includes a degradative agent, e.g., a nuclease. E.g., one can use a biological sample, e.g., one that is similar to a milieu, which might be encountered, in therapeutic use, e.g., blood or a cellular fraction, e.g., a cell-free homogenate or disrupted cells. The candidate and control could then be evaluated for resistance to degradation by any of a number of approaches. For example, the candidate and control could be labeled, preferably prior to exposure, with, e.g., a radioactive or enzymatic label, or a fluorescent label, such as Cy3 or Cy5. Control and modified RNA's can be incubated with the degradative agent, and optionally a control, e.g., an inactivated, e.g., heat inactivated, degradative agent. A physical parameter, e.g., size, of the modified and control molecules are then determined. They can be determined by a physical method, e.g., by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or a sizing column, to assess whether the molecule has maintained its original length, or assessed functionally. Alternatively, Northern blot analysis can be used to assay the length of an unlabeled modified molecule.
  • A functional assay can also be used to evaluate the candidate agent. A functional assay can be applied initially or after an earlier non-functional assay, (e.g., assay for resistance to degradation) to determine if the modification alters the ability of the molecule to silence gene expression. For example, a cell, e.g., a mammalian cell, such as a mouse or human cell, can be co-transfected with a plasmid expressing a fluorescent protein, e.g., GFP, and a candidate RNA agent homologous to the transcript encoding the fluorescent protein (see, e.g., WO 00/44914). For example, a modified dsRNA homologous to the GFP mRNA can be assayed for the ability to inhibit GFP expression by monitoring for a decrease in cell fluorescence, as compared to a control cell, in which the transfection did not include the candidate dsRNA, e.g., controls with no agent added and/or controls with a non-modified RNA added. Efficacy of the candidate agent on gene expression can be assessed by comparing cell fluorescence in the presence of the modified and unmodified dsRNA agents.
  • In an alternative functional assay, a candidate dsRNA agent homologous to an endogenous mouse gene, preferably a maternally expressed gene, such as c-mos, can be injected into an immature mouse oocyte to assess the ability of the agent to inhibit gene expression in vivo (see, e.g., WO 01/36646). A phenotype of the oocyte, e.g., the ability to maintain arrest in metaphase II, can be monitored as an indicator that the agent is inhibiting expression. For example, cleavage of c-mos mRNA by a dsRNA agent would cause the oocyte to exit metaphase arrest and initiate parthenogenetic development (Colledge et al. Nature 370: 65-68, 1994; Hashimoto et al. Nature, 370:68-71, 1994). The effect of the modified agent on target RNA levels can be verified by Northern blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target mRNA, or by Western blot to assay for a decrease in the level of target protein, as compared to a negative control. Controls can include cells in which with no agent is added and/or cells in which a non-modified RNA is added.
  • References
  • General References
  • The oligoribonucleotides and oligoribonucleosides used in accordance with this invention may be with solid phase synthesis, see for example “Oligonucleotide synthesis, a practical approach”, Ed. M. J. Gait, IRL Press, 1984; “Oligonucleotides and Analogues, A Practical Approach”, Ed. F. Eckstein, IRL Press, 1991 (especially Chapter 1, Modern machine-aided methods of oligodeoxyribonucleotide synthesis, Chapter 2, Oligoribonucleotide synthesis, Chapter 3,2′-O-Methyloligoribonucleotide-s: synthesis and applications, Chapter 4, Phosphorothioate oligonucleotides, Chapter 5, Synthesis of oligonucleotide phosphorodithioates, Chapter 6, Synthesis of oligo-2′-deoxyribonucleoside methylphosphonates, and. Chapter 7, Oligodeoxynucleotides containing modified bases. Other particularly useful synthetic procedures, reagents, blocking groups and reaction conditions are described in Martin, P., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504; Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 1992, 48, 2223-2311 and Beaucage, S. L. and Iyer, R. P., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 6123-6194, or references referred to therein.
  • Modification described in WO 00/44895, WO01/75164, or WO02/44321 can be used herein.
  • The disclosure of all publications, patents, and published patent applications listed herein are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Phosphate Group References
  • The preparation of phosphinate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270. The preparation of alkyl phosphonate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863. The preparation of phosphoramidite oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878. The preparation of phosphotriester oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243. The preparation of borano phosphate oligoribonucleotide is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198. The preparation of 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligoribonucleotides is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925. 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylenephosphonate oligoribonucleotides is described in An, H, et al. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2789-2801. Preparation of sulfur bridged nucleotides is described in Sproat et al. Nucleosides Nucleotides 1988, 7,651 and Crosstick et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 4693.
  • Sugar Group References
  • Modifications to the 2′ modifications can be found in Verma, S. et al. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 1998, 67, 99-134 and all references therein. Specific modifications to the ribose can be found in the following references: 2′-fluoro (Kawasaki et. al., J. Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 831-841), 2′-MOE (Martin, P. Helv. Chim. Acta 1996, 79, 1930-1938), “LNA” (Wengel, J. Acc. Chem. Res. 1999, 32, 301-310).
  • Replacement of the Phosphate Group References
  • Methylenemethylimino linked oligoribonucleosides, also identified herein as MMI linked oligoribonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligoribonucleosides, also identified herein as MDH linked oligoribonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-3 linked oligoribonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-4 linked oligoribonucleosides as well as mixed backbone compounds having, as for instance, alternating MMI and PO or PS linkages can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677 and in published PCT applications PCT/US92/04294 and PCT/US92/04305 (published as WO 92/20822 WO and 92/20823, respectively). Formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564. Ethylene oxide linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618. Siloxane replacements are described in Cormier, J. F. et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 1988, 16, 4583. Carbonate replacements are described in Tittensor, J. R. J. Chem. Soc. C 1971, 1933. Carboxymethyl replacements are described in Edge, M. D. et al. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1972, 1991. Carbamate replacements are described in Stirchak, E. P. Nucleic Acids Res. 1989, 17, 6129.
  • Replacement of the Phosphate-Ribose Backbone References
  • Cyclobutyl sugar surrogate compounds can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,359,044. Pyrrolidine sugar surrogate can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,134. Morpholino sugar surrogates can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,142,047 and 5,235,033, and other related patent disclosures. Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNAs) are known per se and can be prepared in accordance with any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 5-23. They may also be prepared in accordance with U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083.
  • Terminal Modification References
  • Terminal modifications are described in Manoharan, M. et al. Antisense and Nucleic Acid Drug Development 12, 103-128 (2002) and references therein.
  • Bases References
  • N-2 substitued purine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,459,255. 3-Deaza purine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,457,191. 5,6-Substituted pyrimidine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,614,617. 5-Propynyl pyrimidine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,484,908. Additional references can be disclosed in the above section on base modifications.
    • Preferred iRNA Agents
  • Preferred RNA agents have the following structure (see Formula 2 below):
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00071
  • Referring to Formula 2 above, R1, R2, and R3 are each, independently, H, (i.e. abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine, dihydrouracil, 3-deaza-5-azacytosine, 2-aminopurine, 5-alkyluracil, 7-alkylguanine, 5-alkyl cytosine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, N6, N6-dimethyladenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-amino-allyl-uracil, N3-methyluracil, substituted 1,2,4-triazoles, 2-pyridinone, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-methoxyuracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3carboxypropyl)uracil, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N4-acetyl cytosine, 2-thiocytosine, N6-methyladenine, N6-isopentyladenine, 2-methylthio-N-6-isopentenyladenine, N-methylguanines, or O-alkylated bases.
  • R4, R5, and R6 are each, independently, OR8, O(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2OR8; O(CH2)nR9; O(CH2)nOR9, H; halo; NH2; NHR8; N(R8)2; NH(CH2CH2NH)mCH2CH2NHR9; NHC(O)R8; cyano; mercapto, SR8; alkyl-thio-alkyl; alkyl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which may be optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, acylamino, alkylcarbamoyl, arylcarbamoyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkanesulfonyl, alkanesulfonamido, arenesulfonamido, aralkylsulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, acyloxy, cyano, or ureido; or R4, R5, or R6 together combine with R7 to form an [—O—CH2—] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
      • A1 is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00072
      • H; OH; OCH3; W1; an abasic nucleotide; or absent;
      • (a preferred A1, especially with regard to anti-sense strands, is chosen from 5′-monophosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O-5′), 5′-diphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′), 5′-triphosphate ((HO)2(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′), 5′-guanosine cap (7-methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′), 5′-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N—O-5′-(HO)(O)P—O—(HO)(O)P—O—P(HO)(O)—O-5′), 5′-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P—O-5′), 5′-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P—O-5′), 5′-phosphorothiolate ((HO)2(O)P—S-5′); any additional combination of oxgen/sulfur replaced monophosphate, diphosphate and triphosphates (e.g. 5′-alpha-thiotriphosphate, 5′-gamma-thiotriphosphate, etc.), 5′-phosphoramidates ((HO)2(O)P—NH-5′, (HO)(NH2)(O)P-0-5′), 5′-alkylphosphonates (R=alkyl=methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′-, (OH)2(O)P-5′-CH2—), 5′-alkyletherphosphonates (R=alkylether=methoxymethyl (MeOCH2—), ethoxymethyl, etc., e.g. RP(OH)(O)—O-5′-)).
      • A2 is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00073
      • A3 is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00074
      • and
      • A4 is:
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00075
      • H; Z4; an inverted nucleotide; an abasic nucleotide; or absent.
  • W1 is OH, (CH2)nR10, (CH2)nNHR10, (CH2)nOR10, (CH2)nSR10; O(CH2)nR10; O(CH2)nOR10, O(CH2)nNR10, O(CH2)nSR10; O(CH2)nSS(CH2)nOR10, O(CH2)nC(O)OR10, NH(CH2)nR10; NH(CH2)nNR10; NH(CH2)nOR10, NH(CH2)nSR10; S(CH2)nR10, S(CH2)nNR10, S(CH2)nOR10, S(CH2)nSR10O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OR10; O(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2NHR10, NH(CH2CH2NH)mCH2CH2NHR10; Q-R10, O-Q-R10 N-Q-R10, S-Q-R10 or —O—. W4 is O, CH2, NH, or S.
  • X1, X2, X3, and X4 are each, independently, O or S.
  • Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4 are each, independently, OH, O—, OR8, S, Se, BH3 −, H, NHR9, N(R9)2 alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Z1, Z2, and Z3 are each independently O, CH2, NH, or S. Z4 is OH, (CH2)nR10, (CH2)nNHR10, (CH2). OR10, (CH2)nSR10; O(CH2)nR10; O(CH2)nOR10, O(CH2)nNR10, O(CH2)nSR10, O(CH2)nSS(CH2)nOR10, O(CH2)nC(O)OR10; NH(CH2)nR10; NH(CH2)nNR10; NH(CH2)nOR10, NH(CH2)nSR10; S(CH2)nR10, S(CH2)nNR10, S(CH2)nOR10, S(CH2)nSR10O(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2OR10, O(CH2CH2O)mCH2CH2NHR10, NH(CH2CH2NH)mCH2CH2NHR10; Q-R10, O-Q-R10 N-Q-R10, S-Q-R10.
  • x is 5-100, chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein.
  • R7 is H; or is together combined with R4, R5, or R6 to form an [—O—CH2—] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
  • R8 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, amino acid, or sugar; R9 is NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid; and R10 is H; fluorophore (pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes); sulfur, silicon, boron or ester protecting group; intercalating agents (e.g. acridines), cross-linkers (e.g. psoralene, mitomycin C), porphyrins (TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine), artificial endonucleases (e.g. EDTA), lipohilic carriers (cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1-pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, bomeol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, O3-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, O3-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine)and peptide conjugates (e.g., antennapedia peptide, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (e.g., PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG]2, polyamino; alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl; radiolabelled markers, enzymes, haptens (e.g. biotin), transport/absorption facilitators (e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid), synthetic ribonucleases (e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles); or an RNA agent. m is 0-1,000,000, and n is 0-20. Q is a spacer selected from the group consisting of abasic sugar, amide, carboxy, oxyamine, oxyimine, thioether, disulfide, thiourea, sulfonamide, or morpholino, biotin or fluorescein reagents.
  • Preferred RNA agents in which the entire phosphate group has been replaced have the following structure (see Formula 3 below):
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00076
  • Referring to Formula 3, A10-A40 is L-G-L; A10 and/or A40 may be absent, in which L is a linker, wherein one or both L may be present or absent and is selected from the group consisting of CH2(CH2)g; N(CH2)g; O(CH2)g; S(CH2)g. G is a functional group selected from the group consisting of siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino.
  • R10, R20, and R30 are each, independently, H, (i.e. abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine, dihydrouracil, 3-deaza-5-azacytosine, 2-aminopurine, 5-alkyluracil, 7-alkylguanine, 5-alkyl cytosine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, N6, N6-dimethyladenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-amino-allyl-uracil, N3-methyluracil substituted 1,2,4-triazoles, 2-pyridinone, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-methoxyuracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3carboxypropyl)uracil, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N4-acetyl cytosine, 2-thiocytosine, N6-methyladenine, N6-isopentyladenine, 2-methylthio-N-6-isopentenyladenine, N-methylguanines, or O-alkylated bases.
  • R40, R50, and R60 are each, independently, OR8, O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OR8; O(CH2)nR9; O(CH2)nOR9, H; halo; NH2; NHR8; N(R8)2; NH(CH2CH2NH)mCH2CH2R9; NHC(O)R8; cyano; mercapto, SR7; alkyl-thio-alkyl; alkyl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, each of which may be optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, acylamino, alkylcarbamoyl, arylcarbamoyl, aminoalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, carboxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkanesulfonyl, alkanesulfonamido, arenesulfonamido, aralkylsulfonamido, alkylcarbonyl, acyloxy, cyano, and ureido groups; or R40, R50, or R60 together combine with R70 to form an [—O—CH2—] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
  • x is 5-100 or chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein.
  • R70 is H; or is together combined with R40, R50, or R60 to form an [—O—CH2—] covalently bound bridge between the sugar 2′ and 4′ carbons.
  • R8 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, amino acid, or sugar; and R9 is NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid. m is 0-1,000,000, n is 0-20, and g is 0-2.
  • Preferred nucleoside surrogates have the following structure (see Formula 4 below):
    SLR100-(M-SLR200)x-M-SLR300  FORMULA 4
  • S is a nucleoside surrogate selected from the group consisting of mophilino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid. L is a linker and is selected from the group consisting of CH2(CH2)g; N(CH2)g; O(CH2)g; S(CH2)g; —C(O)(CH2)n-or may be absent. M is an amide bond; sulfonamide; sulfinate; phosphate group; modified phosphate group as described herein; or may be absent.
  • R100, R200, and R300 are each, independently, H (i.e., abasic nucleotides), adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil, inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularine, tubercidine, isoguanisine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 5-halouracil, 5-(2-aminopropyl)uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine, dihydrouracil, 3-deaza-5-azacytosine, 2-aminopurine, 5-alkyluracil, 7-alkylguanine, 5-alkyl cytosine, 7-deazaadenine, 7-deazaguanine, N6, N6-dimethyladenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-amino-allyl-uracil, N3-methyluracil substituted 1, 2,4,-triazoles, 2-pyridinones, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-methoxyuracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3carboxypropyl)uracil, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N4-acetyl cytosine, 2-thiocytosine, N6-methyladenine, N6-isopentyladenine, 2-methylthio-N-6-isopentenyladenine, N-methylguanines, or O-alkylated bases.
  • x is 5-100, or chosen to comply with a length for an RNA agent described herein; and g is 0-2.
  • Nuclease Resistant Monomers
  • The monomers and methods described herein can be used to prepare an RNA, e.g., an iRNA agent, that incorporates a nuclease resistant monomer (NRM), such as those described herein and those described in copending, co-owned U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/469,612, filed on May 9, 2003, and International Application No. PCT/US04/07070, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • An iRNA agent can include monomers which have been modifed so as to inhibit degradation, e.g., by nucleases, e.g., endonucleases or exonucleases, found in the body of a subject. These monomers are referred to herein as NRMs, or nuclease resistance promoting monomers or modifications. In many cases these modifications will modulate other properties of the iRNA agent as well, e.g., the ability to interact with a protein, e.g., a transport protein, e.g., serum albumin, or a member of the RISC(RNA-induced Silencing Complex), or the ability of the first and second sequences to form a duplex with one another or to form a duplex with another sequence, e.g., a target molecule.
  • While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that modifications of the sugar, base, and/or phosphate backbone in an iRNA agent can enhance endonuclease and exonuclease resistance, and can enhance interactions with transporter proteins and one or more of the functional components of the RISC complex. Preferred modifications are those that increase exonuclease and endonuclease resistance and thus prolong the half-life of the iRNA agent prior to interaction with the RISC complex, but at the same time do not render the iRNA agent resistant to endonuclease activity in the RISC complex. Again, while not wishing to be bound by any theory, it is believed that placement of the modifications at or near the 3′ and/or 5′ end of antisense strands can result in iRNA agents that meet the preferred nuclease resistance criteria delineated above. Again, still while not wishing to be bound by any theory, it is believed that placement of the modifications at e.g., the middle of a sense strand can result in iRNA agents that are relatively less likely to undergo off-targeting.
  • Modifications described herein can be incorporated into any double-stranded RNA and RNA-like molecule described herein, e.g., an iRNA agent. An iRNA agent may include a duplex comprising a hybridized sense and antisense strand, in which the antisense strand and/or the sense strand may include one or more of the modifications described herein. The anti sense strand may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at one or more positions that occur 1-6 (e.g., 1-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2) nucleotides from either end of the strand. The sense strand may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at any one of the intervening positions between the two ends of the strand. The iRNA agent may also include a duplex comprising two hybridized antisense strands. The first and/or the second antisense strand may include one or more of the modifications described herein. Thus, one and/or both antisense strands may include modifications at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end and/or at one or more positions that occur 1-6 (e.g., 1-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2) nucleotides from either end of the strand. Particular configurations are discussed below.
  • Modifications that can be useful for producing iRNA agents that meet the preferred nuclease resistance criteria delineated above can include one or more of the following chemical and/or stereochemical modifications of the sugar, base, and/or phosphate backbone:
      • (i) chiral (SP) thioates. Thus, preferred NRMs include nucleotide dimers with an enriched or pure for a particular chiral form of a modified phosphate group containing a heteroatom at the nonbridging position, e.g., Sp or Rp, at the position X, where this is the position normally occupied by the oxygen. The atom at X can also be S, Se, Nr2, or Br3. When X is S, enriched or chirally pure Sp linkage is preferred. Enriched means at least 70, 80, 90, 95, or 99% of the preferred form. Such NRMs are discussed in more detail below;
      • (ii) attachment of one or more cationic groups to the sugar, base, and/or the phosphorus atom of a phosphate or modified phosphate backbone moiety. Thus, preferred NRMs include monomers at the terminal position derivatized at a cationic group. As the 5′ end of an antisense sequence should have a terminal —OH or phosphate group this NRM is preferably not used at the 5′ end of an anti-sense sequence. The group should be attached at a position on the base which minimizes interference with H bond formation and hybridization, e.g., away form the face which interacts with the complementary base on the other strand, e.g, at the 5′ position of a pyrimidine or a 7-position of a purine. These are discussed in more detail below;
      • (iii) nonphosphate linkages at the termini. Thus, preferred NRMs include Non-phosphate linkages, e.g., a linkage of 4 atoms which confers greater resistance to cleavage than does a phosphate bond. Examples include 3′CH2—NCH3—O—CH2-5′ and 3′ CH2—NH—(O═)—CH2-5′;
      • (iv) 3′-bridging thiophosphates and 5′-bridging thiophosphates. Thus, preferred NRM's can included these structures;
      • (v) L-RNA, 2′-5′ linkages, inverted linkages, a-nucleosides. Thus, other preferred NRM's include: L nucleosides and dimeric nucleotides derived from L-nucleosides; 2′-5′ phosphate, non-phosphate and modified phosphate linkages (e.g., thiophosphates, phosphoramidates and boronophosphates); dimers having inverted linkages, e.g., 3′-3′ or 5′-5′ linkages; monomers having an alpha linkage at the 1′ site on the sugar, e.g., the structures described herein having an alpha linkage;
      • (vi) conjugate groups. Thus, preferred NRM's can include e.g., a targeting moiety or a conjugated ligand described herein conjugated with the monomer, e.g., through the sugar, base, or backbone;
      • (vi) abasic linkages. Thus, preferred NRM's can include an abasic monomer, e.g., an abasic monomer as described herein (e.g., a nucleobaseless monomer); an aromatic or heterocyclic or polyheterocyclic aromatic monomer as described herein; and
      • (vii) 5′-phosphonates and 5′-phosphate prodrugs. Thus, preferred NRM's include monomers, preferably at the terminal position, e.g., the 5′ position, in which one or more atoms of the phosphate group is derivatized with a protecting group, which protecting group or groups, are removed as a result of the action of a component in the subject's body, e.g, a carboxyesterase or an enzyme present in the subject's body. E.g., a phosphate prodrug in which a carboxy esterase cleaves the protected molecule resulting in the production of a thioate anion which attacks a carbon adjacent to the 0 of a phosphate and resulting in the production of an unprotected phosphate.
  • One or more different NRM modifications can be introduced into an iRNA agent or into a sequence of an iRNA agent. An NRM modification can be used more than once in a sequence or in an iRNA agent. As some NRM's interfere with hybridization the total number incorporated, should be such that acceptable levels of iRNA agent duplex formation are maintained.
  • In some embodiments NRM modifications are introduced into the terminal the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of a sequence (a sense strand or sequence) which does not target a desired sequence or gene in the subject. This can reduce off-target silencing.
  • Chiral SP Thioates
  • A modification can include the alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking (X and Y) phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking (W and Z) phosphate oxygens. Formula X below depicts a phosphate moiety linking two sugar/sugar surrogate-base moieties, SB1 and SB2.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00077
  • In certain embodiments, one of the non-linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphate backbone moiety (X and Y) can be replaced by any one of the following: S, Se, BR3 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, etc.), C (i.e., an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc.), H, NR2 (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, etc.), or OR (R is alkyl or aryl). The phosphorus atom in an unmodified phosphate group is achiral. However, replacement of one of the non-linking oxygens with one of the above atoms or groups of atoms renders the phosphorus atom chiral; in other words a phosphorus atom in a phosphate group modified in this way is a stereogenic center. The stereogenic phosphorus atom can possess either the “R” configuration (herein RP) or the “S” configuration (herein SP). Thus if 60% of a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms have the RP configuration, then the remaining 40% of the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms have the SP configuration.
  • In some embodiments, iRNA agents, having phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by another atom or group of atoms, may contain a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which at least about 50% of these atoms (e.g., at least about 60% of these atoms, at least about 70% of these atoms, at least about 80% of these atoms, at least about 90% of these atoms, at least about 95% of these atoms, at least about 98% of these atoms, at least about 99% of these atoms) have the SP configuration. Alternatively, iRNA agents having phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by another atom or group of atoms may contain a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which at least about 50% of these atoms (e.g., at least about 60% of these atoms, at least about 70% of these atoms, at least about 80% of these atoms, at least about 90% of these atoms, at least about 95% of these atoms, at least about 98% of these atoms, at least about 99% of these atoms) have the RP configuration. In other embodiments, the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the SP configuration and may be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the RP configuration. In still other embodiments, the population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the RP configuration and may be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the SP configuration. As used herein, the phrase “substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the RP configuration” means that moieties containing stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the RP configuration cannot be detected by conventional methods known in the art (chiral HPLC, 1H NMR analysis using chiral shift reagents, etc.). As used herein, the phrase “substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the SP configuration” means that moieties containing stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the SP configuration cannot be detected by conventional methods known in the art (chiral HPLC, 1H NMR analysis using chiral shift reagents, etc.).
  • In a preferred embodiment, modified iRNA agents contain a phosphorothioate group, i.e., a phosphate groups in which a phosphate non-linking oxygen has been replaced by a sulfur atom. In an especially preferred embodiment, the population of phosphorothioate stereogenic phosphorus atoms may have the SP configuration and be substantially free of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having the RP configuration.
  • Phosphorothioates may be incorporated into iRNA agents using dimers e.g., formulas X-1 and X-2. The former can be used to introduce phosphorothioate
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00078
    at the 3′ end of a strand, while the latter can be used to introduce this modification at the 5′ end or at a position that occurs e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 nucleotides from either end of the strand. In the above formulas, Y can be 2-cyanoethoxy, W and Z can be O, R2′ can be, e.g., a substituent that can impart the C-3 endo configuration to the sugar (e.g., OH, F, OCH3), DMT is dimethoxytrityl, and “BASE” can be a natural, unusual, or a universal base.
  • X-1 and X-2 can be prepared using chiral reagents or directing groups that can result in phosphorothioate-containing dimers having a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms having essentially only the RP configuration (i.e., being substantially free of the SP configuration) or only the SP configuration (i.e., being substantially free of the RP configuration). Alternatively, dimers can be prepared having a population of stereogenic phosphorus atoms in which about 50% of the atoms have the RP configuration and about 50% of the atoms have the SP configuration. Dimers having stereogenic phosphorus atoms with the RP configuration can be identified and separated from dimers having stereogenic phosphorus atoms with the SP configuration using e.g., enzymatic degradation and/or conventional chromatography techniques.
  • Cationic Groups
  • Modifications can also include attachment of one or more cationic groups to the sugar, base, and/or the phosphorus atom of a phosphate or modified phosphate backbone moiety. A cationic group can be attached to any atom capable of substitution on a natural, unusual or universal base. A preferred position is one that does not interfere with hybridization, i.e., does not interfere with the hydrogen bonding interactions needed for base pairing. A cationic group can be attached e.g., through the C2′ position of a sugar or analogous position in a cyclic or acyclic sugar surrogate. Cationic groups can include e.g., protonated amino groups, derived from e.g., O-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino); aminoalkoxy, e.g., O(CH2)nAMINE, (e.g., AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine, polyamino); amino (e.g. NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); or NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE (AMINE=NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino).
  • Nonphosphate Linkages
  • Modifications can also include the incorporation of nonphosphate linkages at the 5′ and/or 3′ end of a strand. Examples of nonphosphate linkages which can replace the phosphate group include methyl phosphonate, hydroxylamino, siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino. Preferred replacements include the methyl phosphonate and hydroxylamino groups.
  • 3′-bridging Thiophosphates and 5′-bridging Thiophosphates, Locked-RNA, 2′-5′ Likages, Inverted Linkages, α-nucleosides: Conjugate Groups; Abasic Linkages; and 5′-phosphonates and 5′-phosphate Prodrugs
  • Referring to formula X above, modifications can include replacement of one of the bridging or linking phosphate oxygens in the phosphate backbone moiety (W and Z). Unlike the situation where only one of X or Y is altered, the phosphorus center in the phosphorodithioates is achiral which precludes the formation of iRNA agents containing a stereogenic phosphorus atom.
  • Modifications can also include linking two sugars via a phosphate or modified phosphate group through the 2′ position of a first sugar and the 5′ position of a second sugar. Also contemplated are inverted linkages in which both a first and second sugar are eached linked through the respective 3′ positions. Modified RNA's can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C-1′. The sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose. Thus, a modified iRNA agent can include nucleotides containing e.g., arabinose, as the sugar. In another subset of this modification, the natural, unusual, or universal base may have the α-configuration. Modifcations can also include L-RNA.
  • Modifications can also include 5′-phosphonates, e.g., P(O)(O−)2—X—C5′-sugar (X═CH2, CF2, CHF and 5′-phosphate prodrugs, e.g., P(O)[OCH2CH2SC(O)R]2CH2C5′-sugar. In the latter case, the prodrug groups may be decomposed via reaction first with carboxy esterases. The remaining ethyl thiolate group via intramolecular S N2 displacement can depart as episulfide to afford the underivatized phosphate group.
  • Modification can also include the addition of conjugating groups described elseqhere herein, which are prefereably attached to an iRNA agent through any amino group available for conjugation.
  • Nuclease resistant modifications include some which can be placed only at the terminus and others which can go at any position. Generally the modifications that can inhibit hybridization so it is preferably to use them only in terminal regions, and preferrable to not use them at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of an sequence which targets a subject sequence or gene. The can be used anywhere in a sense sequence, provided that sufficient hybridization between the two sequences of the iRNA agent is maintained. In some embodiments it is desirabable to put the NRM at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region of a sequence which does not target a subject sequence or gene, as it can minimize off-target silencing.
  • In addition, an iRNA agent described herein can have an overhang which does not form a duplex structure with the other sequence of the iRNA agent—it is an overhang, but it does hybridize, either with itself, or with another nucleic acid, other than the other sequence of the iRNA agent.
  • In most cases, the nuclease-resistance promoting modifications will be distributed differently depending on whether the sequence will target a sequence in the subject (often referred to as an anti-sense sequence) or will not target a sequence in the subject (often referred to as a sense sequence). If a sequence is to target a sequence in the subject, modifications which interfer with or inhibit endonuclease cleavage should not be inserted in the region which is subject to RISC mediated cleavage, e.g., the cleavage site or the cleavage region (As described in Elbashir et al., 2001, Genes and Dev. 15: 188, hereby incorporated by reference, cleavage of the target occurs about in the middle of a 20 or 21 nt guide RNA, or about 10 or 11 nucleotides upstream of the first nucleotide which is complementary to the guide sequence. As used herein cleavage site refers to the nucleotide on either side of the cleavage site, on the target or on the iRNA agent strand which hybridizes to it. Cleavage region means an nucleotide with 1, 2, or 3 nucletides of the cleave site, in either direction.)
  • Such modifications can be introduced into the terminal regions, e.g., at the terminal position or with 2, 3, 4, or 5 positions of the terminus, of a sequence which targets or a sequence which does not target a sequence in the subject.
  • An iRNA agent can have a first and a second strand chosen from the following:
      • a first strand which does not target a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end;
      • a first strand which does not target a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end;
      • a first strand which does not target a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end and which has a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end;
      • a first strand which does not target a sequence and which has an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region;
      • a first strand which does not target a sequence and which has an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region and one or more of an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end, a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end, or NRM modifications at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from both the 3′ and the 5′ end; and
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand);
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end and which has a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which preferably does not have an an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which does not have an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region and one or more of an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end, a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end, or NRM modifications at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from both the 3′ and the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand).
  • An iRNA agent can also target two sequences and can have a first and second strand chosen from:
      • a first strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end;
      • a first strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand);
      • a first strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end and which has a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end;
      • a first strand which targets a sequence and which preferably does not have an an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region;
      • a first strand which targets a sequence and which dose not have an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region and one or more of an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end, a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end, or NRM modifications at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from both the 3′ and the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand) and a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand);
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which has an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end and which has a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which preferably does not have an an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region;
      • a second strand which targets a sequence and which dose not have an NRM modification at the cleavage site or in the cleavage region and one or more of an NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 3′ end, a NRM modification at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from the 5′ end, or NRM modifications at or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 positions from both the 3′ and the 5′ end (5′ end NRM modifications are preferentially not at the terminus but rather at a position 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 away from the 5′ terminus of an antisense strand).
    Ribose Mimics
  • The monomers and methods described herein can be used to prepare an RNA, e.g., an iRNA agent, that incorporates a ribose mimic, such as those described herein and those described in copending co-owned U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/454,962, filed on Mar. 13, 2003, and International Application No. PCT/US04/07070, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Thus, an aspect of the invention features an iRNA agent that includes a secondary hydroxyl group, which can increase efficacy and/or confer nuclease resistance to the agent. Nucleases, e.g., cellular nucleases, can hydrolyze nucleic acid phosphodiester bonds, resulting in partial or complete degradation of the nucleic acid. The secondary hydroxy group confers nuclease resistance to an iRNA agent by rendering the iRNA agent less prone to nuclease degradation relative to an iRNA which lacks the modification. While not wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that the presence of a secondary hydroxyl group on the iRNA agent can act as a structural mimic of a 3′ ribose hydroxyl group, thereby causing it to be less susceptible to degradation.
  • The secondary hydroxyl group refers to an “OH” radical that is attached to a carbon atom substituted by two other carbons and a hydrogen. The secondary hydroxyl group that confers nuclease resistance as described above can be part of any acyclic carbon-containing group. The hydroxyl may also be part of any cyclic carbon-containing group, and preferably one or more of the following conditions is met (1) there is no ribose moiety between the hydroxyl group and the terminal phosphate group or (2) the hydroxyl group is not on a sugar moiety which is coupled to a base. The hydroxyl group is located at least two bonds (e.g., at least three bonds away, at least four bonds away, at least five bonds away, at least six bonds away, at least seven bonds away, at least eight bonds away, at least nine bonds away, at least ten bonds away, etc.) from the terminal phosphate group phosphorus of the iRNA agent. In preferred embodiments, there are five intervening bonds between the terminal phosphate group phosphorus and the secondary hydroxyl group.
  • Preferred iRNA agent delivery modules with five intervening bonds between the terminal phosphate group phosphorus and the secondary hydroxyl group have the following structure (see formula Y below):
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00079
  • Referring to formula Y, A is an iRNA agent, including any iRNA agent described herein. The iRNA agent may be connected directly or indirectly (e.g., through a spacer or linker) to “W” of the phosphate group. These spacers or linkers can include e.g., —(CH2)n—, —(CH2)nN—, —(CH2)nO—, —(CH2)nS—, O(CH2CH2O)nCH2CH2OH (e.g., n=3 or 6), abasic sugars, amide, carboxy, amine, oxyamine, oxyimine, thioether, disulfide, thiourea, sulfonamide, or morpholino, or biotin and fluorescein reagents.
  • The iRNA agents can have a terminal phosphate group that is unmodified (e.g., W, X, Y, and Z are O) or modified. In a modified phosphate group, W and Z can be independently NH, O, or S; and X and Y can be independently S, Se, BH3 −, C1-C6 alkyl, C6-C10 aryl, H, O, O−, alkoxy or amino (including alkylamino, arylamino, etc.). Preferably, W, X and Z are O and Y is S.
  • R1 and R3 are each, independently, hydrogen; or C1-C100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl.
  • R2 is hydrogen; C1-C100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R2 may be taken together with with R4 or R6 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R4 is hydrogen; C1-C100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R4 may be taken together with with R2 or R5 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R5 is hydrogen, C1-C100 alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl; or, when n is 1, R5 may be taken together with with R4 to form a ring of 5-12 atoms.
  • R6 is hydrogen, C1-C100 alkyl, optionally substituted with hydroxyl, amino, halo, phosphate or sulfate and/or may be optionally inserted with N, O, S, alkenyl or alkynyl, or, when n is 1, R6 may be taken together with with R2 to form a ring of 6-10 atoms;
      • R7 is hydrogen, C1-C100 alkyl, or C(O)(CH2)qC(O)NHR9; T is hydrogen or a functional group; n and q are each independently 1-100; R8 is C1-C10 alkyl or C6-C10 aryl; and R9 is hydrogen, C1-C10 alkyl, C6-C10 aryl or a solid support agent.
  • Preferred embodiments may include one of more of the following subsets of iRNA agent delivery modules.
  • In one subset of RNAi agent delivery modules, A can be connected directly or indirectly through a terminal 3′ or 5′ ribose sugar carbon of the RNA agent.
  • In another subset of RNAi agent delivery modules, X, W, and Z are O and Y is S.
  • In still yet another subset of RNAi agent delivery modules, n is 1, and R2 and R6 are taken together to form a ring containing six atoms and R4 and R5 are taken together to form a ring containing six atoms. Preferably, the ring system is a trans-decalin. For example, the RNAi agent delivery module of this subset can include a compound of Formula (Y-1):
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00080
  • The functional group can be, for example, a targeting group (e.g., a steroid or a carbohydrate), a reporter group (e.g., a fluorophore), or a label (an isotopically labelled moiety). The targeting group can further include protein binding agents, endothelial cell targeting groups (e.g., RGD peptides and mimetics), cancer cell targeting groups (e.g., folate Vitamin B12, Biotin), bone cell targeting groups (e.g., bisphosphonates, polyglutamates, polyaspartates), multivalent mannose (for e.g., macrophage testing), lactose, galactose, N-acetyl-galactosamine, monoclonal antibodies, glycoproteins, lectins, melanotropin, or thyrotropin.
  • As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. The synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • In one embodiment, the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition containing a modified iRNA agent, as described in the preceding sections, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, as described below. A pharmaceutical composition including the modified iRNA agent is useful for treating a disease caused by expression of a target gene. In this aspect of the invention, the iRNA agent of the invention is formulated as described below. The pharmaceutical composition is administered in a dosage sufficient to inhibit expression of the target gene.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are administered in dosages sufficient to inhibit the expression or activity of the target gene. Compositions containing the iRNA agent of the invention can be administered at surprisingly low dosages. A maximum dosage of 5 mg iRNA agent per kilogram body weight per day may be sufficient to inhibit or completely suppress the expression or activity of the target gene.
  • In general, a suitable dose of modified iRNA agent will be in the range of 0.001 to 500 milligrams per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 100 milligrams per kilogram, about 1 milligrams per kilogram to about 75 milligrams per kilogram, about 10 micrograms per kilogram to about 50 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram). The pharmaceutical composition may be administered once per day, or the iRNA agent may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day. In that case, the iRNA agent contained in each sub-dose must be correspondingly smaller in order to achieve the total daily dosage. The dosage unit can also be compounded for delivery over several days, e.g., using a conventional sustained release formulation which provides sustained release of the iRNA agent over a several day period. Sustained release formulations are well known in the art. In this embodiment, the dosage unit contains a corresponding multiple of the daily dose.
  • The skilled artisan will appreciate that certain factors may influence the dosage and timing required to effectively treat a subject, including but not limited to the severity of the infection or disease, previous treatments, the general health and/or age of the subject, and other diseases present. Moreover, treatment of a subject with a therapeutically effective amount of a composition can include a single treatment or a series of treatments. Estimates of effective dosages and in vivo half-lives for the individual iRNA agent encompassed by the invention can be made using conventional methodologies or on the basis of in vivo testing using an appropriate animal model, as described elsewhere herein.
  • Advances in mouse genetics have generated a number of mouse models for the study of various human diseases. For example, mouse repositories can be found at The Jackson Laboratory, Charles River Laboratories, Taconic, Harlan, Mutant Mouse Regional Resource Centers (MMRRC) National Network and at the European Mouse Mutant Archive. Such models may be used for in vivo testing of iRNA agent, as well as for determining a therapeutically effective dose.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions encompassed by the invention may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration. In preferred embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection. The pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • For oral administration, the iRNA agent useful in the invention will generally be provided in the form of tablets or capsules, as a powder or granules, or as an aqueous solution or suspension.
  • Tablets for oral use may include the active ingredients mixed with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as inert diluents, disintegrating agents, binding agents, lubricating agents, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preservatives. Suitable inert diluents include sodium and calcium carbonate, sodium and calcium phosphate, and lactose, while corn starch and alginic acid are suitable disintegrating agents. Binding agents may include starch and gelatin, while the lubricating agent, if present, will generally be magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. If desired, the tablets may be coated with a material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate, to delay absorption in the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Capsules for oral use include hard gelatin capsules in which the active ingredient is mixed with a solid diluent, and soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • For intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous and intravenous use, the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention will generally be provided in sterile aqueous solutions or suspensions, buffered to an appropriate pH and isotonicity. Suitable aqueous vehicles include Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride. In a preferred embodiment, the carrier consists exclusively of an aqueous buffer. In this context, “exclusively” means no auxiliary agents or encapsulating substances are present which might affect or mediate uptake of iRNA agent in the cells that harbor the target gene or virus. Such substances include, for example, micellar structures, such as liposomes or capsids, as described below. Although microinjection, lipofection, viruses, viroids, capsids, capsoids, or other auxiliary agents are required to introduce iRNA agent into cell cultures, surprisingly these methods and agents are not necessary for uptake of iRNA agent in vivo. The iRNA agent of the present invention are particularly advantageous in that they do not require the use of an auxiliary agent to mediate uptake of the iRNA agent into the cell, many of which agents are toxic or associated with deleterious side effects. Aqueous suspensions according to the invention may include suspending agents such as cellulose derivatives, sodium alginate, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone and gum tragacanth, and a wetting agent such as lecithin. Suitable preservatives for aqueous suspensions include ethyl and n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions can also include encapsulated formulations to protect the iRNA agent against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811; PCT publication WO 91/06309; and European patent publication EP-A-43075, which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of iRNA agent can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. iRNA agents that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • The data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosages of compositions of the invention are preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any iRNA agent used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range of the iRNA agent or, when appropriate, of the polypeptide product of a target sequence (e.g., achieving a decreased concentration of the polypeptide) that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test iRNA agent which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • In addition to their administration individually or as a plurality, as discussed above, iRNA agents relating to the invention can be administered in combination with other known agents effective in treating viral infections and diseases. In any event, the administering physician can adjust the amount and timing of iRNA agent administration on the basis of results observed using standard measures of efficacy known in the art or described herein.
  • For oral administration, the iRNA agent useful in the invention will generally be provided in the form of tablets or capsules, as a powder or granules, or as an aqueous solution or suspension.
  • Methods for Treating Diseases Caused by Expression of a Target Gene.
  • In one embodiment, the invention relates to a method for treating a subject having a disease or at risk of developing a disease caused by the expression of a target gene. In this embodiment, iRNA agents can act as novel therapeutic agents for controlling one or more of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders, disorders associated with bone metabolism, immune disorders, hematopoietic disorders, cardiovascular disorders, liver disorders, viral diseases, or metabolic disorders. The method includes administering a pharmaceutical composition of the invention to the patient (e.g., a human), such that expression of the target gene is silenced. Because of their high efficiency and specificity, the iRNA agent of the present invention specifically target mRNA of target genes of diseased cells and tissues, as described below, and at surprisingly low dosages. The pharmaceutical compositions are formulated as described in the preceding section, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein.
  • Examples of genes which can be targeted for treatment include, without limitation, an oncogene (Hanahan, D. and R. A. Weinberg, Cell (2000) 100:57; and Yokota, J., Carcinogenesis (2000) 21(3):497-503); a cytokine gene (Rubinstein, M., et al., Cytokine Growth Factor Rev. (1998) 9(2):175-81); a idiotype (Id) protein gene (Benezra, R., et al., Oncogene (2001) 20(58):8334-41; Norton, J. D., J. Cell Sci. (2000) 113(22):3897-905); a prion gene (Prusiner, S. B., et al., Cell (1998) 93(3):337-48; Safar, J., and S. B. Prusiner, Prog. Brain Res. (1998) 117:421-34); a gene that expresses molecules that induce angiogenesis (Gould, V. E. and B. M. Wagner, Hum. Pathol. (2002) 33(11):1061-3); adhesion molecules (Chothia, C. and E. Y. Jones, Annu. Rev. Biochem. (1997) 66:823-62; Parise, L. V., et al., Semin. Cancer Biol. (2000) 10(6):407-14); cell surface receptors (Deller, M. C., and Y. E. Jones, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. (2000) 10(2):213-9); genes of proteins that are involved in metastasizing and/or invasive processes (Boyd, D., Cancer Metastasis Rev. (1996) 15(1):77-89; Yokota, J., Carcinogenesis (2000) 21(3):497-503); genes of proteases as well as of molecules that regulate apoptosis and the cell cycle (Matrisian, L. M., Curr. Biol. (1999) 9(20):R776-8; Krepela, E., Neoplasma (2001) 48(5):332-49; Basbaum and Werb, Curr. Opin. Cell Biol. (1996) 8:731-738; Birkedal-Hansen, et al., Crit. Rev. Oral Biol. Med. (1993) 4:197-250; Mignatti and Rifkin, Physiol. Rev. (1993) 73:161-195; Stetler-Stevenson, et al., Annu. Rev. Cell Biol. (1993) 9:541-573; Brinkerhoff, E., and L. M. Matrisan, Nature Reviews (2002) 3:207-214; Strasser, A., et al., Annu. Rev. Biochem. (2000) 69:217-45; Chao, D. T. and S. J. Korsmeyer, Annu. Rev. Immunol. (1998) 16:395-419; Mullauer, L., et al., Mutat. Res. (2001) 488(3):211-31; Fotedar, R., et al., Prog. Cell Cycle Res. (1996) 2:147-63; Reed, J. C., Am. J. Pathol. (2000) 157(5):1415-30; D'Ari, R., Bioassays (2001) 23(7):563-5); genes that express the EGF receptor; Mendelsohn, J. and J. Baselga, Oncogene (2000) 19(56):6550-65; Normanno, N., et al., Front. Biosci. (2001) 6:D685-707); and the multi-drug resistance 1 gene, NMDR1 gene (Childs, S., and V. Ling, Imp. Adv. Oncol. (1994) 21-36).
  • In the prevention of disease, the target gene may be one which is required for initiation or maintenance of the disease, or which has been identified as being associated with a higher risk of contracting the disease. In the treatment of disease, the iRNA agent can be brought into contact with the cells or tissue exhibiting the disease. For example, iRNA agent substantially identical to all or part of a mutated gene associated with cancer, or one expressed at high levels in tumor cells, may be brought into contact with or introduced into a cancerous cell or tumor gene.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., a carcinoma, sarcoma, metastatic disorder or hematopoietic neoplastic disorder, such as a leukemia. A metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of prostate, colon, lung, breast and liver origin. As used herein, the terms “cancer,” “hyperproliferative,” and “neoplastic” refer to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth. These terms are meant to include all types of cancerous growths or oncogenic processes, metastatic tissues or malignantly transformed cells, tissues, or organs, irrespective of histopathologic type or stage of invasiveness. Proliferative disorders also include hematopoietic neoplastic disorders, including diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of hematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can also be used to treat a variety of immune disorders, in particular those associated with overexpression or aberrant expression of a gene or expression of a mutant gene. Examples of hematopoietic disorders or diseases include, without limitation, autoimmune diseases (including, for example, diabetes mellitus, arthritis (including rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis), multiple sclerosis, encephalomyelitis, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosis, automimmune thyroiditis, dermatitis (including atopic dermatitis and eczematous dermatitis), psoriasis, Sjogren's Syndrome, Crohn's disease, aphthous ulcer, iritis, conjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis, ulcerative colitis, asthma, allergic asthma, cutaneous lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, vaginitis, proctitis, drug eruptions, leprosy reversal reactions, erythema nodosum leprosum, autoimmune uveitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, acute necrotizing hemorrhagic encephalopathy, idiopathic bilateral progressive sensorineural hearing, loss, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, polychondritis, Wegener's granulomatosis, chronic active hepatitis, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, lichen planus, Graves' disease, sarcoidosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis posterior, and interstitial lung fibrosis), graft-versus-host disease, cases of transplantation, and allergy.
  • In another embodiment, the invention relates to methods for treating viral diseases, including but not limited to hepatitis C, hepatitis B, herpes simplex virus (HSV), HIV-AIDS, poliovirus, and smallpox virus. iRNA agent of the invention are prepared as described herein to target expressed sequences of a virus, thus ameliorating viral activity and replication. The iRNA agents can be used in the treatment and/or diagnosis of viral infected tissue, both animal and plant. Also, such iRNA agent can be used in the treatment of virus-associated carcinoma, such as hepatocellular cancer.
  • For example, the iRNA agent of the present invention are useful for treating a subject having an infection or a disease associated with the replication or activity of a (+) strand RNA virus having a 3′-UTR, such as HCV. In this embodiment, the iRNA agent can act as novel therapeutic agents for inhibiting replication of the virus. The method includes administering a pharmaceutical composition of the invention to the patient (e.g., a human), such that viral replication is inhibited. Examples of (+) strand RNA viruses which can be targeted for inhibition include, without limitation, picomaviruses, caliciviruses, nodaviruses, coronaviruses, arteriviruses, flaviviruses, and togaviruses. Examples of picomaviruses include enterovirus (poliovirus 1), rhinovirus (human rhinovirus 1A), hepatovirus (hepatitis A virus), cardiovirus (encephalomyocarditis virus), aphthovirus (foot-and-mouth disease virus O), and parechovirus (human echovirus 22). Examples of caliciviruses include vesiculovirus (swine vesicular exanthema virus), lagovirus (rabbit hemorrhagic disease virus), “Norwalk-like viruses” (Norwalk virus), “Sapporo-like viruses” (Sapporo virus), and “hepatitis E-like viruses” (hepatitis E virus). Betanodavirus (striped jack nervous necrosis virus) is the representative nodavirus. Coronaviruses include coronavirus (avian infections bronchitis virus) and torovirus (Berne virus). Arterivirus (equine arteritis virus) is the representative arteriviridus. Togavirises include alphavirus (Sindbis virus) and rubivirus (Rubella virus). Finally, the flaviviruses include flavivirus (Yellow fever virus), pestivirus (bovine diarrhea virus), and hepacivirus (hepatitis C virus). In a preferred embodiment, the virus is hepacivirus, the hepatitis C virus. Although the foregoing list exemplifies vertebrate viruses, the present invention encompasses the compositions and methods for treating infections and diseases caused by any (+) strand RNA virus having a 3′-UTR, regardless of the host. For example, the invention encompasses the treatment of plant diseases caused by sequiviruses, comoviruses, potyviruses, sobemovirus, luteoviruses, tombusviruses, tobavirus, tobravirus, bromoviruses, and closteroviruses.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions encompassed by the invention may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to, oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration. In preferred embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection. The pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • Methods for Inhibiting Expression of a Target Gene.
  • In yet another aspect, the invention relates to a method for inhibiting the expression of a target gene in a cell or organism. In one embodiment, the method includes administering the inventive iRNA agent or a pharmaceutical composition containing the iRNA agent to a cell or an organism, such as a mammal, such that expression of the target gene is silenced. Because of their surprisingly improved stability and bioavailability, the iRNA agent of the present invention effectively inhibit expression or activity of target genes at surprisingly low dosages. Compositions and methods for inhibiting the expression of a target gene using iRNA agent can be performed as described in the preceding sections, particularly Sections 4 and 5.
  • In this embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition containing the iRNA agent may be administered by any means known in the art including, but not limited to oral or parenteral routes, including intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous, transdermal, airway (aerosol), ocular, rectal, vaginal, and topical (including buccal and sublingual) administration. In preferred embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered by intravenous or intraparenteral infusion or injection. The pharmaceutical compositions can also be administered intraparenchymally, intrathecally, and/or by stereotactic injection.
  • The methods for inhibiting the expression of a target gene can be applied to any gene one wishes to silence, thereby specifically inhibiting its expression, provided the cell or organism in which the target gene is expressed includes the cellular machinery which effects RNA interference. Examples of genes which can be targeted for silencing include, without limitation, developmental genes including but not limited to adhesion molecules, cyclin kinase inhibitors, Wnt family members, Pax family members, Winged helix family members, Hox family members, cytokines/lymphokines and their receptors, growth/differentiation factors and their receptors, and neurotransmitters and their receptors; (2) oncogenes including but not limited to ABL1, BCL1, BCL2, BCL6, CBFA2, CBL, CSFIR, ERBA, ERBB, EBRB2, ETS1, ETS1, ETV6, FGR, FOS, FYN, HCR, HRAS, JUN, KRAS, LCK, LYN, MDM2, MLL, MYB, MYC, MYCL1, MYCN, NRAS, PIM1, PML, RET, SRC, TAL1, TCL3 and YES; (3) tumor suppresser genes including but not limited to APC, BRCA1, BRCA2, MADH4, MCC, NF1, NF2, RB1, TP53 and WT1; and (4) enzymes including but not limited to ACP desaturases and hydroxylases, ADP-glucose pyrophorylases, ATPases, alcohol dehydrogenases, amylases, amyloglucosidases, catalases, cellulases, cyclooxygenases, decarboxylases, dextrinases, DNA and RNA polymerases, galactosidases, glucanases, glucose oxidases, GTPases, helicases, hemicellulases, integrases, invertases, isomerases, kinases, lactases, lipases, lipoxygenases, lysozymes, pectinesterases, peroxidases, phosphatases, phospholipases, phosphorylases, polygalacturonases, proteinases and peptideases, pullanases, recombinases, reverse transcriptases, topoisomerases, and xylanases.
  • In addition to in vivo gene inhibition, the skilled artisan will appreciate that the iRNA agent of the present invention are useful in a wide variety of in vitro applications. Such in vitro applications, include, for example, scientific and commercial research (e.g., elucidation of physiological pathways, drug discovery and development), and medical and veterinary diagnostics. In general, the method involves the introduction of the iRNA agent into a cell using known techniques (e.g., absorption through cellular processes, or by auxiliary agents or devices, such as electroporation and lipofection), then maintaining the cell for a time sufficient to obtain degradation of an mRNA transcript of the target gene.
  • Methods for Identifying iRNA Agent Having Increased Stability.
  • In yet another aspect, the invention relates to methods for identifying iRNA agent having increased stability in biological tissues and fluids such as serum. iRNA agent having increased stability have enhanced resistance to degradation, e.g., by chemicals or nucleases (particularly endonucleases) which normally degrade RNA molecules. Methods for detecting increases in nucleic acid stability are well known in the art. Any assay capable of measuring or detecting differences between a test iRNA agent and a control iRNA agent in any measurable physical parameter may be suitable for use in the methods of the present invention. In general, because the inhibitory effect of an iRNA agent on a target gene activity or expression requires that the molecule remain intact, the stability of a particular iRNA agent can be evaluated indirectly by observing or measuring a property associated with the expression of the gene. Thus, the relative stability of an iRNA agent can be determined by observing or detecting (1) an absence or observable decrease in the level of the protein encoded by the target gene, (2) an absence or observable decrease in the level of mRNA product from the target gene, and (3) a change or loss in phenotype associated with expression of the target gene. In the context of a medical treatment, the stability of an iRNA agent may be evaluated based on the degree of the inhibition of expression or function of the target gene, which in turn may be assessed based on a change in the disease condition of the patient, such as reduction in symptoms, remission, or a change in disease state.
  • In one embodiment, the method includes preparing an iRNA agent as described above (e.g., through chemical synthesis), incubating the iRNA agent with a biological sample, then analyzing and identifying those iRNA agent that exhibit an increased stability as compared to a control iRNA agent.
  • In an exemplified embodiment, iRNA agent is produced in vitro by mixing/annealing complementary single-stranded RNA strands, preferably in a molar ratio of at least about 3:7, more preferably in a molar ratio of about 4:6, and most preferably in essentially equal molar amounts (e.g., a molar ratio of about 5:5). Preferably, the single-stranded RNA strands are denatured prior to mixing/annealing, and the buffer in which the mixing/annealing reaction takes place contains a salt, preferably potassium chloride. Single-stranded RNA strands may be synthesized by solid phase synthesis using, for example, an Expedite 8909 synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, Applera Deutschland GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany), as described above.
  • iRNA agent are incubated with a biological sample under the conditions sufficient or optimal for enzymatic function. After incubating with a biological sample, the stability of the iRNA agent is analyzed by means conventional in the art, for example using RNA gel electrophoresis as exemplified herein. For example, when the sample is serum, the iRNA agent may be incubated at a concentration of 1-10 μM, preferably 2-8 μM, more preferably 3-6 μM, and most preferably 4-5 μM. The incubation temperature is preferably between 25° C. and 45° C., more preferably between 35° C. and 40° C., and most preferably about 37° C.
  • The biological sample used in the incubation step may be derived from tissues, cells, biological fluids or isolates thereof. For example, the biological sample may be isolated from a subject, such as a whole organism or a subset of its tissues or cells. The biological sample may also be a component part of the subject, such as a body fluid, including but not limited to blood, serum, plasma, mucus, lymphatic fluid, synovial fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, saliva, amniotic fluid, amniotic cord blood, urine, vaginal fluid and semen. Preferably, the biological sample is a serum derived from a blood sample of a subject. The subject is preferably a mammal, more preferably a human or a mouse.
  • In another embodiment, the method includes selecting an iRNA agent having increased stability by measuring the mRNA and/or protein expression levels of a target gene in a cell following introduction of the iRNA agent. In this embodiment, an iRNA agent of the invention inhibits expression of a target gene in a cell, and thus the method includes selecting an iRNA agent that induces a measurable reduction in expression of a target gene as compared to a control iRNA agent. Assays that measure gene expression by monitoring RNA and/or protein levels can be performed within about 24 hours following uptake of the iRNA agent by the cell. For example, RNA levels can be measured by Northern blot techniques, RNAse Protection Assays, or Quality Control-PCR (QC-PCR) (including quantitative reverse transcription coupled PCR (RT-PCR)) and analogous methods known in the art. Protein levels can be assayed, for example, by Western blot techniques, flow cytometry, or reporter gene expression (e.g., expression of a fluorescent reporter protein, such as green fluorescent protein (GFP)). RNA and/or protein levels resulting from target gene expression can be measured at regular time intervals following introduction of the test iRNA agent, and the levels are compared to those following introduction of a control iRNA agent into cells. A control iRNA agent can be a nonsensical iRNA agent (i.e., an iRNA agent having a scrambled sequence that does not target any nucleotide sequence in the subject), an iRNA agent that can target a gene not present in the subject (e.g., a luciferase gene, when the iRNA agent is tested in human cells), or an iRNA agent otherwise previously shown to be ineffective at silencing the target gene. The mRNA and protein levels of the test sample and the control sample can be compared. The test iRNA agent is selected as having increased stability when there is a measurable reduction in expression levels following absorption of the test iRNA agent as compared to the control iRNA agent. mRNA and protein measurements can be made using any art-recognized technique (see, e.g., Chiang, M. Y., et al., J. Biol Chem. (1991) 266:18162-71; Fisher, T, et al., Nucl. Acids Res. (1993) 21:3857; and Chen et al., J. Biol. Chem. (1996) 271:28259).
  • The ability of an iRNA agent composition of the invention to inhibit gene expression can be measured using a variety of techniques known in the art. For example, Northern blot analysis can be used to measure the presence of RNA encoding a target protein. The level of the specific mRNA produced by the target gene can be measured, e.g., using RT-PCR. Because iRNA agent directs the sequence-specific degradation of endogenous mRNA through RNAi, the selection methods of the invention encompass any technique that is capable of detecting a measurable reduction in the target RNA. In yet another example, Western blots can be used to measure the amount of target protein present. In still another embodiment, a phenotype influenced by the amount of the protein can be detected. Techniques for performing Western blots are well known in the art (see, e.g., Chen, et al., J. Biol. Chem. (1996) 271:28259).
  • When the target gene is to be silenced by an iRNA agent that targets a promoter sequence of the target gene, the target gene can be fused to a reporter gene, and reporter gene expression (e.g., transcription and/or translation) can be monitored. Similarly, when the target gene is to be silenced by an iRNA agent that targets a sequence other than a promoter, a portion of the target gene (e.g., a portion including the target sequence) can be fused with a reporter gene so that the reporter gene is transcribed. By monitoring a change in the expression of the reporter gene in the presence of the iRNA agent, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of the iRNA agent in inhibiting the expression of the reporter gene. The expression levels of the reporter gene in the presence of the test iRNA agent versus a control iRNA agent are then compared. The test iRNA agent is selected as having increased stability when there is a measurable reduction in expression levels of the reporter gene as compared to the control iRNA agent. Examples of reporter genes useful for use in the present invention include, without limitation, those coding for luciferase, GFP, chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (CAT), β-galactosidase, and alkaline phosphatase. Suitable reporter genes are described, for example, in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York (Ausubel, F. A., et al., eds., 1989); Gould, S. J., and S. Subramani, Anal. Biochem. (1988) 7:404-408; Gorman, C. M., et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. (1982) 2:1044-1051; and Selden, R., et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. (1986) 6:3173-3179; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, suitable methods and materials are described below. All publications, patent applications, patents, and other references mentioned herein are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control. In addition, the materials, methods, and examples are illustrative only and not intended to be limiting.
    • EXAMPLES
  • 1. Introduction and Design Criteria
  • siRNA-based drugs can be targeted to specific cells. Targeting moieties can be conjugated to siRNAs through covalent or noncovalent approaches. Several factors are considered when designing targeting moieties. For example, a targeting moiety can be a cationic carrier molecule, such as a PEI polymers or PAMAM dendrimer, both of which have been demonstrated to be effective gene delivery agents. Inclusion of a water-soluble unit on a targeting moiety has also been shown to increase the bioavailability, especially for use in oral delivery. Incorporation of a lipophilic group on a targeting moiety may also increase membrane permeability. Ideally, siRNA-based drugs, including the targeting moiety, are nontoxic and nonimmunogenic. A targeting unit may be necessary to increase the specificity in delivery. Further, if the targeting moiety (or moieties) has multiple recognition (or binding) sites, the moiety should have conformational flexibility, yet be stable enough to maintain its orientation. The number of synthetic steps and the cost of synthesis are also preferably minimized.
  • 2. Results and Discussion
  • 2.1. Cationic Porphyrins
  • (1) Cationic porphyrins have good water-solubility while being lipophilic with the central porphyrin moiety, which serves as a chromophore in itself. The cationic porphyrins are known to be low in toxicity, and can be prepared in a few synthetic steps from a wide variety of commercial porphyrin derivatives. Although there are some exceptional cases, earlier reports proposed that there are three types of binding modes in the porphyrin-DNA duplex: (i) intercalation, (ii) outside binding without self-stacking, and (iii) outside binding with self-stacking (Fiel, R. J. J. Biomol. Struct. Dyn. 1989, 6(6), 1259-1274). In general, the binding mode of a specific porphyrin depends on its effective thickness, typically resulting from the peripheral substitution pattern and the type of the central metal ion. Commercial compounds 1 and 2 are the well-studied cationic porphyrins which are proven to deliver an oligodeoxynucleotide the gene into the nucleus (Benimetskaya, et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 1998, 26, 5310-531).
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00081
  • (2) The second generation cationic porphyrin derivatives 3 and 4 were designed and tested for oligodeoxynucleotide delivery specifically into the primary leukemic cells showing good activities (Kralova et al., J. Med. Chem. 2003, 46, 2049-2056). Authors claimed that a very delicate balance between the number and position of the positive charges and the lipophilicity of the molecule is a key factor as shown by the improved cellular uptake of 3 over 2.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00082
  • Applying the method developed by Frechet and a coworker to prepare the multivalent sugar-terminated dendrons using a DNA synthesizer, the structure 5 is proposed as a potential siRNA delivery vehicle. This model compound combines several major factors (i.e., cationic porphyrin, polyethylene glycol for water-solubility, conformational flexibility, biocompatibility, and carbohydrate dendrons for targeting) for siRNA delivery purposes.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00083
  • Other designs include combining the cationic lipids (i.e., amphiphiles) and cationic porphyrins to increase lipophilicity and thus improve cellular uptake. These can be categorized with the second generation cationic porphyrins (e.g., 3 and 4), where again the subtle play between the number and location of the positive charges and the lipophilicity may compensate for the deficit in the first generation cationic porphyrins, 1 and 2. As a starting point, substituting the periphery of a commercial cationic porphyrin with one or two units of long aliphatic chains (e.g., C18H37) is proposed.
  • 2.2. Multivalent Carbohydrate siRNA Conjugates
  • Target Design. Following the model compound 6 synthesized and studied by Biessen and coworkers, two target molecules, 7 and 8, were designed by modifying the central branching unit and adding a primary and secondary alcohol to the steroid for the covalent attachment of the oligonucleotide and a solid support.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00084
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00085
  • The main factors to our carrier design were the multivalent sugar unit (e.g., GalNAc) for targeting and the steroid unit, where these two groups were connected through a flexible linker. Commercially available chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA) has two secondary alcohols in its scaffold. One of the secondary alcohols can be further modified to a primary alcohol protected with a dimethoxytrityl (DMT) group for the automated oligonucleotide synthesis on a solid support. Structures 7 and 8 only differ in the type of branching unit (trihydroxybenzyl and GalNAc, respectively) for the multivalent sugar attachment.
  • Further goals in this project include building the same system with mannose as a targeting sugar instead of GalNAc. In general, GalNAc has been used for liver cell targeting and mannose has been used for cancer cell targeting. However, these sugars are not limited to these uses.
  • Computer Modeling. When energy-minimized structures of 7 and 8 were obtained through HyperChem 7.0 (CompuChem, Germany), the terminal carbohydrate groups in compound 8 were distributed in a more globular way compared to those in compound 7, which has a rather flat aromatic group (i.e., benzyl) as a central branching unit.
  • Synthetic Plan. A synthetic scheme to prepare the first target 7 is outlined in this section. Our strategy is first to build the middle linker moiety (Scheme 1) followed by the one-pot attachment of peripheral sugars using a commercially available galactal (Senn Chemicals, Scheme 2), and
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00086
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00087
      • the final conjugation of the derivatized CDCA unit14 with the linker carrying the trivalent sugar (Scheme 3 and Scheme 4).
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00088
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00089
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00090
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00091
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00092
        Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00093
  • Synthesis of the Trivalent Linker 14. Synthesis of compound 7 started from the preparation of the middle spacer unit (Scheme 1). Protection of diol 9 using stoichiometric amount of t-butyldiphenylsilyl chloride (TBDPSCl) afforded the desired mono-silylated product 10 in a relatively low yield (43%) along with the di-silylated compound and the unreacted starting material. The alcohol 10 was then tosylated and iodinated to produce 12. Next step was the triple etherification of methyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate 13 with a slightly more than three equivalents of 12 under a basic condition using cesium carbonate (Cs2CO3) in DMF at 50° C.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00094
  • Generally, iodides are used instead of bromides or chlorides to avoid heating at higher temperatures (i.e., >100° C.). In addition, Cs2CO3 is more ionizable than potassium carbonate (K2CO3), but has the drawback of being more hygroscopic. 1H NMR analysis indicated that the isolated product was the dialkylated species 33 substituted at 3,4-positions instead of trialkylated 14. This wa evidenced by the two small doublets around 6.5 ppm resulting from two different ortho-protons. Formation of the 3,4-dialkylated, but not the symmetrical 3,5-dialkylated product, indicated that the first alkylation occurred at the para-position and not the meta-position under this condition (similar results reported in References 15 and 16). Approximately 23% of the iodide 12 used, and which did not react, was recovered.
  • In another attempt, potassium carbonate (K2CO3) was used instead of Cs2CO3, where the reaction was heated at 110° C. for 15 h. Here, ca. 6 equiv of iodide 12 was added to the triol 13 with excess of K2CO3 (58 equiv to 13). Again this reaction only afforded the dialkylated compound 33 as a minor product with no formation of the desired molecule 14. When a series of compounds detected on TLC was isolated and checked by 1H NMR spectroscopy, one of the major products was the carbonate derivative of 12 (i.e., 34) as evidenced by the
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00095
    appearance of a methylene peak from the glycol unit with unusual downfield chemical shift at ca. 4.3 ppm. This also coincides with the mass spectra result assuming the possible fragmentation at one side of the carbonate linkage.
  • The failure to synthesize the desired compound 14 using either condition mentioned above may be both attributed to the high reactivity of the iodide 12 which reacted with the carbonate added as a base before deprotonated phenoxide derivative of 13 may attack 12 to make the ether linkage. Most of the references found so far to make these bonds have used either chloride or bromide with the only exception of the addition of potassium iodide (KI) in catalytic amount when bromide is used to generate the corresponding iodide in situ.
  • In another example, the Mitsunobu condition was attempted to prepare the trivalent linker 14 (Scheme 5), where again only the spot having a similar Rf to the dialkylated species 33 was observed on TLC as the most hydrophobic compound.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00096
  • Etherification reaction of methyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate 13 with alkyl halides to get the trivalent linker was problematic, and additional methods were attempted. The investigations carried out so far did not provide any efficient way to prepare this linker, however several more methods could be tested before changing to different types of linkers. Table 1 summarizes the conditions to prepare trivalent linkers. Through the results obtained so far, the alkylation seems to be occurring first at the para-position, and the third alkylation at the meta-position required harsh conditions. In addition, usage of iodide derivative (# 3) was unfavorable due to its high reactivity, which resulted in the formation of carbonate with excess amounts of K2CO3 before reacting with the phenolate anions or 13. Unlike the reported result, the reaction condition using t-butoxide as a base at lower temperature was not sufficient to complete the reaction where the unreacted starting material 35 was mostly recovered.
    TABLE 1
    Attempts to prepare trivalent linker 14.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00097
    Entry Reaction Type Reactant Condition Result
    † Mitsunobu BDPS H 10 PPh3, DIAD, THF, 0° C. → rt, 2 d no desired product
    Etherification BDPS 12 Cs2CO3, DMF, 50° C. → 80° C., 7h → 3,4-dialkylated, sm
    rt. 16 h
    Etherification BDPS 12 K2CO3, DMF, 110° C., 4.5 h → rt, 17 h 3,4-dialkylated,
    carbonate
    Etherification BDPS r 35 t-BuOK, CH3CN, 60° C., 17 h mostly sm
    Etherification BDPS l 36 K2CO3, 18-crown-6, DMF, 80° C., 7 h mostly sm
    Etherification l 37 K2CO3, DMF, 80° C., 7 h Not characterized

    sm = starting material “Reactant” recovered;

    carbonate = carbonate derivative of the “Reactant”;

    †product will be the triol analog of 14 (without TBDPS).
  • This could be due to the presence of bulky TBDPS protecting group, whereas the reported reactions used unprotected alcohol. The last entry (#6) may be a possible alternative for avoiding the usage of the TBDPS-protected alkyl halides. However, in this case, using more than 6 equiv of alcohol 37 to 13 is recommended.
  • Modified Targets and Synthetic Plans. During the earlier stages of the project, the target designs were modified. First, an unstable carbamate linkage in the central branching unit was replaced with an amide linkage. Second, in order to prevent potential difficulties in derivatizing the secondary alcohol at C-7 of CDCA, usage of lithocholic acid (LCA) was suggested instead of CDCA as shown in structure 38. In an alternative approach, the primary alcohol could be appended to the C-7 instead of C-3 as shown in structure 39. Synthetic plans to prepare new two target molecules, 38 and 39, starting from 14 are shown in Schemes 6-10. Here the mono-Boc protected amine 42 was prepared by using excess amount of diamine 41.
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00098
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00099
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00100
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00101
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00102
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00103
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00104
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00105
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00106
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00107
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00108
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00109
  • Chemistry on the Bile Acids. Earlier attempts to esterify CDCA 24 (or LCA 44) did not produce the correct structure 25 by 1H NMR. In these experiments, the integration ratio of the methyl group from the ester to the protons at C3 and C7 in the 3-4 ppm region was used to measure the reaction progress. The protons at C3 and C7 in the 3-4 ppm region were expected to manifest the largest change in the chemical shift upon acylation.
  • Several minor peaks at 5.0-5.6 ppm in the 1H NMR after reaction originated from the alkene protons. This major product, which was isolated by column chromatography, seemed to be the mixture of all possible regioisomers containing one double bond (e.g., 62) resulting from the dehydration under the acidic
    Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00110
    conditions at high temperatures when the reaction was continued for extended hours. By then, the verification of the structure 25 was further puzzled by the existence of the MS peak with the MW of 407, which matched the MW of 25 and was the current major contaminant in the mass spectra. Furthermore, the peak corresponding to the mass of the dehydrated compound 62 was found in the form of a sodium adduct which was in the similar region (i.e., MW 409) as the contaminant. The dehydrated species was again found as a major compound by mass spectra, but in lesser amounts when lithocholic acid 44 was used for the esterification reaction under the same condition.
  • When trace amounts of concentrated HCl was added for shorter periods of time for the esterification of CDCA 24 following the procedure of the Jung group (Jung and Johnson, Tetrahedron 2001, 57, 1449-1481), the minor spot on TLC (lower Rf than the isolated major 62 and its regioisomers) detected in the previous assays became the major spot; and was later confirmed to be the correct structure 25. Selective protection of C-3 alcohol with the TBDPS group proceeded smoothly (Scheme 9), however the remaining TBDPSCl which coincided with the Rf of the product 56 was troublesome when carried through for the next step, as this actually helped to protect the second alcohol at C-7 when sodium hydride was used as a base, thus complicating the isolation of desired product 57. Usage of less than one equivalent of TBDPSCl is recommended to avoid this problem when preparing 56.
  • 3. Experimental Section
  • General. Glassware was dried in an oven and cooled to room temperature in nitrogen (N2) or argon (Ar) atmosphere before use. All reactions were carried out under dry N2 or Ar atmosphere unless otherwise mentioned. Solvents were purchased from Acros as anhydrous grades (<50 ppm of water) and used as received. Reagents were of commercial grades and were used without further purification.
  • Analytical thin layer chromatography (TLC) was performed on 0.2 mm silica glass coated sheets (E. Merck) with F-254 indicator. Visualization of the products on TLC plate was performed by UV light, iodine (12), p-anisaldehye, potassium permanganate (KMnO4), and ninhydrin. Flash column chromatography was performed on Merck 40-63 μm silica gel. Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectra were recorded on a Varian Unity 300 or a Varian Unity 400 spectrometer unless otherwise mentioned. 1H NMR chemical shifts were measured relative to the residual solvent peak at 7.26 ppm in CDCl3 and at 2.50 ppm in DMSO-d6. The electrospray ionization mass spectrometry (ESI MS) experiments were performed by Dr. Gary Levine using in-house facilities.
  • 2-(2-{2-[2-(t-Butyldiphenylsilyloxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethoxy)ethanol (10). A mixture of tetra(ethylene glycol) 9 (5.00 mL, 28.7 mmol) and imidazole (2.91 g, 42.6 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF). TBDPSCl (7.80 mL, 29.4 mmol) was added to the solution dropwise over a 30 min-period using a syringe with an additional amount of DMF (total 20 mL) being added to avoid the reaction mixture becoming cloudy. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. DMF was removed under reduced pressure and the crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 1:1 to 2:3) to give 6.05 g (14.0 mmol, 49%) of 10 as a light colorless oil. Rf 0.21 (hexane/EtOAc 1:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.44-7.35 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 3.81 (t, 2H, J=5.5 Hz, CH2OSi), 3.71 (m, 2H, HOCH2CH2), 3.68-3.58 (m, 12H, HOCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)2OCH2CH2), 2.46 (br s, 1H, OH), 1.05 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C24H36O5SiNa (M+Na+): 455.2, Found: 455.2.
  • 2-(2-{2-[2-(4-Toluenesulfonyloxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethoxy)ethoxy-t-butyldiphenylsilane (11). To a solution of 10 (1.06 g, 2.46 mmol) in 30 mL of CH2Cl2 was added triethylamine (0.62 mL, 4.45 mmol). 4-Toluenesulfonyl chloride (TsCl, 567 mg, 2.97 mmol) was added to this solution in one portion at 0° C., and the mixture was stirred at under Ar for 24 h allowing it to warm to room temperature slowly. The reaction was quenched by pouring into a mixture of water (100 mL) and chloroform (70 mL), separated organic layer, and the aqueous layer was further extracted with chloroform (100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate (Na2SO4) and concentrated. The crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 5:1 to 2:1) to give 1.08 g (1.85 mmol, 75%) of 11 as a clear colorless oil. Rf 0.65 (hexane/EtOAc 1:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 7.79 (d, 2H, J=8.3 Hz, H-2 of tosyl), 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.44-7.35 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 7.32 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz, H-3 of tosyl), 4.14 (t, 2H, J=4.9 Hz, TsOCH2CH2), 3.80 (t, 2H, J=5.3 Hz, CH2OSi), 3.66 (t, 2H, J=4.9 Hz, TsOCH2CH2), 3.64-3.54 (m, 10H, (OCH2CH2)2OCH2CH2OSi), 2.43 (s, 3H, CH3 of tosyl), 1.04 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C31H42O7SSiNa (M+Na+): 609.2, Found: 609.2.
  • 2-{2-[2-(2-Iodoethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethoxy-t-butyldiphenylsilane (12). Compound 11 (1.07 g, 1.83 mmol) and potassium iodide (970 mg, 5.84 mmol) were suspended in acetone (35 mL) and heated at 65° C. for 6 h and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, water (100 mL) was added to the mixture, and extracted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated, and the crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 7:1 to 5:1) to give 839 mg (1.55 mmol, 85%) of 12 as a clear colorless oil. Rf 0.34 (hexane/EtOAc 5:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.45-7.35 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 3.81 (t, 2H, J=5.4 Hz, CH2CH2OSi), 3.74 (t, 2H, J=6.9 Hz, CH2CH2I), 3.65 (m, 8H, (OCH2CH2)2OCH2CH2OSi), 3.61 (t, 2H, J=5.4 Hz, CH2CH2OSi), 3.24 (t, 2H, J=7.1 Hz, CH2CH2I), 1.05 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C24H351O4SiNa (M+Na+): 565.5, Found: 565.1.
  • Methyl 3α,7α-dihydroxycholan-24-oate (25). CDCA (1.00 g, 2.50 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (43 mL), refluxed at 80° C., and then 12 drops of conc. hydrochloric acid (HCl) was added to this solution. The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 2.5 h, cooled to room temperature, neutralized with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate, and the solvent was removed. 15 mL of water was added to the mixture, and the crude product was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, concentrated, and the crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 1:2 to EtOAc only) to give 1.08 g (2.64 mmol, >100%, less dry) of 25 as a white solid. Rf 0.40 (EtOAc); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 3.80 (m, 1H, H-3/H-7), 3.63 (s, 3H, CO2CH3), 3.40 (m, 1H, H-3/H-7), 2.35-0.93 (m, 28H), 0.89 (d, 3H, J=6.5 Hz, CH3), 0.87 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.62 (s, 3H, CH3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C25H42O4Na (M+Na+): 429.3, Found: 429.3.
  • 2-{2-[2-(2-Bromoethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethoxy-t-butyldiphenylsilane (35). Compound 10 (651 mg, 1.50 mmol) and carbon tetrabromide (628 mg, 1.88 mmol) were dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (THF, 0.5 mL). Triphenylphosphine (498 mg, 1.88 mmol) was added to this solution portionwise over 5 min with stirring and additional amount of THF (0.5 mL) was added to the mixture. Reaction was monitored by TLC, which indicated that it was over in 10 min. Solvent was removed at room temperature and the crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, hexane/EtOAc 2:1) to give 767 mg (1.55 mmol, >100%, less dry) of 35 as a clear colorless oil. Rf 0.74 (hexane/EtOAc 1:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.45-7.35 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 3.81 (t, 2H, J=5.5 Hz, CH2CH2OSi), 3.79 (t, 2H, J=7.1 Hz, CH2CH2Br), 3.65 (m, 8H, (OCH2CH2)2OCH2CH2OSi), 3.61 (t, 2H, J=5.3 Hz, CH2CH2OSi), 3.45 (t, 2H, J=6.4 Hz, CH2CH2Br), 1.05 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C24H35BrO4SiNa (M+Na+): 517.1, Found: 517.1.
  • 2-{2-[2-(2-Chloroethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethoxy-t-butyldiphenylsilane (36). Compound 10 (813 mg, 1.88 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (995 mg, 3.76 mmol) were dissolved in CH2Cl2, and then at −78° C., hexachloroacetone (0.57 mL, 3.76 mmol) was added dropwise to the solution. The reaction temperature was raised to 0° C., and the progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC which indicated that it was over in 40 min. Solvent was removed at room temperature and the crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 10:1 to 8:1) to give 834 mg (1.85 mmol, 98%) of 36 as a clear colorless oil. Rf 0.89 (hexane/EtOAc 1:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.45-7.35 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 3.81 (t, 2H, J=5.4 Hz, CH2CH2OSi), 3.74 (t, 2H, J=6.0 Hz, CH2CH2Cl), 3.67-3.59 (m, 12H, ClCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)2OCH2CH2OSi), 1.05 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C24H35ClO4SiNa (M+Na+): 473.2, Found: 473.2.
  • 2-{2-[2-(N-tert-Boc-amino)ethoxy]ethoxy}ethylamine (42). To a solution of diamine 10 (1.00 mL, 6.71 mmol) in tert-butanol (10 mL) was added a 2 N aqueous solution of NaOH (3.5 mL, 7.0 mmol), and then at 0° C. di-tert-butyl-dicarbonate (1.44 g, 6.60 mmol) was added to this mixture in one portion. The mixture was sonicated, and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. White precipitate was observed. The reaction was quenched by carefully neutralizing to pH 7 using a pH paper, evaporated the solvent to dryness, added DMF (3 mL), sonicated, and filtered through a pipet-size size exclusion chromatography (BIO-RAD, Bio Beads S-X1, DMF). Solvent was removed from the filtrate, and chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, CH2Cl2/MeOH 5:1 to 3:2), filtered again through a pipet-size size exclusion chromatography (BIO-RAD, Bio Beads S-X1, DMF) to remove any dissolved silica gel, and concentrated to give 596 mg (2.40 mmol, 36%) of 42 as a yellowish oil. Rf 0.10 (CH2Cl2/MeOH 3:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 6.78 (t, 1H, NHBoc), 3.49 (m, 4H, CH2CH2OCH2CH2NHBoc), 3.35 (m, 4H, CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2NHBoc), 3.05 (q, 2H, J=5.9 Hz, CH2NHBoc), 1.37 (s, 9H, CH3 of Boc) (some peaks were not identified and missing).
  • Methyl 3α-(t-butyldiphenylsilyloxy)-7α-hydroxycholan-24-oate (56). A mixture of 25 (950 mg, 2.34 mmol) and imidazole (396 mg, 5.81 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of DMF. TBDPSCl (0.74 mL, 2.79 mmol) was added to the solution dropwise over a 30 min-period using a syringe. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The crude product was chromatographed (SiO2, gradient, hexane/EtOAc 10:1 to 5:1) to give 1.37 g (2.12 mmol, 91%) of 56 which was slightly contaminated with TBDPSCl. Rf 0.46 (hexane/EtOAc 5:1); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.68 (m, 4H, H-2 of phenyl), 7.43-7.32 (m, 6H, H-3 and H-4 of phenyl), 3.82 (m, 1H, H-3/H-7), 3.67 (s, 3H, CO2CH3), 3.46 (m, 1H, H-3/H-7), 2.40-0.69 (m, 28H), 1.04 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3), 0.93 (d, 3H, J=6.4 Hz, CH3), 0.79 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.64 (s, 3H, CH3); MS (ESI) Calcd for C41H60O4SiNa (M+Na+): 667.4, Found: 667.4.
  • A number of embodiments of the invention have been described. Nevertheless, it will be understood that various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Other embodiments are in the claims.

Claims (80)

1. An iRNA agent comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at 2 least one subunit having a formula (I) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00111
wherein:
X is N(CO)R7, NR7 or CH2;
Y is NR8, O, S, CR9R10, or absent;
Z is CR11R12 or absent;
Each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is, independently, H, ORa, ORb, (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb, provided that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORa or ORb and that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb;
Each of R5, R6, R11, and R12 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 R13, or C(O)NHR7; or R5 and R11 together are C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with R14;
R7 is Rd; or C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NRcRd or NHC(O)Rd;
R8 is C1-C6 alkyl;
R13 is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy, or halo;
R14 is NRcR7;
Ra is:
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00112
Rb is
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00113
Each of A and C is, independently, O or S;
B is OH, O−, or
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00114
Rc is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
Rd is a carbohydrate radical; or a steroid radical, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical; and
n is 1-4.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is absent.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORb and R3 is ORa.
4. The compound of claim 3, wherein R1 and R3 are cis.
5. The compound of claim 3, wherein R1 and R3 are trans.
6. The compound of claim 3, wherein n is 1.
7. The compound of claims 3, A is 0.
8. The compound of claim 3, wherein A is S.
9. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORb and R3 is ORb.
10. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORa and R3 is ORb.
11. The compound of claim 3, wherein R7 is (CH2)5NHRd or (CH2)5NHC(O)Rd.
12. The compound of claim 3, wherein Rd is chosen from the group of a galactose radical, an N-acetylgalactose radical, or a mannose radical.
13. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORb and R3 is (CH2)nORb.
14. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORb and R3 is (CH2)nORb.
15. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORa and R3 is (CH2)ORb.
16. The compound of claim 15, wherein R1 and R3 are cis.
17. The compound of claim 15, wherein R1 and R3 are trans.
18. The compound of claim 15, wherein n is 1.
19. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORb and R9 is ORa.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein R1 and R9 are cis.
21. The compound of claim 19, wherein R1 and R9 are trans.
22. The compound of claim 19, wherein n is 1.
23. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORa and R9 is (CH2)nORb.
24. The compound of claim 23, wherein R1 and R9 are cis.
25. The compound of claim 23, wherein R1 and R9 are trans.
26. The compound of claim 23, wherein n is 1.
27. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORb and R9 is ORb.
28. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORa and R9 is ORb.
29. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORb and R9 is (CH2)nORb.
30. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is ORb and R9 is (CH2)nORa.
31. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is (CH2)nORb and R9 is ORa.
32. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is (CH2)nORb and R9 is ORb.
33. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is (CH2)nORa and R9 is ORb.
34. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is ORa and R9 is (CH2)nORb.
35. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is ORb and R9 is (CH2)nORb.
36. The compound of claim 2, wherein R3 is ORb and R9 is (CH2)nORa.
37. The compound of claim 1, wherein one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORa and one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORb.
38. The compound of claim 1, wherein one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORa and one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORb.
39. The compound of claim 1, wherein one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORb and one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORb.
40. An iRNA agent comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit is derivatized with a moiety comprising a carbohydrate radical or a steroid radical, the steroid radical being optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical, which enhances entrance into a cell.
41. The compound of claim 40, wherein the subunit is derivatized with a galactose radical, an N-acetylgalactose radical, or a mannose radical.
42. The compound of claim 40, wherein the subunit is derivatized with a steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical.
43. The iRNA agent of claim 40, comprising at least one one subunit having a formula (I) is incorporated into at least one of said strands:
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00115
wherein:
X is N(CO)R7, NR7 or CH2;
Y is NR8, O, S, CR9R10, or absent;
Z is CR11R12 or absent;
Each of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is, independently, H, ORa, ORb, (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb, provided that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is ORa or ORb and that at least one of R1, R2, R3, R4, R9, and R10 is (CH2)nORa, or (CH2)nORb;
Each of R5, R6, R11, and R12 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 R13, or C(O)NHR7; or R5 and R11 together are C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with R14;
R7 is Rd; or C1-C20 alkyl substituted with NRcRd or NHC(O)Rd;
R8 is C1-C6 alkyl;
R13 is hydroxy, C1-C4 alkoxy, or halo;
R14 is NRcR7;
Ra is:
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00116
Rb is
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00117
Each of A and C is, independently, O or S;
B is OH, O−, or
Figure US20050164235A1-20050728-C00118
Rc is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
Rd is a carbohydrate radical; or a steroid radical, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical; and
n is 1-4.
44. The compound of claim 43, wherein Rd is chosen from a galactose radical, an N-acetylgalactose radical, or a mannose radical.
45. The compound of claim 42, wherein Rd is steroid tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical.
46. The compound of claim 43, wherein X is N(CO)R7 or NR7, Y is CR9R10, and Z is absent.
47. The compound of claim 46, wherein R1 is (CH2)nORb and R3 is ORa.
48. The iRNA agent of claim 40, wherein the iRNA is 21 nucleotides in length and there is a duplex region of about 19 pairs.
49. The iRNA agent of claim 40, wherein the iRNA agent includes a duplex region between 17 and 23 pairs in length.
50. The compound of claim 40, wherein the first or second strand is a sense strand, and the moiety is attached to the sense strand.
51. The compound of claim 50, wherein the moiety is attached to a 3′ terminal subunit.
52. The compound of claim 50, wherein the moiety is attached to a 5′ terminal subunit.
53. The compound of claim 50, wherein the moiety is attached an internal subunit.
54. The iRNA agent of claim 40, wherein the moiety enhances entrance into a primary cell.
55. The iRNA agent of claim 40, wherein the moiety enhances entrance into a hepatocyte cell.
56. The iRNA agent of claim 40, wherein the cell comprises an exogenous gene, and the iRNA agent targets the exogenous gene.
57. The iRNA agent of claim 56, wherein the exogenous gene is a hepatitis viral gene.
58. A composition comprising an iRNA agent to which a carbohydrate radical or a steroid radical, which is optionally substiuted with at least one carbohydrate radical is conjugated, which is free of, has a reduced amount of, or is essentially free of, other reagents that facilitate or enhance delivery through the cell membrane.
59. The composition of claim 58, wherein said composition is free of, has a reduced amount of, or is essentially free of: an additional lipophilic moiety; a transfection agent, e.g., concentrations of an ion or other substance which substantially alters cell permeability to an iRNA agent.
60. A method of modulating expression of a target gene in a subject, the method comprising: administering an iRNA agent of claim 1 to a subject.
61. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an iRNA agent of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
62. A kit comprising an iRNA agent of claim 1, a sterile container in which the iRNA agent is disclosed, and instructions for use.
63. A method of treating a human having or at risk for developing a disorder of the liver, the method comprising administering an iRNA agent of claim 1 or 40.
64. The method of claim 63, wherein the disorder of the liver is infection with a hepatitis virus.
65. The method of claim 64, wherein the virus is HCV.
66. The method of claim 64, wherein the virus is HBV.
67. The iRNA agent of claim 1, wherein the iRNA agent comprises a first subunit in which Rd is a carbohydrate radical, and a second subunit in which Rd is a steroid radical, which is optionally tethered to at least one carbohydrate radical.
68. The iRNA agent of claim 67, wherein the first and second subunits are incorporated into the same strand.
69. The iRNA agent of claim 67, wherein the first and second subunits are incorporated into different strands.
70. The iRNA of claim 67, wherein Rd in the first subunit is a galactose radical.
71. The iRNA agent of claim 67, wherein Rd in the first subunit is an N-acetylgalactoseamine radical.
72. The iRNA agent of claim 67, wherein Rd in the first subunit is mannose radical.
73. The iRNA agent of claim 67, wherein Rd in the second subunit is a steroid radical.
74. The iRNA agent of claim 73, wherein Rd in the second subunit is a cholesterol radical.
75. The iRNA agent of claim 73, wherein Rd in the second subunit is a cholanic acid radical.
76. The iRNA agent of claim 1, wherein the iRNA agent comprises a first subunit and a second subunit in which Rd is a carbohydrate radical in both the first and second subunits.
77. The iRNA agent of claim 76, wherein Rd is the same carbohydrate radical in the first and second subunit.
78. The iRNA agent of claim 76, wherein the carbohydrate radical in the first subunit is different from the carbohydrate radical in the second subunit.
79. An iRNA agent comprising a first strand and a second strand, wherein at least one subunit is derivatized with a porphyrin, which enhances entrance into a cell.
80. The iRNA agent of claim 79, wherein the porphyrin further comprises a carbohydrate radical; or a steroid radical optionally substituted with at least one carbohydrate radical.
US10/946,873 2003-04-17 2004-09-21 Modified iRNA agents Abandoned US20050164235A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/946,873 US20050164235A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-09-21 Modified iRNA agents
US12/619,382 US8344125B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2009-11-16 Modified iRNA agents

Applications Claiming Priority (22)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US46377203P 2003-04-17 2003-04-17
US46566503P 2003-04-25 2003-04-25
US46580203P 2003-04-25 2003-04-25
US46961203P 2003-05-09 2003-05-09
US49398603P 2003-08-08 2003-08-08
US49459703P 2003-08-11 2003-08-11
US50341403P 2003-09-15 2003-09-15
US50634103P 2003-09-26 2003-09-26
US51024603P 2003-10-09 2003-10-09
US51031803P 2003-10-10 2003-10-10
US51845303P 2003-11-07 2003-11-07
WOPCT/US04/07070 2004-03-08
PCT/US2004/007070 WO2004080406A2 (en) 2003-03-07 2004-03-08 Therapeutic compositions
WOPCT/US04/10586 2004-04-05
PCT/US2004/010586 WO2004090108A2 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-04-05 Irna conjugates
PCT/US2004/011255 WO2004091515A2 (en) 2003-04-09 2004-04-09 iRNA CONJUGATES
WOPCT/US04/11255 2004-04-09
WOPCT/US04/11829 2004-04-16
WOPCT/US04/11822 2004-04-16
PCT/US2004/011822 WO2004094345A2 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-04-16 Protected monomers
PCT/US2004/011829 WO2004094595A2 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-04-16 MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US10/946,873 US20050164235A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-09-21 Modified iRNA agents

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/011829 Continuation-In-Part WO2004094595A2 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-04-16 MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/619,382 Continuation US8344125B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2009-11-16 Modified iRNA agents

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20050164235A1 true US20050164235A1 (en) 2005-07-28

Family

ID=35530789

Family Applications (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/916,185 Active 2025-06-09 US7745608B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-08-10 Modified iRNA agents
US10/936,115 Abandoned US20050119214A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-09-07 Nuclease resistant double-stranded ribonucleic acid
US10/946,873 Abandoned US20050164235A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-09-21 Modified iRNA agents
US12/619,382 Active 2025-09-14 US8344125B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2009-11-16 Modified iRNA agents
US12/714,298 Active 2025-08-27 US8507661B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2010-02-26 Modified iRNA agents
US16/523,411 Expired - Lifetime US11312957B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2019-07-26 Modified iRNA agents
US17/697,685 Abandoned US20220403377A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2022-03-17 MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/916,185 Active 2025-06-09 US7745608B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-08-10 Modified iRNA agents
US10/936,115 Abandoned US20050119214A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2004-09-07 Nuclease resistant double-stranded ribonucleic acid

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/619,382 Active 2025-09-14 US8344125B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2009-11-16 Modified iRNA agents
US12/714,298 Active 2025-08-27 US8507661B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2010-02-26 Modified iRNA agents
US16/523,411 Expired - Lifetime US11312957B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2019-07-26 Modified iRNA agents
US17/697,685 Abandoned US20220403377A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2022-03-17 MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (7) US7745608B2 (en)
EP (5) EP2666858A1 (en)
JP (1) JP4597976B2 (en)
AU (2) AU2004233092C9 (en)
CA (1) CA2522637C (en)
DK (1) DK1620544T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2702942T3 (en)
WO (1) WO2004094595A2 (en)

Cited By (54)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070275919A1 (en) * 2003-11-04 2007-11-29 Sergei Gryaznov Rna Amidates and Thioamidates for Rnai
US20090105174A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2009-04-23 Amgen Inc. Nucleic acids hybridizable to micro rna and precursors thereof
US20100076056A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-03-25 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US20100086519A1 (en) * 2008-10-03 2010-04-08 The Charlotte-Mecklenburg Hospital Authority D/B/A Carolinas Medical Center Treatment of Hepatitis C Infection With Metalloporphyrins
US20100179309A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-07-15 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US20100267941A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-10-21 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Irna agents with biocleavable tethers
US7851615B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2010-12-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Lipophilic conjugated iRNA agents
US20110118340A1 (en) * 2008-02-08 2011-05-19 Muthiah Manoharan Delivery of rnai constructs to oligodendrocytes
WO2011075656A1 (en) 2009-12-18 2011-06-23 The University Of British Columbia Methods and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids
DE102010022937A1 (en) * 2010-06-04 2011-12-08 Universitätsklinikum Jena Cell-specific activatable biologically active molecules based on siRNA, methods for their activation and application kit for administration
WO2012016184A2 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents
WO2012016188A2 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents
WO2012099755A1 (en) 2011-01-11 2012-07-26 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pegylated lipids and their use for drug delivery
WO2013049328A1 (en) 2011-09-27 2013-04-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Di-aliphatic substituted pegylated lipids
US20140113957A1 (en) * 2011-06-21 2014-04-24 Brian Bettencourt Compositions and Methods for Inhibition of Expression of Apolipoprotein C-III (APOC3) Genes
EP2750681A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2014-07-09 Quanta Biodesign, Ltd. Branched discrette peg constructs
US8796436B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2014-08-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
WO2014179625A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR MODULATING APOLIPOPROTEIN (a) EXPRESSION
WO2015168172A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Linkage modified oligomeric compounds
WO2015168618A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
WO2015168589A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating angiopoietin-like 3 expression
US9200276B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2015-12-01 Halo-Bio Rnai Therapeutics, Inc. Polynucleotides for multivalent RNA interference, compositions and methods of use thereof
WO2017053722A1 (en) 2015-09-24 2017-03-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of kras expression
WO2017079745A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
US9725718B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2017-08-08 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of protein C (PROC) genes
US9725479B2 (en) 2010-04-22 2017-08-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 5′-end derivatives
EP3225281A1 (en) 2008-12-10 2017-10-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Gnaq targeted dsrna compositions and methods for inhibiting expression
WO2018014041A2 (en) 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
EP3329924A1 (en) 2010-03-29 2018-06-06 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sirna therapy for transthyretin (ttr) related ocular amyloidosis
WO2018100558A2 (en) 2016-12-01 2018-06-07 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Cyclic dinucleotide
US10023861B2 (en) 2011-08-29 2018-07-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomer-conjugate complexes and their use
US10246709B2 (en) 2016-03-07 2019-04-02 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands for therapeutic compounds
US10280423B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2019-05-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
US10294474B2 (en) 2016-09-02 2019-05-21 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands
WO2019140452A1 (en) 2018-01-15 2019-07-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of dnm2 expression
WO2019217527A1 (en) 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fxi expression
US10557137B2 (en) 2015-11-06 2020-02-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
WO2020033748A1 (en) 2018-08-08 2020-02-13 Arcturus Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and agents against nonalcoholic steatohepatitis
US10570169B2 (en) 2014-05-22 2020-02-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
WO2020061200A1 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-03-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pnpla3 expression
US10731157B2 (en) 2015-08-24 2020-08-04 Halo-Bio Rnai Therapeutics, Inc. Polynucleotide nanoparticles for the modulation of gene expression and uses thereof
WO2021074772A1 (en) 2019-10-14 2021-04-22 Astrazeneca Ab Modulators of pnpla3 expression
EP3862362A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-08-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugates of modified antisense oligonucleotides and their use for modulating pkk expression
US11116778B2 (en) 2019-01-15 2021-09-14 Empirico Inc. Prodrugs of ALOX-15 inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11142766B2 (en) 2014-11-17 2021-10-12 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Apolipoprotein C3 (APOC3) iRNA compositions and methods of use thereof
US11149264B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2021-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
US11299737B1 (en) 2020-02-28 2022-04-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating SMN2
US11400161B2 (en) 2016-10-06 2022-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of conjugating oligomeric compounds
US11447521B2 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-09-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating angiotensinogen expression
WO2022239001A1 (en) 2021-05-10 2022-11-17 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions for treating neurological conditions
EP4092119A2 (en) 2015-07-10 2022-11-23 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of diacyglycerol acyltransferase 2 (dgat2)
WO2023056440A1 (en) 2021-10-01 2023-04-06 Adarx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Prekallikrein-modulating compositions and methods of use thereof
EP4309732A2 (en) 2017-03-24 2024-01-24 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pcsk9 expression
US12013403B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2024-06-18 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions and methods for detection of SMN protein in a subject and treatment of a subject

Families Citing this family (280)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7833992B2 (en) * 2001-05-18 2010-11-16 Merck Sharpe & Dohme Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
ATE427948T1 (en) * 2001-04-24 2009-04-15 Purdue Research Foundation FOLATE MIMETICS AND THEIR FOLATE RECEPTOR-BINDING CONJUGATES
WO2003064625A2 (en) 2002-02-01 2003-08-07 Sequitur, Inc. Oligonucleotide compositions with enhanced efficiency
US20030166282A1 (en) * 2002-02-01 2003-09-04 David Brown High potency siRNAS for reducing the expression of target genes
US20060009409A1 (en) 2002-02-01 2006-01-12 Woolf Tod M Double-stranded oligonucleotides
ES2324708T3 (en) * 2002-05-15 2009-08-13 Endocyte, Inc. VITAMIN-MYTHOMYCIN CONJUGATES.
US20100075423A1 (en) * 2002-06-12 2010-03-25 Life Technologies Corporation Methods and compositions relating to polypeptides with rnase iii domains that mediate rna interference
WO2003106630A2 (en) * 2002-06-12 2003-12-24 Ambion, Inc. Methods and compositions relating to polypeptides with rnase iii domains that mediate rna interference
US20040248094A1 (en) * 2002-06-12 2004-12-09 Ford Lance P. Methods and compositions relating to labeled RNA molecules that reduce gene expression
US7601332B2 (en) 2003-01-27 2009-10-13 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugates
US20050233342A1 (en) * 2003-03-07 2005-10-20 Muthiah Manoharan Methods of preventing off-target gene silencing
JP4789208B2 (en) * 2003-04-09 2011-10-12 バイオデリバリー サイエンシーズ インターナショナル インコーポレイティッド Swirl composition for protein expression
WO2005021749A1 (en) * 2003-08-28 2005-03-10 Novartis Ag Interfering rna duplex having blunt-ends and 3’-modifications
EP1687410A4 (en) 2003-10-07 2008-04-09 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc Antisense oligonucleotides optimized for kidney targeting
US20050191653A1 (en) * 2003-11-03 2005-09-01 Freier Susan M. Modulation of SGLT2 expression
US20090280567A1 (en) * 2004-02-06 2009-11-12 Dharmacon, Inc. Stabilized sirnas as transfection controls and silencing reagents
US7947659B2 (en) 2004-03-12 2011-05-24 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents targeting VEGF
KR101147147B1 (en) * 2004-04-01 2012-05-25 머크 샤프 앤드 돔 코포레이션 Modified polynucleotides for reducing off-target effects in rna interference
MXPA06012076A (en) * 2004-04-20 2007-01-25 Nastech Pharm Co Methods and compositions for enhancing delivery of double-stranded rna or a double-stranded hybrid nucleic acid to regulate gene expression in mammalian cells.
CA2572151A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-08-24 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotides comprising a non-phosphate backbone linkage
CA2572439A1 (en) * 2004-07-02 2006-01-12 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Immunostimulatory sirna molecules and uses therefor
US20080213891A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2008-09-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RNAi Agents Comprising Universal Nucleobases
EP1789391B1 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-06-28 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2990410A1 (en) * 2004-08-10 2016-03-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
AU2011250733C1 (en) * 2004-08-10 2013-09-12 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
NZ583290A (en) 2004-09-24 2011-05-27 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc Rnai modulation of apob and uses thereof
US7713944B2 (en) * 2004-10-13 2010-05-11 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomers comprising activated disulfides which bind to plasma proteins and their use for delivery to cells
US7790878B2 (en) 2004-10-22 2010-09-07 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RNAi modulation of RSV, PIV and other respiratory viruses and uses thereof
US20060089324A1 (en) * 2004-10-22 2006-04-27 Sailen Barik RNAi modulation of RSV, PIV and other respiratory viruses and uses thereof
US20060105979A1 (en) * 2004-11-08 2006-05-18 Hybridon, Inc. Synergistic inhibition of VEGF and modulation of the immune response
EP2199298A1 (en) * 2004-11-17 2010-06-23 Protiva Biotherapeutics Inc. Sirna silencing of Apolipoprotein B
JP2008521401A (en) * 2004-11-24 2008-06-26 アルナイラム ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド RNAi regulation of BCR-ABL fusion gene and method of use thereof
CA2590768A1 (en) 2004-12-14 2006-06-22 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Rnai modulation of mll-af4 and uses thereof
US20060142228A1 (en) * 2004-12-23 2006-06-29 Ambion, Inc. Methods and compositions concerning siRNA's as mediators of RNA interference
EP2230304B1 (en) 2005-01-07 2012-03-28 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. RNAI modulation of RSV and therapeutic uses thereof
WO2006081192A2 (en) * 2005-01-24 2006-08-03 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Rnai modulation of the nogo-l or nogo-r gene and uses thereof
WO2006113679A2 (en) 2005-04-15 2006-10-26 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Delivery of sirna by neutral lipid compositions
AU2006215413B2 (en) * 2005-02-18 2010-10-07 Astrazeneca Ab Method for determining responsiveness to CHK1 inhibitors
US20090016959A1 (en) * 2005-02-18 2009-01-15 Richard Beliveau Delivery of antibodies to the central nervous system
EP1863816B1 (en) * 2005-03-16 2014-06-25 Endocyte, Inc. Synthesis and purification of pteroic acid and conjugates thereof
US20060223777A1 (en) * 2005-03-29 2006-10-05 Dharmacon, Inc. Highly functional short hairpin RNA
CA2608964A1 (en) 2005-06-27 2007-01-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Rnai modulation of hif-1 and therapeutic uses thereof
EP2230305A1 (en) * 2005-07-21 2010-09-22 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Rnai modulation of the rho-a gene and uses thereof
WO2007022506A2 (en) * 2005-08-18 2007-02-22 University Of Massachusetts Methods and compositions for treating neurological disease
WO2007022493A2 (en) * 2005-08-19 2007-02-22 Endocyte, Inc. Ligand conjugates of vinca alkaloids, analogs, and derivatives
EP1948241B1 (en) * 2005-08-19 2014-03-05 Endocyte, Inc. Multi-drug ligand conjugates
US20070054873A1 (en) * 2005-08-26 2007-03-08 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Glucocorticoid modulation of nucleic acid-mediated immune stimulation
JPWO2007029361A1 (en) * 2005-09-02 2009-03-12 武田薬品工業株式会社 Short-chain deoxyribonucleic acid or sustained-release microspheres containing short-chain ribonucleic acid and method for producing the same
BRPI0617860A2 (en) * 2005-10-28 2011-08-09 Topigen Pharmaceuticals Inc small interfering oligonucleotides comprising arabinose-modified nucleotides
EP1951737A4 (en) 2005-11-01 2009-07-01 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc Rnai inhibition of influenza virus replication
US8101741B2 (en) * 2005-11-02 2012-01-24 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Modified siRNA molecules and uses thereof
CA2626690A1 (en) * 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibiting expression of factor v leiden mutant gene
US20090069263A1 (en) * 2005-12-16 2009-03-12 Damha Masad J 4'-thioarabinonucleotide-containing oligonucleotides, compounds and methods for their preparation and uses thereof
WO2007109097A2 (en) * 2006-03-16 2007-09-27 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RNAi MODULATION OF TGF-BETA AND THERAPEUTIC USES THEREOF
WO2007112414A2 (en) * 2006-03-27 2007-10-04 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated double strand compositions for use in gene modulation
KR101362681B1 (en) 2006-03-31 2014-02-13 알닐람 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Compositions and methods for inhibiting expression of Eg5 gene
US8007790B2 (en) 2006-04-03 2011-08-30 Stowers Institute For Medical Research Methods for treating polycystic kidney disease (PKD) or other cyst forming diseases
CA3024953A1 (en) * 2006-04-03 2007-10-11 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Pharmaceutical composition comprising anti-mirna antisense oligonucleotides
EP2013222B1 (en) * 2006-04-28 2013-02-13 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibiting expression of a gene from the jc virus
GB0608838D0 (en) * 2006-05-04 2006-06-14 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
WO2007143315A2 (en) 2006-05-05 2007-12-13 Isis Pharmaceutical, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating expression of pcsk9
US7915399B2 (en) * 2006-06-09 2011-03-29 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Modified siRNA molecules and uses thereof
AU2007293187A1 (en) 2006-06-30 2008-03-13 Rosetta Genomics Ltd A method for detecting nucleic acids
WO2008036841A2 (en) 2006-09-22 2008-03-27 Dharmacon, Inc. Tripartite oligonucleotide complexes and methods for gene silencing by rna interference
US7960360B2 (en) * 2006-11-13 2011-06-14 Jennifer Rubin Grandis Antisense guanidinium peptide nucleic acid (GPNA) oligonucleotides as antitumor agents
US7429958B2 (en) * 2006-11-28 2008-09-30 Laird Technologies, Inc. Vehicle-mount antenna assemblies having snap-on outer cosmetic covers with compliant latching mechanisms for achieving zero-gap
WO2009024834A2 (en) * 2006-12-05 2009-02-26 Rosetta Genomics Ltd Nucleic acids involved in viral infection
JP5252622B2 (en) * 2007-01-17 2013-07-31 独立行政法人産業技術総合研究所 Double-stranded RNA capable of expressing high nuclease resistance and excellent RNA interference effect
EP2124967A4 (en) * 2007-01-26 2011-01-05 Rosetta Genomics Ltd Compositions and methods for treating hematopoietic malignancies
US20100104626A1 (en) * 2007-02-16 2010-04-29 Endocyte, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating and diagnosing kidney disease
US8765702B2 (en) * 2007-02-27 2014-07-01 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Composition and methods for modulating cell proliferation and cell death
US9006206B2 (en) 2007-02-27 2015-04-14 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Composition and methods for modulating cell proliferation and cell death
WO2008109432A2 (en) * 2007-03-02 2008-09-12 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Therapeutic targeting of interleukins using sirna in neutral liposomes
AU2008224988A1 (en) * 2007-03-14 2008-09-18 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US20100273172A1 (en) * 2007-03-27 2010-10-28 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Micrornas expression signature for determination of tumors origin
JP5744513B2 (en) * 2007-04-17 2015-07-08 バクスター・インターナショナル・インコーポレイテッドＢａｘｔｅｒ Ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｔｉｏｎａｌ Ｉｎｃｏｒｐ０Ｒａｔｅｄ Nucleic acid microparticles for pulmonary delivery
US8877917B2 (en) * 2007-04-23 2014-11-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glycoconjugates of RNA interference agents
US8314227B2 (en) 2007-05-22 2012-11-20 Marina Biotech, Inc. Hydroxymethyl substituted RNA oligonucleotides and RNA complexes
US9365634B2 (en) 2007-05-29 2016-06-14 Angiochem Inc. Aprotinin-like polypeptides for delivering agents conjugated thereto to tissues
US9138484B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2015-09-22 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
AU2007356036A1 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-08 Newsouth Innovations Pty Limited Treatment of rheumatoid arthritis
KR20100037120A (en) * 2007-07-06 2010-04-08 노스이스턴 유니버시티 Mixed micelles including amphipathic conjugates of rna agents, and uses thereof
EP2015071A1 (en) * 2007-07-13 2009-01-14 FUJIFILM Corporation Carrier, process for producing same, bioreactor, and chip for surface plasmon resonance analysis
US9193763B2 (en) 2007-08-17 2015-11-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
AR067997A1 (en) * 2007-08-24 2009-10-28 Novartis Ag ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
US8138318B2 (en) 2007-09-13 2012-03-20 Abbott Laboratories Hepatitis B pre-S2 nucleic acid
EP2548962B1 (en) * 2007-09-19 2016-01-13 Applied Biosystems, LLC Sirna sequence-independent modification formats for reducing off-target phenotypic effects in rnai, and stabilized forms thereof
CA2703491C (en) 2007-10-25 2017-06-13 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysins and processes for preparing
JP5252618B2 (en) * 2007-10-26 2013-07-31 独立行政法人産業技術総合研究所 Aromatic ring-modified siRNA with high RNA interference effect
US9133522B2 (en) * 2007-10-31 2015-09-15 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Compositions and methods for the diagnosis and prognosis of mesothelioma
CA3043911A1 (en) 2007-12-04 2009-07-02 Arbutus Biopharma Corporation Targeting lipids
CA2708171C (en) 2007-12-04 2018-02-27 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Folate conjugates
US20090238772A1 (en) * 2007-12-13 2009-09-24 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for prevention or treatment of rsv infection
US20110039785A1 (en) * 2007-12-20 2011-02-17 Angiochem Inc. Polypeptide-nucleic acid conjugates and uses thereof
ES2535419T3 (en) 2007-12-27 2015-05-11 Protiva Biotherapeutics Inc. Polo kinase expression silencing using interfering RNA
WO2009093254A2 (en) * 2008-01-27 2009-07-30 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Methods and compositions for diagnosing complications of pregnancy
US8188060B2 (en) 2008-02-11 2012-05-29 Dharmacon, Inc. Duplex oligonucleotides with enhanced functionality in gene regulation
CN102016036B (en) * 2008-02-11 2015-04-08 阿克赛医药公司 Modified RNAi polynucleotides and uses thereof
US20110028531A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2011-02-03 Elena Feinstein Novel sirna compounds for inhibiting rtp801
WO2009125401A2 (en) 2008-04-10 2009-10-15 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Compositions and methods for enhancing oil content in plants
HUE034483T2 (en) 2008-04-15 2018-02-28 Protiva Biotherapeutics Inc Novel lipid formulations for nucleic acid delivery
WO2009129319A2 (en) 2008-04-15 2009-10-22 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Silencing of csn5 gene expression using interfering rna
BRPI0910557A2 (en) * 2008-04-18 2015-09-29 Angiochem Inc paclitaxel pharmaceutical compositions, paclitaxel analogs or paclitaxel conjugates and related methods of preparation and use.
LT2281006T (en) 2008-04-30 2017-11-27 Immunogen, Inc. Cross-linkers and their uses
US8951979B2 (en) * 2008-06-13 2015-02-10 Cornell University Pain treatment using ERK2 inhibitors
WO2010008582A2 (en) 2008-07-18 2010-01-21 Rxi Pharmaceuticals Corporation Phagocytic cell drug delivery system
US20110160086A1 (en) 2008-08-06 2011-06-30 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Gene expression signature for classification of kidney tumors
US9068232B2 (en) 2008-08-06 2015-06-30 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Gene expression signature for classification of kidney tumors
JP2012502040A (en) * 2008-09-02 2012-01-26 アルニラム ファーマスーティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Synthetic methods and derivatives of triphosphate oligonucleotides
EP3336188B1 (en) 2008-09-22 2020-05-06 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Reduced size self-delivering rnai compounds
JP5705118B2 (en) 2008-10-15 2015-04-22 アンジオケム インコーポレーテッド Etoposide and doxorubicin complex for drug delivery
WO2010043047A1 (en) 2008-10-15 2010-04-22 Angiochem Inc. Conjugates of glp-1 agonists and uses thereof
WO2010045584A1 (en) * 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeting of nucleotides
US20100168205A1 (en) * 2008-10-23 2010-07-01 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and Compositions for Prevention or Treatment of RSV Infection Using Modified Duplex RNA Molecules
WO2010059226A2 (en) 2008-11-19 2010-05-27 Rxi Pharmaceuticals Corporation Inhibition of map4k4 through rnai
US20100222417A1 (en) * 2008-11-26 2010-09-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Compostions and methods for enhancing oligonucleotide delivery across and into epithelial tissues
CN102239259A (en) 2008-12-03 2011-11-09 玛瑞纳生物技术有限公司 Usirna complexes
MX2011005963A (en) 2008-12-05 2011-09-01 Angiochem Inc Conjugates of neurotensin or neurotensin analogs and uses thereof.
US9493774B2 (en) 2009-01-05 2016-11-15 Rxi Pharmaceuticals Corporation Inhibition of PCSK9 through RNAi
EP3243504A1 (en) * 2009-01-29 2017-11-15 Arbutus Biopharma Corporation Improved lipid formulation
US9745574B2 (en) 2009-02-04 2017-08-29 Rxi Pharmaceuticals Corporation RNA duplexes with single stranded phosphorothioate nucleotide regions for additional functionality
KR101141544B1 (en) 2009-03-13 2012-05-03 한국과학기술원 Multi-conjugate of siRNA and preparing method thereof
JP2012524030A (en) 2009-04-20 2012-10-11 アンジオケム インコーポレーテッド Treatment of ovarian cancer with an anticancer agent conjugated to an angiopep-2 analog
EP2427472B1 (en) * 2009-05-05 2016-06-22 Miragen Therapeutics Lipophilic polynucleotide conjugates
PL2437790T3 (en) 2009-06-03 2019-09-30 Immunogen, Inc. Conjugation methods
WO2011000107A1 (en) 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Novel lipid formulations for delivery of therapeutic agents to solid tumors
US8236943B2 (en) * 2009-07-01 2012-08-07 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for silencing apolipoprotein B
US9161988B2 (en) 2009-07-02 2015-10-20 Angiochem Inc. Multimeric peptide conjugates and uses thereof
WO2011005942A2 (en) * 2009-07-08 2011-01-13 Idera Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotide-based compounds as inhibitors of toll-like receptors
WO2011011447A1 (en) 2009-07-20 2011-01-27 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for silencing ebola virus gene expression
JP2012533587A (en) 2009-07-22 2012-12-27 セニックス バイオサイエンス ゲーエムベーハー Delivery systems and conjugates for delivering compounds via naturally occurring intracellular transport pathways
US8822144B2 (en) 2009-08-19 2014-09-02 Rosetta Genomics Ltd. Compositions and methods for prognosis and treatment of prostate cancer
US9222086B2 (en) 2009-09-23 2015-12-29 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for silencing genes expressed in cancer
US20130071421A1 (en) * 2009-10-02 2013-03-21 W. Ian Lipkin Turkey viral hepatitis virus and uses thereof
EP2486023A4 (en) 2009-10-06 2014-05-07 Immunogen Inc Potent conjugates and hydrophilic linkers
KR101851699B1 (en) 2009-11-02 2018-04-24 더 트러스티스 오브 더 유니버시티 오브 펜실바니아 Foot and mouth disease virus (fmdv) consensus proteins, coding sequences therefor and vaccines made therefrom
WO2011100403A1 (en) 2010-02-10 2011-08-18 Immunogen, Inc Cd20 antibodies and uses thereof
US9951324B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2018-04-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
EP3620467A1 (en) 2010-03-12 2020-03-11 Debiopharm International SA Cd37-binding molecules and immunoconjugates thereof
IL265674B2 (en) 2010-03-24 2024-05-01 Phio Pharm Corp Rna interference in dermal and fibrotic indications
CN106074591B (en) 2010-03-24 2020-01-14 菲奥医药公司 RNA interference in ocular symptoms
RU2615143C2 (en) 2010-03-24 2017-04-04 Адвирна Self-delivered rnai compounds of reduced size
US10913767B2 (en) * 2010-04-22 2021-02-09 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotides comprising acyclic and abasic nucleosides and analogs
PL2561078T3 (en) 2010-04-23 2019-02-28 Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory NOVEL STRUCTURALLY DESIGNED shRNAs
US20110312001A1 (en) 2010-06-15 2011-12-22 Emile Nuwaysir Compendium of ready-built stem cell models for interrogation of biological response
WO2012019024A2 (en) 2010-08-04 2012-02-09 Immunogen, Inc. Her3-binding molecules and immunoconjugates thereof
EA201390575A1 (en) 2010-10-29 2014-01-30 Иммьюноджен, Инк. NON-ANTAGONISTIC EGFR-BINDING MOLECULES AND THEIR IMMUNOCONJUGATES
CA2815277A1 (en) 2010-10-29 2012-05-03 Immunogen, Inc. Novel egfr-binding molecules and immunoconjugates thereof
EP2643479B1 (en) 2010-11-22 2017-09-13 Rosetta Genomics Ltd Methods and materials for classification of tissue of origin of tumor samples
WO2012101235A1 (en) 2011-01-26 2012-08-02 Cenix Bioscience Gmbh Delivery system and conjugates for compound delivery via naturally occurring intracellular transport routes
US20140275211A1 (en) 2011-06-21 2014-09-18 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Assays and methods for determining activity of a therapeutic agent in a subject
RU2014121820A (en) 2011-11-21 2015-12-27 Иммьюноджен, Инк. METHOD FOR TREATING TUMORS RESISTANT TO ANTI-EGFR THERAPIES USING AN EGFR ANTIBODY CONJUGATE WITH CYTOTOXIC AGENT
US9035039B2 (en) 2011-12-22 2015-05-19 Protiva Biotherapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for silencing SMAD4
WO2013124816A2 (en) 2012-02-22 2013-08-29 Brainstem Biotec Ltd. Generation of neural stem cells and motor neurons
JP6275655B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-02-07 プロティバ バイオセラピューティクス インコーポレイテッド Trialkylcationic lipids and methods of use thereof
WO2013126797A1 (en) 2012-02-24 2013-08-29 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin b receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US20140080175A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2014-03-20 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US20130259927A1 (en) * 2012-04-02 2013-10-03 Gradalis, Inc. Ewing's Sarcoma Bifunctional shRNA Design
US20150322428A1 (en) * 2012-06-18 2015-11-12 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for improved cellular uptake of antisense compounds
WO2014018375A1 (en) 2012-07-23 2014-01-30 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Cyp8b1 and uses thereof in therapeutic and diagnostic methods
SG11201502896XA (en) 2012-10-16 2015-05-28 Endocyte Inc Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
EA201890915A1 (en) 2012-11-15 2018-09-28 Эндосайт, Инк. CONJUGATES FOR DELIVERY OF MEDICINES AND METHODS OF TREATMENT OF DISEASES CAUSED BY CELLS EXPRESSING PSMA
WO2014093688A1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-19 1Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Compositions and methods for functional nucleic acid delivery
CN114045295A (en) 2013-03-15 2022-02-15 宾夕法尼亚大学理事会 Foot and Mouth Disease Virus (FMDV) consensus proteins, coding sequences thereof, and vaccines made therefrom
MX371093B (en) 2013-05-01 2020-01-16 Regulus Therapeutics Inc Microrna compounds and methods for modulating mir-122.
AU2014259953B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2020-07-02 Regulus Therapeutics Inc. Compounds and methods for enhanced cellular uptake
US20160145628A1 (en) 2013-06-18 2016-05-26 Ramot At Tel-Aviv University Ltd. Nanocarrier system for micrornas and uses thereof
JP6702862B2 (en) 2013-07-11 2020-06-03 アルニラム ファーマスーティカルズ インコーポレイテッドＡｌｎｙｌａｍ Ｐｈａｒｍａｃｅｕｔｉｃａｌｓ， Ｉｎｃ． Oligonucleotide-ligand conjugates and methods for their preparation
DE202014011600U1 (en) 2013-10-18 2023-05-31 Deutsches Krebsforschungszentrum, Stiftung Des Öffentlichen Rechts Labeled prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) inhibitors, their use as imaging agents and pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of prostate cancer
JP6772062B2 (en) 2013-12-02 2020-10-21 フィオ ファーマシューティカルズ コーポレーションＰｈｉｏ Ｐｈａｒｍａｃｅｕｔｉｃａｌｓ Ｃｏｒｐ． Cancer immunotherapy
CN105960265A (en) 2013-12-04 2016-09-21 阿克赛医药公司 Methods for treatment of wound healing utilizing chemically modified oligonucleotides
US9856475B2 (en) 2014-03-25 2018-01-02 Arcturus Therapeutics, Inc. Formulations for treating amyloidosis
JP6771387B2 (en) 2014-03-25 2020-10-21 アークトゥラス・セラピューティクス・インコーポレイテッドＡｒｃｔｕｒｕｓ Ｔｈｅｒａｐｅｕｔｉｃｓ，Ｉｎｃ． Transthyretin allele-selective UNA oligomer for gene silencing
CA2946719C (en) 2014-03-25 2023-09-26 Arcturus Therapeutics, Inc. Una oligomers having reduced off-target effects in gene silencing
US11279934B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2022-03-22 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Methods for treating cancer using nucleic acids targeting MDM2 or MYCN
JP2017514908A (en) 2014-05-01 2017-06-08 アールエックスアイ ファーマシューティカルズ コーポレーション Methods for the treatment of disorders in the front of the eye utilizing nucleic acid molecules
US10098959B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2018-10-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for synthesis of reactive conjugate clusters
WO2015191590A2 (en) 2014-06-09 2015-12-17 Biomed Valley Discoveries, Inc. Combination therapies targeting tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells and microtubules
WO2015191583A2 (en) 2014-06-09 2015-12-17 Biomed Valley Discoveries, Inc. Combination therapies targeting tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells and topoisomerase
US11034757B2 (en) 2014-06-09 2021-06-15 Biomed Valley Discoveries, Inc. Combination therapies using agents that target tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells and tumor vasculature
US10434174B2 (en) 2014-06-09 2019-10-08 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Combination therapies using platinum agents and agents that target tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells
US10758613B2 (en) 2014-06-09 2020-09-01 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services National Intstitutes Of Health Combination therapies using anti-metabolites and agents that target tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells
WO2015191610A2 (en) 2014-06-09 2015-12-17 Biomed Valley Discoveries, Inc. Combination therapies using agents that target tumor-associated stroma or tumor cells and other pathways
WO2016011324A2 (en) 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 Oregon Health & Science University 5'-triphosphate oligoribonucleotides
WO2016030863A1 (en) 2014-08-29 2016-03-03 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Compounds and methods for treating viral infections
CN107073294A (en) 2014-09-05 2017-08-18 阿克赛医药公司 Use the method for targeting TYR or MMP1 exonuclease treatment aging and skin disorder
US9950194B2 (en) 2014-09-09 2018-04-24 Mevion Medical Systems, Inc. Patient positioning system
JP2017530968A (en) * 2014-09-17 2017-10-19 ユニバーシティー オブ アイオワ リサーチ ファンデーション Viral RNA segments as immunomodulators and vaccine components
JOP20200092A1 (en) 2014-11-10 2017-06-16 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc HEPATITIS B VIRUS (HBV) iRNA COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF
US10188759B2 (en) 2015-01-07 2019-01-29 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for imaging
US9434947B2 (en) 2015-01-20 2016-09-06 Oregon Health & Science University Modulation of KCNH2 isoform expression by oligonucleotides as a therapeutic approach for long QT syndrome
JP6830441B2 (en) 2015-04-01 2021-02-17 アークトゥラス・セラピューティクス・インコーポレイテッドＡｒｃｔｕｒｕｓ Ｔｈｅｒａｐｅｕｔｉｃｓ，Ｉｎｃ． Therapeutic UNA oligomers and their use
JP7033452B2 (en) 2015-06-15 2022-03-10 エムペグ エルエイ リミテッド ライアビリティ カンパニー Defined multi-conjugated oligonucleotide
DK3307326T3 (en) 2015-06-15 2020-10-19 Angiochem Inc METHODS FOR THE TREATMENT OF LEPTOMENINGAL CARCINOMATOSIS
WO2017004079A1 (en) 2015-06-29 2017-01-05 Biomed Valley Discoveries, Inc. Lpt-723 and immune checkpoint inhibitor combinations and methods of treatment
EP3862005A1 (en) 2015-07-06 2021-08-11 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Nucleic acid molecules targeting superoxide dismutase 1 (sod1)
WO2017007825A1 (en) 2015-07-06 2017-01-12 Rxi Pharmaceuticals Corporation Methods for treating neurological disorders using a synergistic small molecule and nucleic acids therapeutic approach
WO2017015671A1 (en) 2015-07-23 2017-01-26 Arcturus Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for treating amyloidosis
US10633653B2 (en) 2015-08-14 2020-04-28 University Of Massachusetts Bioactive conjugates for oligonucleotide delivery
JP6666673B2 (en) * 2015-09-07 2020-03-18 キリンホールディングス株式会社 Intracellular delivery vehicle
US11021707B2 (en) 2015-10-19 2021-06-01 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Reduced size self-delivering nucleic acid compounds targeting long non-coding RNA
JP2019503394A (en) 2016-01-31 2019-02-07 ユニバーシティ・オブ・マサチューセッツＵｎｉｖｅｒｓｉｔｙ Ｏｆ Ｍａｓｓａｃｈｕｓｅｔｔｓ Branched oligonucleotide
WO2017147240A1 (en) 2016-02-23 2017-08-31 Tarveda Therapeutics, Inc. Hsp90 targeted conjugates and particles and formulations thereof
US10036024B2 (en) 2016-06-03 2018-07-31 Purdue Research Foundation siRNA compositions that specifically downregulate expression of a variant of the PNPLA3 gene and methods of use thereof for treating a chronic liver disease or alcoholic liver disease (ALD)
SI3468990T1 (en) 2016-06-14 2024-07-31 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-c5 antibodies and uses thereof
WO2018013999A1 (en) 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 Am Chemicals Llc Non-nucleosidic solid supports and phosphoramidite building blocks for oligonucleotide synthesis
US11753638B2 (en) 2016-08-12 2023-09-12 University Of Massachusetts Conjugated oligonucleotides
UY37376A (en) 2016-08-26 2018-03-23 Amgen Inc ARNI CONSTRUCTIONS TO INHIBIT EXPRESSION OF ASGR1 AND METHODS FOR USE
EP3516062A1 (en) 2016-09-21 2019-07-31 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Myostatin irna compositions and methods of use thereof
US11447519B2 (en) 2016-11-10 2022-09-20 San Diego State University Research Foundation Compounds for fluorescence sensing of duplex formation
AU2018215684B2 (en) 2017-02-06 2024-03-07 Mpeg La, Llc Multimeric oligonucleotides having decreased kidney clearance
US11324820B2 (en) 2017-04-18 2022-05-10 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for the treatment of subjects having a hepatitis b virus (HBV) infection
EP3642341A4 (en) 2017-06-23 2021-06-16 University Of Massachusetts Two-tailed self-delivering sirna and related methods
RU2020108454A (en) 2017-07-31 2021-09-02 Дзе Трастиз Оф Коламбия Юниверсити Ин Дзе Сити Оф Нью Йорк COMPOUNDS, COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR T-CELL T-CELL ACUTE LYMPHOBLASTIC LEUKEMIA
CN118236391A (en) 2017-12-01 2024-06-25 苏州瑞博生物技术股份有限公司 Nucleic acid, composition containing nucleic acid, conjugate, preparation method and application
US11492620B2 (en) 2017-12-01 2022-11-08 Suzhou Ribo Life Science Co., Ltd. Double-stranded oligonucleotide, composition and conjugate comprising double-stranded oligonucleotide, preparation method thereof and use thereof
WO2019105435A1 (en) 2017-12-01 2019-06-06 苏州瑞博生物技术有限公司 Nucleic acid, composition and conjugate containing nucleic acid, preparation method and use
WO2019105414A1 (en) 2017-12-01 2019-06-06 苏州瑞博生物技术有限公司 Nucleic acid, composition and conjugate containing nucleic acid, preparation method therefor and use thereof
JP7365052B2 (en) 2017-12-01 2023-10-19 スーチョウ リボ ライフ サイエンス カンパニー、リミテッド Nucleic acids, compositions and complexes containing the nucleic acids, and preparation methods and uses
UY38003A (en) 2017-12-12 2019-06-28 Amgen Inc ARNI CONSTRUCTIONS TO INHIBIT THE EXPRESSION OF PNPLA3 AND METHODS OF USE OF THE SAME
MX2020006113A (en) 2017-12-13 2020-08-24 Regeneron Pharma Anti-c5 antibody combinations and uses thereof.
US11633482B2 (en) * 2017-12-29 2023-04-25 Suzhou Ribo Life Science Co., Ltd. Conjugates and preparation and use thereof
US11674141B2 (en) 2018-02-28 2023-06-13 National University Corporation Tokyo Medical And Dental University Ischemic-lesion-site-specific gene therapy
KR20210018267A (en) 2018-05-07 2021-02-17 알닐람 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Extrahepatic delivery
EP3790972A1 (en) 2018-05-08 2021-03-17 Regulus Therapeutics Inc. Galnac conjugated modified oligonucleotide as mir-122 inhibitor having hcv antiviral activity with reduced hyperbilirubinemia side-effect
US10857174B2 (en) 2018-07-27 2020-12-08 United States Government As Represented By The Department Of Veterans Affairs Morpholino oligonucleotides useful in cancer treatment
SG11202101288TA (en) 2018-08-10 2021-03-30 Univ Massachusetts Modified oligonucleotides targeting snps
BR112021001613A2 (en) 2018-08-13 2021-05-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. double-stranded ribonucleic acid agents, cell, pharmaceutical compositions, methods of inhibiting gene expression, inhibiting replication and treating a subject, methods for reducing the level of an antigen and for reducing viral load, and use of an agent dsrna
CN111655849B (en) 2018-08-21 2024-05-10 苏州瑞博生物技术股份有限公司 Nucleic acid, pharmaceutical composition containing nucleic acid, conjugate and application of conjugate
TW202028465A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-08-01 美商阿尼拉製藥公司 Transthyretin (ttr) irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing ttr-associated ocular diseases
CN111655297A (en) 2018-09-30 2020-09-11 苏州瑞博生物技术有限公司 siRNA conjugate and preparation method and application thereof
CN112969527A (en) * 2018-11-08 2021-06-15 深圳华大生命科学研究院 Micro-fluidic chip, preparation method thereof and DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) synthesis method
TW202039843A (en) 2018-12-10 2020-11-01 美商安進公司 Rnai constructs for inhibiting pnpla3 expression and methods of use thereof
JP2022511866A (en) 2018-12-10 2022-02-01 アムジエン・インコーポレーテツド Chemically modified RNAi constructs and their use
WO2020225779A1 (en) 2019-05-09 2020-11-12 Istituto Pasteur Italia - Fondazione Cenci Bolognetti Rig-i agonists for cancer treatment and immunotherapy
AU2020279101A1 (en) 2019-05-17 2021-11-18 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oral delivery of oligonucleotides
TW202111124A (en) 2019-05-30 2021-03-16 美商安進公司 Rnai constructs for inhibiting scap expression and methods of use thereof
AU2020329155A1 (en) 2019-08-09 2022-03-10 University Of Massachusetts Chemically modified oligonucleotides targeting SNPs
CA3150758A1 (en) 2019-08-13 2021-02-18 Amgen Inc. Rnai constructs for inhibiting slc30a8 expression and methods of use thereof
CN114728018B (en) * 2019-11-01 2024-07-19 阿尔尼拉姆医药品有限公司 Huntington (HTT) iRNA pharmaceutical compositions and methods of use thereof
EP4055166A2 (en) 2019-11-06 2022-09-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Extrahepatic delivery
EP4055165A1 (en) 2019-11-06 2022-09-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Transthyretin (ttr) irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing ttr-associated ocular diseases
EP4055167A2 (en) 2019-11-08 2022-09-14 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Chemically modified oligonucleotides targeting bromodomain containing protein 4 (brd4) for immunotherapy
MX2022007005A (en) 2019-12-09 2022-08-25 Amgen Inc RNAi CONSTRUCTS AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING LPA EXPRESSION.
EP4085136A1 (en) 2019-12-31 2022-11-09 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Chemically modified oligonucleotides with improved systemic delivery
WO2021178607A1 (en) 2020-03-05 2021-09-10 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Complement component c3 irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing complement component c3-associated diseases
US20230150926A1 (en) 2020-03-17 2023-05-18 Genevant Sciences Gmbh Cationic lipids for lipid nanoparticle delivery of therapeutics to hepatic stellate cells
JP2023519215A (en) 2020-03-23 2023-05-10 アムジエン・インコーポレーテツド Monoclonal antibody against chemically modified nucleic acid and its use
JP2023528608A (en) 2020-06-01 2023-07-05 アムジエン・インコーポレーテツド RNAi constructs for inhibiting HSD17B13 expression and methods of use thereof
US20230257745A1 (en) 2020-07-10 2023-08-17 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Circular siRNAs
US20240294906A1 (en) * 2020-07-29 2024-09-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Atxn2 irna compositions and methods of use thereof for treating or preventing atxn2-associated neurodegenerative diseases
EP4196584A2 (en) 2020-08-13 2023-06-21 Amgen Inc. Rnai constructs and methods for inhibiting marc1 expression
WO2022140126A1 (en) 2020-12-21 2022-06-30 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Dna vector and uses thereof for detecting hiv and siv
EP4271695A2 (en) 2020-12-31 2023-11-08 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2'-modified nucleoside based oligonucleotide prodrugs
WO2022147214A2 (en) 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic-disulfide modified phosphate based oligonucleotide prodrugs
MX2023011466A (en) 2021-03-29 2024-02-01 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc Huntingtin (htt) irna agent compositions and methods of use thereof.
JP2024522068A (en) * 2021-05-18 2024-06-11 アルナイラム ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT2) IRNA compositions and methods of use thereof
CN117677699A (en) 2021-06-23 2024-03-08 马萨诸塞大学 Optimized anti-FLT 1 oligonucleotide compounds for treating preeclampsia and other angiogenic disorders
EP4367237A2 (en) 2021-07-09 2024-05-15 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bis-rnai compounds for cns delivery
MX2024000981A (en) 2021-07-21 2024-02-12 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc Metabolic disorder-associated target gene irna compositions and methods of use thereof.
WO2023015264A1 (en) 2021-08-04 2023-02-09 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Immunotherapy of cancer utilizing natural killer cells treated with chemically modified oligonucleotides
US20240301430A1 (en) 2021-08-04 2024-09-12 Phio Pharmaceuticals Corp. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
CA3227661A1 (en) 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Weimin Wang 1'-alkyl modified ribose derivatives and methods of use
CA3233113A1 (en) 2021-09-22 2023-03-30 Sanegene Bio Usa Inc. 2'-alkyl or 3'-alkyl modified ribose derivatives for use in the in-vivo delivery of oligonucleotides
WO2023059695A1 (en) 2021-10-05 2023-04-13 Sanegene Bio Usa Inc. Polyhydroxylated cyclopentane derivatives and methods of use
MX2024004306A (en) 2021-10-05 2024-05-17 Amgen Inc Compositions and methods for enhancing gene silencing activity of oligonucleotide compounds.
WO2023064530A1 (en) 2021-10-15 2023-04-20 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Extra-hepatic delivery irna compositions and methods of use thereof
WO2023069754A2 (en) 2021-10-22 2023-04-27 Amgen Inc. Rnai constructs for inhibiting gpam expression and methods of use thereof
WO2023144798A1 (en) 2022-01-31 2023-08-03 Genevant Sciences Gmbh Ionizable cationic lipids for lipid nanoparticles
AU2023211981A1 (en) 2022-01-31 2024-08-15 Genevant Sciences Gmbh Poly(alkyloxazoline)-lipid conjugates and lipid particles containing same
US20230346819A1 (en) 2022-02-22 2023-11-02 Sanegene Bio Usa Inc. 5'-modified carbocyclic ribonucleotide derivatives and methods of use
WO2023205801A2 (en) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 Asteroid Therapeutics Steroidal compositions and methods of treating lipogenic cancers
WO2023220744A2 (en) 2022-05-13 2023-11-16 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Single-stranded loop oligonucleotides
WO2024006999A2 (en) 2022-06-30 2024-01-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic-disulfide modified phosphate based oligonucleotide prodrugs
WO2024015796A1 (en) 2022-07-11 2024-01-18 Sanegene Bio Usa Inc. Optimized 2'- modified ribose derivatives and methods of use
WO2024026258A2 (en) 2022-07-25 2024-02-01 Amgen Inc. Rnai constructs and methods for inhibiting fam13a expression
WO2024073732A1 (en) 2022-09-30 2024-04-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified double-stranded rna agents
WO2024093907A1 (en) * 2022-10-31 2024-05-10 大睿生物医药科技(上海)有限公司 Ligand for delivering sirna to eye and central nervous system
WO2024130142A2 (en) 2022-12-16 2024-06-20 Amgen Inc. Rnai constructs for inhibiting ttr expression and methods of use thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5519134A (en) * 1994-01-11 1996-05-21 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrrolidine-containing monomers and oligomers
US6369237B1 (en) * 1997-03-07 2002-04-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College DNA glycosylase inhibitors, and uses related thereto
US20020086356A1 (en) * 2000-03-30 2002-07-04 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research RNA sequence-specific mediators of RNA interference
US20030170891A1 (en) * 2001-06-06 2003-09-11 Mcswiggen James A. RNA interference mediated inhibition of epidermal growth factor receptor gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
US20050107325A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2005-05-19 Muthiah Manoharan Modified iRNA agents

Family Cites Families (85)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3687808A (en) 1969-08-14 1972-08-29 Univ Leland Stanford Junior Synthetic polynucleotides
BE795866A (en) 1972-02-29 1973-08-23 Basf Ag PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF SOLID CHOLINE CHLORIDE FREE FLOW
DE3013839A1 (en) 1979-04-13 1980-10-30 Freunt Ind Co Ltd METHOD FOR PRODUCING AN ACTIVATED PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION
US4465503A (en) 1979-08-07 1984-08-14 Ube Industries Ltd. Diphenyl ether derivatives, process for preparing the same and herbicidal compositions containing the same
US4469863A (en) 1980-11-12 1984-09-04 Ts O Paul O P Nonionic nucleic acid alkyl and aryl phosphonates and processes for manufacture and use thereof
US5023243A (en) 1981-10-23 1991-06-11 Molecular Biosystems, Inc. Oligonucleotide therapeutic agent and method of making same
JPS5921613A (en) 1982-07-28 1984-02-03 Takeda Chem Ind Ltd Pharmaceutical preparation for rectum administration
US4486435A (en) 1983-05-16 1984-12-04 Basf Wyandotte Corporation Spray-dried vitamin powders using hydrophobic silica
JPS6051189A (en) * 1983-08-30 1985-03-22 Sankyo Co Ltd Thiazolidine derivative and its preparation
US4897355A (en) 1985-01-07 1990-01-30 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. N[ω,(ω-1)-dialkyloxy]- and N-[ω,(ω-1)-dialkenyloxy]-alk-1-yl-N,N,N-tetrasubstituted ammonium lipids and uses therefor
US5235033A (en) 1985-03-15 1993-08-10 Anti-Gene Development Group Alpha-morpholino ribonucleoside derivatives and polymers thereof
EP0639582B1 (en) 1985-03-15 1998-09-16 Antivirals Inc. Polynucleotide assay reagent and method
FR2594693B1 (en) 1986-02-24 1990-01-05 Farah Nabil NOVEL PROCESSES FOR THE PREPARATION FROM DRY EMULSIONS OF SOLID ORAL FORMS WITH MODIFIED AND DELAYED RELEASE OF THEIR ACTIVE INGREDIENTS
SE8701479L (en) 1987-04-09 1988-10-10 Carbomatrix Ab METHOD FOR CONTAINING BIOLOGICALLY EFFECTIVE PREPARATIONS AND USE THEREOF
CH672048A5 (en) 1987-09-16 1989-10-31 Nestle Sa
US5328470A (en) 1989-03-31 1994-07-12 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Treatment of diseases by site-specific instillation of cells or site-specific transformation of cells and kits therefor
FR2645866B1 (en) 1989-04-17 1991-07-05 Centre Nat Rech Scient NEW LIPOPOLYAMINES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE
US5256775A (en) 1989-06-05 1993-10-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Exonuclease-resistant oligonucleotides
US5264564A (en) 1989-10-24 1993-11-23 Gilead Sciences Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages
US5264562A (en) 1989-10-24 1993-11-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages
US5177198A (en) 1989-11-30 1993-01-05 University Of N.C. At Chapel Hill Process for preparing oligoribonucleoside and oligodeoxyribonucleoside boranophosphates
US5130302A (en) 1989-12-20 1992-07-14 Boron Bilogicals, Inc. Boronated nucleoside, nucleotide and oligonucleotide compounds, compositions and methods for using same
US5459255A (en) 1990-01-11 1995-10-17 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. N-2 substituted purines
US5457191A (en) 1990-01-11 1995-10-10 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-deazapurines
US5149797A (en) 1990-02-15 1992-09-22 The Worcester Foundation For Experimental Biology Method of site-specific alteration of rna and production of encoded polypeptides
US5264618A (en) 1990-04-19 1993-11-23 Vical, Inc. Cationic lipids for intracellular delivery of biologically active molecules
US5000888A (en) 1990-05-23 1991-03-19 Basf Corporation Process for spray drying riboflavin to produce a granulate product having low binder content
JPH0436233A (en) 1990-05-29 1992-02-06 Biomaterial Universe Kk Sustained release preparation containing physiologically active substance and decomposable and absorbable in living body
US6147204A (en) * 1990-06-11 2000-11-14 Nexstar Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleic acid ligand complexes
US5386023A (en) 1990-07-27 1995-01-31 Isis Pharmaceuticals Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs and preparation thereof through reductive coupling
US5378825A (en) 1990-07-27 1995-01-03 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs
DE69126530T2 (en) 1990-07-27 1998-02-05 Isis Pharmaceutical, Inc., Carlsbad, Calif. NUCLEASE RESISTANT, PYRIMIDINE MODIFIED OLIGONUCLEOTIDES THAT DETECT AND MODULE GENE EXPRESSION
US5489677A (en) 1990-07-27 1996-02-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleoside linkages containing adjacent oxygen and nitrogen atoms
US5223618A (en) 1990-08-13 1993-06-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds
JP3256539B2 (en) * 1990-08-28 2002-02-12 エポック・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレイテッド Solid support synthesis of 3'-tailed oligonucleotides via linking molecules
US5283185A (en) 1991-08-28 1994-02-01 University Of Tennessee Research Corporation Method for delivering nucleic acids into cells
US5484908A (en) 1991-11-26 1996-01-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotides containing 5-propynyl pyrimidines
US5359044A (en) 1991-12-13 1994-10-25 Isis Pharmaceuticals Cyclobutyl oligonucleotide surrogates
EP0646178A1 (en) 1992-06-04 1995-04-05 The Regents Of The University Of California expression cassette with regularoty regions functional in the mammmlian host
AU4541093A (en) 1992-06-18 1994-01-24 Genpharm International, Inc. Methods for producing transgenic non-human animals harboring a yeast artificial chromosome
US5476925A (en) 1993-02-01 1995-12-19 Northwestern University Oligodeoxyribonucleotides including 3'-aminonucleoside-phosphoramidate linkages and terminal 3'-amino groups
GB9304620D0 (en) 1993-03-06 1993-04-21 Ciba Geigy Ag Compounds
JPH07101882A (en) 1993-09-30 1995-04-18 Sanei Gen F F I Inc Preparation containing water-soluble hemicellulose
JPH07101881A (en) 1993-09-30 1995-04-18 Sanei Gen F F I Inc Preparation containing water-soluble hemicellulose
JPH07101884A (en) 1993-10-01 1995-04-18 Sanei Gen F F I Inc Prpearation containing water-soluble hemicellulose
JP3342550B2 (en) 1993-10-01 2002-11-11 三栄源エフ・エフ・アイ株式会社 Formulations containing water-soluble hemicellulose
US5801154A (en) * 1993-10-18 1998-09-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide modulation of multidrug resistance-associated protein
US5652359A (en) * 1993-12-02 1997-07-29 Epoch Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotides containing n-methyl thiolated bases having antiviral activity
US5539083A (en) 1994-02-23 1996-07-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Peptide nucleic acid combinatorial libraries and improved methods of synthesis
US5646126A (en) * 1994-02-28 1997-07-08 Epoch Pharmaceuticals Sterol modified oligonucleotide duplexes having anticancer activity
JPH07242568A (en) 1994-03-04 1995-09-19 Eisai Co Ltd Pharmaceutical preparation for masking bitterness
US5691316A (en) 1994-06-01 1997-11-25 Hybridon, Inc. Cyclodextrin cellular delivery system for oligonucleotides
JPH0867666A (en) 1994-08-29 1996-03-12 Lion Corp Powdery pharmaceutical preparation containing carotenoid and its production
JPH11508231A (en) 1995-05-26 1999-07-21 ソマティックス セラピー コーポレイション Delivery vehicles containing stable lipid / nucleic acid complexes
TW520293B (en) 1995-11-22 2003-02-11 Univ Johns Hopkins Med Delivery system to enhance cellular uptake of biomolecules
IL118003A0 (en) * 1996-04-23 1996-08-04 Yeda Res & Dev Novel vip fragments and pharmaceutical compositions comprising them
US5898031A (en) 1996-06-06 1999-04-27 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligoribonucleotides for cleaving RNA
US6001991A (en) * 1996-10-04 1999-12-14 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide modulation of MDR P-glycoprotein gene expression
US6034135A (en) 1997-03-06 2000-03-07 Promega Biosciences, Inc. Dimeric cationic lipids
US6509323B1 (en) 1998-07-01 2003-01-21 California Institute Of Technology Linear cyclodextrin copolymers
US6245427B1 (en) 1998-07-06 2001-06-12 DüZGüNES NEJAT Non-ligand polypeptide and liposome complexes as intracellular delivery vehicles
AU776150B2 (en) 1999-01-28 2004-08-26 Medical College Of Georgia Research Institute, Inc. Composition and method for (in vivo) and (in vitro) attenuation of gene expression using double stranded RNA
DE19956568A1 (en) 1999-01-30 2000-08-17 Roland Kreutzer Method and medicament for inhibiting the expression of a given gene
JP2002538790A (en) 1999-03-08 2002-11-19 プロトジーン・ラボラトリーズ・インコーポレーテッド Methods and compositions for economically synthesizing and assembling long DNA sequences
GB9927444D0 (en) 1999-11-19 2000-01-19 Cancer Res Campaign Tech Inhibiting gene expression
BR0109272A (en) * 2000-03-17 2004-06-29 Cell Therapeutics Inc Therapeutic conjugate agents of polyglutamic acid, methods for their preparation and uses
AR028948A1 (en) 2000-06-20 2003-05-28 Astrazeneca Ab NEW COMPOUNDS
WO2002044321A2 (en) 2000-12-01 2002-06-06 MAX-PLANCK-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. Rna interference mediating small rna molecules
TWI321054B (en) 2000-12-19 2010-03-01 California Inst Of Techn Compositions containing inclusion complexes
EP2415486B1 (en) * 2001-05-18 2017-02-22 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
AU2002329667A1 (en) * 2001-07-30 2003-02-17 Uta Griesenbach Specific inhibition of gene expression by small double stranded rnas
SE0104251D0 (en) 2001-12-14 2001-12-14 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
DE10302421A1 (en) * 2003-01-21 2004-07-29 Ribopharma Ag New double-stranded interfering RNA, useful for inhibiting hepatitis C virus, has one strand linked to a lipophilic group to improve activity and eliminate the need for transfection auxiliaries
EP2216407B1 (en) * 2003-03-07 2016-01-13 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic compositions
EP1608735A4 (en) * 2003-04-03 2008-11-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Irna conjugates
US20070179100A1 (en) * 2003-04-09 2007-08-02 Muthiah Manoharan Protected monomers
CA2521464C (en) * 2003-04-09 2013-02-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Irna conjugates
AU2004232964B2 (en) * 2003-04-17 2011-09-22 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Protected monomers
US8796436B2 (en) * 2003-04-17 2014-08-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US7723509B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2010-05-25 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals IRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
SE0303541D0 (en) 2003-12-22 2003-12-22 Astrazeneca Ab New compounds
EP2990410A1 (en) * 2004-08-10 2016-03-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
CA3043911A1 (en) * 2007-12-04 2009-07-02 Arbutus Biopharma Corporation Targeting lipids
JP5788312B2 (en) 2008-04-11 2015-09-30 アルニラム ファーマスーティカルズ インコーポレイテッドＡｌｎｙｌａｍ Ｐｈａｒｍａｃｅｕｔｉｃａｌｓ， Ｉｎｃ． Site-specific delivery of nucleic acids by combining targeting ligands with endosomal degradable components
CA2732229C (en) 2008-07-25 2023-10-17 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Enhancement of sirna silencing activity using universal bases or mismatches in the sense strand

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5519134A (en) * 1994-01-11 1996-05-21 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrrolidine-containing monomers and oligomers
US6369237B1 (en) * 1997-03-07 2002-04-09 President And Fellows Of Harvard College DNA glycosylase inhibitors, and uses related thereto
US20020086356A1 (en) * 2000-03-30 2002-07-04 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research RNA sequence-specific mediators of RNA interference
US20030170891A1 (en) * 2001-06-06 2003-09-11 Mcswiggen James A. RNA interference mediated inhibition of epidermal growth factor receptor gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
US20050107325A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2005-05-19 Muthiah Manoharan Modified iRNA agents
US20050119214A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2005-06-02 Muthiah Manoharan Nuclease resistant double-stranded ribonucleic acid

Cited By (123)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8344125B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2013-01-01 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US10119138B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2018-11-06 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
US20100076056A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-03-25 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US9476045B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2016-10-25 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
US10676740B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2020-06-09 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US20100179309A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-07-15 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US11015194B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2021-05-25 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
US20100292455A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-11-18 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals MODIFIED iRNA AGENTS
US7851615B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2010-12-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Lipophilic conjugated iRNA agents
US11312957B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2022-04-26 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US8865677B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2014-10-21 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
US8017762B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2011-09-13 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US8796436B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2014-08-05 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US8507661B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2013-08-13 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US8426377B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2013-04-23 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. iRNA agents with biocleavable tethers
US9394540B2 (en) 2003-04-17 2016-07-19 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified iRNA agents
US20100267941A1 (en) * 2003-04-17 2010-10-21 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Irna agents with biocleavable tethers
US9133233B2 (en) * 2003-11-04 2015-09-15 Geron Corporation RNA amidates and thioamidates for RNAi
US9822360B2 (en) 2003-11-04 2017-11-21 Geron Corporation RNA amidates and thioamidates for RNAi
US10655127B2 (en) 2003-11-04 2020-05-19 Geron Corporation RNA amidates and thioamidates for RNAi
US20070275919A1 (en) * 2003-11-04 2007-11-29 Sergei Gryaznov Rna Amidates and Thioamidates for Rnai
US20090105174A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2009-04-23 Amgen Inc. Nucleic acids hybridizable to micro rna and precursors thereof
US20110118340A1 (en) * 2008-02-08 2011-05-19 Muthiah Manoharan Delivery of rnai constructs to oligodendrocytes
WO2010040063A1 (en) * 2008-10-03 2010-04-08 The Charlotte-Mecklenburg Hospital Authority D/B/A Carolinas Medical Center Treatment of hepatitis c infection with metalloporphyrins
US20100086519A1 (en) * 2008-10-03 2010-04-08 The Charlotte-Mecklenburg Hospital Authority D/B/A Carolinas Medical Center Treatment of Hepatitis C Infection With Metalloporphyrins
EP3225281A1 (en) 2008-12-10 2017-10-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Gnaq targeted dsrna compositions and methods for inhibiting expression
US9957505B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2018-05-01 Halo-Bio Rnai Therapeutics, Inc. Polynucleotides for multivalent RNA interference, compositions and methods of use thereof
US9200276B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2015-12-01 Halo-Bio Rnai Therapeutics, Inc. Polynucleotides for multivalent RNA interference, compositions and methods of use thereof
EP3494963A1 (en) 2009-12-18 2019-06-12 The University of British Columbia Methods and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids
WO2011075656A1 (en) 2009-12-18 2011-06-23 The University Of British Columbia Methods and compositions for delivery of nucleic acids
EP3329924A1 (en) 2010-03-29 2018-06-06 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sirna therapy for transthyretin (ttr) related ocular amyloidosis
US9725479B2 (en) 2010-04-22 2017-08-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 5′-end derivatives
DE102010022937A1 (en) * 2010-06-04 2011-12-08 Universitätsklinikum Jena Cell-specific activatable biologically active molecules based on siRNA, methods for their activation and application kit for administration
WO2012016188A2 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents
WO2012016184A2 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for delivery of active agents
EP3202760A1 (en) 2011-01-11 2017-08-09 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pegylated lipids and their use for drug delivery
WO2012099755A1 (en) 2011-01-11 2012-07-26 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pegylated lipids and their use for drug delivery
US9725718B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2017-08-08 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of protein C (PROC) genes
US11118181B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2021-09-14 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of protein C (PROC) genes
US9970006B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2018-05-15 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of apolipoprotein C-III (APOC3) genes
US10273478B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2019-04-30 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of protein C (PROC) genes
US9315813B2 (en) * 2011-06-21 2016-04-19 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc Compositions and methods for inhibition of expression of apolipoprotein C-III (APOC3) genes
US20140113957A1 (en) * 2011-06-21 2014-04-24 Brian Bettencourt Compositions and Methods for Inhibition of Expression of Apolipoprotein C-III (APOC3) Genes
US10023861B2 (en) 2011-08-29 2018-07-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomer-conjugate complexes and their use
EP2750681A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2014-07-09 Quanta Biodesign, Ltd. Branched discrette peg constructs
EP2750681A4 (en) * 2011-08-30 2015-03-25 Quanta Biodesign Ltd Branched discrette peg constructs
WO2013049328A1 (en) 2011-09-27 2013-04-04 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Di-aliphatic substituted pegylated lipids
EP3456317A1 (en) 2011-09-27 2019-03-20 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Di-aliphatic substituted pegylated lipids
EP3828275A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2021-06-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating ttr expression
WO2014179627A2 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating hbv and ttr expression
EP4438129A2 (en) 2013-05-01 2024-10-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein c-iii expression
US11851655B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2023-12-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
WO2014179625A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR MODULATING APOLIPOPROTEIN (a) EXPRESSION
US9127276B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-09-08 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
US9932581B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-04-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein C-III expression
US9932580B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-04-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating HBV expression
US9957504B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-05-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
US11299736B1 (en) 2013-05-01 2022-04-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
US9181550B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-11-10 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
US9181549B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-11-10 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
WO2014179620A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
EP3633039A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2020-04-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods
WO2014179629A2 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods
US10883104B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2021-01-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
EP3524680A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-08-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating ttr expression
EP3690049A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2020-08-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein c-iii expression
US9163239B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-10-20 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein C-III expression
US9714421B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2017-07-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods
US10683499B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2020-06-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating TTR expression
US9145558B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-09-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating HBV expression
WO2014179626A2 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating apolipoprotein c-iii expression
WO2015168172A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Linkage modified oligomeric compounds
US9926556B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2018-03-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Linkage modified oligomeric compounds
EP3647318A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2020-05-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Linkage modified oligomeric compounds
US10280423B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2019-05-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
US9382540B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2016-07-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Compositions and methods for modulating angiopoietin-like 3 expression
EP3845547A1 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-07-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Galnac3 conjugated modified oligonucleotide for modulating angiopoietin-like 3 expression
US9994855B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2018-06-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
EP3608406A1 (en) 2014-05-01 2020-02-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor b expression
US11732265B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
EP4219718A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2023-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor b expression
WO2015168589A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating angiopoietin-like 3 expression
US11312964B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2022-04-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
EP3862362A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-08-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugates of modified antisense oligonucleotides and their use for modulating pkk expression
EP3974534A1 (en) 2014-05-01 2022-03-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
US10793862B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2020-10-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
US10875884B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2020-12-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating angiopoietin-like 3 expression
EP3757215A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2020-12-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
WO2015168618A2 (en) 2014-05-01 2015-11-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
US10570169B2 (en) 2014-05-22 2020-02-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
US12013403B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2024-06-18 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions and methods for detection of SMN protein in a subject and treatment of a subject
US11142766B2 (en) 2014-11-17 2021-10-12 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Apolipoprotein C3 (APOC3) iRNA compositions and methods of use thereof
US11408001B1 (en) 2014-11-17 2022-08-09 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Apolipoprotein C3 (APOC3) iRNA compositions and methods of use thereof
EP4092119A2 (en) 2015-07-10 2022-11-23 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of diacyglycerol acyltransferase 2 (dgat2)
US10731157B2 (en) 2015-08-24 2020-08-04 Halo-Bio Rnai Therapeutics, Inc. Polynucleotide nanoparticles for the modulation of gene expression and uses thereof
WO2017053722A1 (en) 2015-09-24 2017-03-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of kras expression
US10557137B2 (en) 2015-11-06 2020-02-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
WO2017079745A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
EP4119569A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2023-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
US11319536B2 (en) 2015-11-06 2022-05-03 Ionis Pharmacueticals, Inc. Modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
US10246709B2 (en) 2016-03-07 2019-04-02 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands for therapeutic compounds
US12116573B2 (en) 2016-03-07 2024-10-15 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands for therapeutic compounds
WO2018014041A2 (en) 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
EP4206213A1 (en) 2016-07-15 2023-07-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
US10294474B2 (en) 2016-09-02 2019-05-21 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands
US11174481B2 (en) 2016-09-02 2021-11-16 Arrowhead Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeting ligands
US11400161B2 (en) 2016-10-06 2022-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of conjugating oligomeric compounds
WO2018100558A2 (en) 2016-12-01 2018-06-07 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Cyclic dinucleotide
EP3868384A1 (en) 2016-12-01 2021-08-25 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Cyclic dinucleotides as sting (stimulator of interferon genes) agonists
EP4309732A2 (en) 2017-03-24 2024-01-24 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pcsk9 expression
WO2019140452A1 (en) 2018-01-15 2019-07-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of dnm2 expression
US11332733B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2022-05-17 lonis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
US11149264B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2021-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
WO2019217527A1 (en) 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fxi expression
WO2020033748A1 (en) 2018-08-08 2020-02-13 Arcturus Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and agents against nonalcoholic steatohepatitis
WO2020061200A1 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-03-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pnpla3 expression
US11666588B2 (en) 2019-01-15 2023-06-06 Empirico Inc. Prodrugs of ALOX-15 inhibitors and methods of using the same
US11116778B2 (en) 2019-01-15 2021-09-14 Empirico Inc. Prodrugs of ALOX-15 inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2021074772A1 (en) 2019-10-14 2021-04-22 Astrazeneca Ab Modulators of pnpla3 expression
US11299737B1 (en) 2020-02-28 2022-04-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating SMN2
US11447521B2 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-09-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating angiotensinogen expression
WO2022239001A1 (en) 2021-05-10 2022-11-17 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions for treating neurological conditions
WO2023056440A1 (en) 2021-10-01 2023-04-06 Adarx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Prekallikrein-modulating compositions and methods of use thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20100292455A1 (en) 2010-11-18
AU2004233092C9 (en) 2010-10-28
US8507661B2 (en) 2013-08-13
EP2669377A3 (en) 2015-10-14
EP2666858A1 (en) 2013-11-27
US8344125B2 (en) 2013-01-01
US20050119214A1 (en) 2005-06-02
WO2004094595A3 (en) 2007-10-25
US11312957B2 (en) 2022-04-26
DK1620544T3 (en) 2019-01-14
US20050107325A1 (en) 2005-05-19
CA2522637C (en) 2014-01-21
US20220403377A1 (en) 2022-12-22
AU2004233092C1 (en) 2010-01-14
CA2522637A1 (en) 2004-11-04
EP2660322A2 (en) 2013-11-06
WO2004094595A2 (en) 2004-11-04
EP1620544A2 (en) 2006-02-01
EP2664672A1 (en) 2013-11-20
AU2009213011B2 (en) 2012-01-19
AU2004233092B2 (en) 2009-07-09
US7745608B2 (en) 2010-06-29
EP1620544B1 (en) 2018-09-19
EP2669377A8 (en) 2014-01-15
JP4597976B2 (en) 2010-12-15
JP2007525454A (en) 2007-09-06
ES2702942T3 (en) 2019-03-06
EP2669377A2 (en) 2013-12-04
US20190345498A1 (en) 2019-11-14
EP1620544A4 (en) 2011-03-02
US20100179309A1 (en) 2010-07-15
EP2660322A3 (en) 2013-11-13
AU2009213011A1 (en) 2009-10-08
AU2004233092A1 (en) 2004-11-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8344125B2 (en) Modified iRNA agents
US20190264203A1 (en) Glycoconjugates of rna interference agents
ES2805026T3 (en) Nucleic acid bound to a trivalent glycoconjugate
US9453222B2 (en) Ligand-conjugated monomers
US10676740B2 (en) Modified iRNA agents
US20110218334A1 (en) PHOSPHOROTHIOATE OLIGONUCLEOTIDES AND NON-NUCLEOSIDIC PHOSPHOROTHIOATES AS DELIVERY AGENTS FOR iRNA AGENTS
US20240336914A1 (en) 2&#39;-modified nucleoside based oligonucleotide prodrugs
US20110166198A1 (en) Rna compositions for modulating immune response

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ALNYLAM PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:MANOHARAN, MUTHIAH;RAJEEV, KALLANTHOTTATHIL G.;REEL/FRAME:015516/0248

Effective date: 20041216

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION